JP2021186049A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which suppresses enhancement in gambling property and provides sound game properties.SOLUTION: In group notice performance, suitable group notice performance can be provided by designing a second display period in which characters appear one after another and proceed to be longer than a first display period in which display of the characters first starts and the display of the characters ends first. In the group notice performance, there are no situations that only one person is displayed, so that it is possible to prevent a question over whether or not it is group notice performance or misunderstanding that only one person will appear.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-16

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). There is a machine (so-called pachinko machine) that is configured to change the state of the machine, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for the player who can easily win the ball, or becomes advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if there is a prize in a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left middle right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in a state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. For example, in Patent Document 1, when the number of special figure games executed in a normal gaming state (number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 times (special number of times), a big hit (advantageous state) does not occur (special). (Satisfaction of conditions), the game state is controlled to the probable change state, the probability that it is decided to be a big hit as a result of the special figure game is increased to about 1/100, and the big hit is likely to occur in the subsequent special figure games. It is stated that. Further, in Patent Document 1, when a big hit does not occur even if the number of special figure games (number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 times in a normal gaming state, a time saving state is generated instead of a probable change state. It is stated that it may be a thing.

JP-A-2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.)

However, there is room for improvement in the control of the variable display that can be controlled to a special state based on the number of executions.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the improvement of gambling and realizes sound playability.

The gaming machine according to the present invention executes a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information, and is in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 8-17, which is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) and variable display are executed. The update means is provided with an update means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a portion for executing step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13), and the state control means is updated by the update means. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by making the numerical information obtained a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, step 100 IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100. , The part that executes step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100), the updating means executes variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated between the case and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100).
Moreover,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 96 to 102. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 96 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 99 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 101 (a37) to 102 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 59 and 96).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is variablely displayed, the numerical information is continuously updated, which makes it easier for the player to be rescued and motivates the game. Can be done. Further, according to such a configuration, the group effect can be more preferably executed.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the following gaming machine (A). Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a group effect of displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-050851. A gaming machine capable of performing a group production in which images of a plurality of curactors and objects appear is disclosed. According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to enjoy the game by executing the group production, but there is still room for improvement in such a group production.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of more preferably performing group production.

The gaming machine according to the means (A) is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It ’s a gaming machine 1),
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. It is characterized in that a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 58 and 95).
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect.

It should be noted that the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 120IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball apparatus in a feature part 120IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like in a feature part 120IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the big hit determination table, the small hit determination table, and the time saving loss determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table and the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time saving type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 120IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing in a feature part 120IW. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process processing in a feature part 120IW. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing after closing a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a state transition diagram for demonstrating the state transition in a feature part 120IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing of the setting suggestion effect decision table at the time of relief. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is explanatory drawing of the setting suggestion effect decision table at the time of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode at the time of shifting to the relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode at the time of shifting to the relief time reduction. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit closing post-processing in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit closing post-processing in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing in the modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing in the modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in the modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing in the modification 6. It is a timing chart which shows the timing of the look-ahead notice effect restriction period in the modification 7. It is a timing chart which shows the timing of the control of various time saving states in the modification 8. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table and the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 090IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 090IW. It is a flowchart which shows the processing after closing a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 113IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 113IW. It is a flowchart which shows the processing example which concerns the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing example which concerns the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting demo production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the telop display execution lottery table and the telop display mode determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time saving type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an external output signal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. It is a time chart for explaining the control example of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the time saving rush effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the time saving rush effect in the modification 1-3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of transition of the gaming state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in the modification 2. It is a timing chart which shows the timing to execute each effect in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the fanning reach in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the relief time reduction establishment notification in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control example of the gaming state in the modification 2. FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure LED board and the 4th symbol unit. It is the figure which looked into between the game board and an image display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of a screen in an image display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating various boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating a hit type. It is a figure for demonstrating each random number. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an effect control command. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the prevariation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the post-variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the prevariation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the sub side. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table in each notice production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process of opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening post-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of group notice setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of group notice execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a group notice work process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure which shows the whole picture of the 6-person group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the auxiliary display used in a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the motion blur processing used in a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of the contour when characters overlap in a group notice effect. It is the figure which looked into between the game board and an image display device during execution of a group notice production. It is a figure which shows the whole picture of the Baku Chu Mondai notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of volume and the luminance data table in a group notice effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the occurrence timing of the 6-person group notice in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the occurrence timing of the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the luminance data table at the time of all lighting. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the luminance data table at the time of a PUSH effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a group notice luminance data table which concerns on a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group notice luminance data table which concerns on a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of the comparative example in the case where the 6-person group notice is executed in the stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the background notice is executed in the stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when a lamp notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. 3 is for explaining the production mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in the stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the details of a boingo group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode of the comparative example when the boingo group notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode of the comparative example when the boingo group notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the dog group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the dog group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the 6-person group notice and the dog group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the group notice effect is executed in the reach line. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the group notice effect is executed in the reach line.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead determination, etc. is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the jackpot production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 120IW)
Next, the feature portion 120IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 120IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state (non-time saving state) or a time saving state. In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, as compared with the normal state. There is a high probability that you will get a "hit" in a normal game. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10%, while in the short time state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90%, and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). It will be easier to do. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) can be used by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the time saving state after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a shorter time based on the above.

Further, in this example, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, after the big hit occurs, and after the time reduction occurs, the next big hit or the time reduction occurs even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) is finished. Even if it is not done, it may be controlled to a time saving state (relief time saving).

In the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). Control to lengthen and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of those (1) to (4) may be controlled, or (1) to It is not necessary to control a part of (4). For example, which of (1) to (4) may be controlled differs between the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be the same.

It is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the relief time is controlled and the number of time reductions N in the relief time are specified as follows.
2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P
0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time reductions N is 120 to 1140.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed in the time saving state, but as will be described later, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit probability is high. Since it is configured, the time saving state is a state in which it is easy to be controlled by the small hit game state.

(Board composition)
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature portion 120IW. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 120IW, in the game area, the first path of the flow path through which the game ball flows is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game is played. Of the flow paths through which the sphere flows, a second path different from the first path is mainly provided in the region on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to make the game ball flow down to the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to make the game ball flow down to the second path is called right-handed hitting. Since the first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by driving the game ball on the left side of the game area, it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route may be referred to as a right-handed route because the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by driving the game ball on the right side of the game area.

The first route and the second route may be configured by different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the game nails in the game area.

The game ball launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball striking handle 30 and driven into the game area is guided along, for example, an array of game nails when guided to the left game area. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the game ball to the left game area.

The winning ball device 6A constituting the first starting winning opening is provided as a structure in which the gaming ball divided into the left gaming area of the gaming area can enter.

As a structure in which the game ball divided into the right game area of the game area can enter, the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B constituting the second starting winning opening, and the special variable winning opening constituting the special winning opening A ball device 120IW17 and a special variable winning ball device 7 constituting a large winning opening are provided.

In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that the game ball is guided to the prize ball device 6A in the prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the winning ball device 6A, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, a game nail is provided so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7 among the winning opening structures. It has been planted. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7, the player can hit the game ball to the right. good.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that the game ball hit in the right game area may enter the winning ball device 6A, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is the game hit in the left game area. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the spheres will enter them. On the contrary, the game ball hit in the left game area may enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is right. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls hit in the game area will enter them.

The special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is a device for determining V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 120IW, in addition to the board surface configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. It is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-handed notification LED 120IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 in the feature unit 120IW. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 120IW17a formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and the bottom surface member 120IW17a is provided in the small hit game state. The special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened by moving the bottom member 120IW17a backward from the closed state in which the bottom member 120IW17a is moved forward. The game ball that has won a prize in the special winning opening is detected by the special winning opening switch 120IW24.

In this example, when a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) and is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are obtained, whereas a special variable winning ball is obtained. When a game ball wins in the ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) and is detected by the special winning opening switch 120IW24, three prize balls are obtained.

Further, the bottom member 120IW17a is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 120IW83 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In the feature unit 120IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the game ball winning in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) is further provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. Guided by 120IW01. The guidance path 120IW01 is further branched into two paths 120IW02,03, and the game ball guided to the guidance path 120IW01 is guided to the left side path 120IW02 or the right side path 120IW03. The left route 120IW02 is a V winning opening, and the game ball winning in the V winning opening is detected by the V winning opening switch 120IW20a.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, a V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is provided near the entrance of the left side route 120IW02 (V winning opening), and the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is guided when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is in the open state. The game ball guided to the route 120IW01 enters the left route 120IW02 (V winning opening), and the V winning opening is possible. Further, when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is in the closed state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 120IW01 enters the right side path 120IW03 and is discharged to the back side of the game area.

The V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 120IW84 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the feature unit 120IW, when controlled to the small hit gaming state, the game ball enters the V winning opening 120IW02 during the small hit gaming state, and is detected by the V winning opening switch 120IW20A. After the end of the small hit game, it is controlled to the big hit game state.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is formed with a plurality of regulation pieces that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member 120IW17a. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is provided with a regulation piece, so that the game ball flowing down from the upper right to the lower left direction meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, so that the flow direction of the game ball is changed. Let it change and delay its flow time compared to the absence of regulatory pieces.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening), the special winning opening switch 120IW24 is provided on the upstream side, and the V winning opening and the discharging port are provided on the downstream side. Although the case where the V winning opening switch 120IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the upstream side of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) branches into the V winning opening side and the general winning opening side, and the V winning opening switch 120IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side and is also general. The special winning opening switch 120IW24 may be provided on the winning opening side.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 8-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 120IW. As shown in FIG. 8-3, in the feature unit 120IW, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), a count switch 23, and a special winning port. The detection signal from the switch 120IW24 and the V winning opening switch 120IW20a (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a solenoid 120IW83, a signal for turning on the solenoid 120IW84, etc.), a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory, or a big prize. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 for the mouth door (special variable winning ball device 7), the solenoid 120IW83 for the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the solenoid 120IW84 for the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability, miss probability)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A) shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 8-4 (B) shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values “1” to “6”. Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the case where the set value is "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous for the player. It is set. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "328/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set. , The small hit probability is constant as "164/65536" (about 1/400).

Further, regarding the loss with the time reduction, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), it is related to which of the set values "1" to "6" is used when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. There is no small hit probability, which is constant at "328/65536" (about 1/200).

On the other hand, regarding the loss without time reduction, as shown in Fig. 8-4 (A), in the case with time reduction, the case of the set value "1" is a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. The probability is the highest at "64839/65536", and the probability of losing the setting value "2", the setting value "3", the setting value "4", and the setting value "5" decreases in this order, and the case of the setting value "6" is lost. The probability is the lowest, "64716/65536".

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the case where the set value is "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the highest for the player. It is a disadvantageous setting. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "328/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is used when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. , The small hit probability is constant as "9362/65536" (about 1/7).

Further, regarding the loss with the time reduction, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), it is related to which of the set values "1" to "6" is used when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. There is no small hit probability, which is constant at "164/65536" (about 1/400).

On the other hand, regarding the loss without time reduction, as shown in Fig. 8-4 (B), in the case with time reduction, the case of the set value "1" is a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. The probability is the highest at "55805 / 65536", and the probability of losing the setting value "2", the setting value "3", the setting value "4", and the setting value "5" decreases in this order, and the case of the setting value "6" is lost. The probability is the lowest, "55682/65536".

As shown in FIG. 8-4, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit probability is about 1/400, whereas the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. When executed, the small hit probability is as high as about 1/7.

(Big hit type judgment table, small hit type judgment table)
8-5 (A) and 8-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-5 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to either "6R time saving jackpot A" or "6R time saving jackpot B".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to "10R time saving jackpot".

"6R time saving big hit A" is a big hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state. The "6R time-saving jackpot B" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It should be noted that the "6R time-saving jackpot A" and the "6R time-saving jackpot B" are different from each other in the stop symbol of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be derived and displayed. The "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as "6R time saving big hit A" with a probability of 70%, and 30 It is determined as "6R time saving jackpot B" with a probability of%. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as "10R time saving big hit" with a 100% probability. ..

8-5 (C) and 8-5 (D) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (C) shows a specific example of the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-5 (D) shows a specific example of the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of small hit to "small hit A".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (D), the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. Therefore, it is a table referred to for determining the type of small hit to "small hit A" or "small hit B".

"Small hit A" is controlled to the big hit game state of the 2nd to 6th rounds on condition that the V prize is won during the small hit game (1st round), and the time is shortened after the end of the big hit game state. It is a small hit to shift to the state. "Small hit B" is controlled to the big hit game state of the 2nd to 10th rounds on condition that the V prize is won during the small hit game (1st round), and the time is shortened after the end of the big hit game state. It is a small hit to shift to the state.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, it is determined as "small hit A" with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (D), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, it is determined as "small hit A" with a probability of 30%. , 70% chance of being determined as "small hit B".

(Time saving type judgment table)
8-6 (A) and 8-6 (B) are explanatory views showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-6 (A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-6 (B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), the time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the type of time saving loss A, "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the type of time saving loss A, "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the time reduction is lost, it is determined as "time reduction loss A" with a probability of about 33%. With a probability of about 33%, it is determined to be "time reduction B", and with a probability of about 33%, it is determined to be "time reduction C". Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the time reduction is lost, it is determined as "time reduction loss A" with a probability of about 33%. With a probability of about 33%, it is determined to be "out of time B", and with a probability of about 33%, it is determined to be "out of time C".

(Design judgment table)
8-7 and 8-8 are explanatory views showing specific examples of the symbol determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-7 (A) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time-saving jackpot A. Further, FIG. 8-7 (B) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time saving jackpot B. Further, FIG. 8-7 (C) shows a specific example of a symbol determination table for a 10R time-saving jackpot. Further, FIG. 8-7 (D) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small hit A. Further, FIG. 8-7 (E) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small hit B. Further, FIG. 8-8 (F) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time saving deviation A. Further, FIG. 8-8 (G) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time saving deviation B. Further, FIG. 8-8 (H) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time saving deviation C. Further, FIG. 8-8 (I) shows a specific example of a symbol determination table for loss (no time reduction).

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the symbol determination table is a table referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol based on a random number for symbol determination according to a large hit type, a small hit type, a time saving type, and the like. Is.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the result is "6R time saving jackpot A", the symbol "3" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the case of "6R time saving jackpot B", the symbol "5" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), in the case of "10R time saving jackpot", the symbol "7" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-7 (D), when the result is "small hit A", the symbol "1" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-7 (E), when the result is "small hit B", the symbol "9" is determined with a 100% probability.

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (F), in the case of "time saving loss A", the symbol "6" is determined with a probability of 50%, and the symbol "8" is determined with a probability of 50%. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (G), in the case of "time saving out of B", the symbol "4" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (H), in the case of "time saving C", the symbol "9" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (I), in the case of a loss (no time reduction), the symbol "-" is determined with a 100% probability.

In addition, the specific example of the stop symbol of the special symbol is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in this example, the case where the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of one LED of 7 segments and the stop symbol of the special symbol is represented by a one-digit number is shown. However, it may be configured by two 7-segment LEDs so that the stop symbol of the special symbol is represented by a two-digit number. In this case, for example, "6R time saving big hit A", "6R time saving big hit B", "10R time saving big hit", "small hit A", "small hit B", "time saving loss B", "time saving loss C", " Even in the case of "missing (no time reduction)", a plurality of types of special symbols may be configured so that the stop symbols can be determined.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, a case is shown in which a stop symbol of a special symbol is determined using a random number for symbol determination, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol by using the random number for type determination in combination. When the type determination random number is also used, for example, when the jackpot type is determined to be "6R time saving jackpot A", the value of the type determination random number is 0 to 125 (Fig. 8-125). 5 (A)), in FIG. 8-7 (A), 0 to 125 may be allocated as the symbol determination value to configure the symbol determination table for the 6R time reduction jackpot A. Further, for example, when the time saving type is determined to be "time saving loss A", the value of the random number for type determination is 0 to 59 (see FIG. 8-6), so FIG. 8-8 (see FIG. 8-6). In F), 0 to 29 may be allocated to the symbol "6" and 30 to 59 may be allocated to the symbol "8" as the symbol determination value to configure the symbol determination table for the time saving loss A.

(Opening pattern of small hit game)
Next, the opening pattern of the small hit game will be described. FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 8-9, when 8 seconds have elapsed after starting the small hit game at timing S1 (timing S2), the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, and then 8 seconds elapse. The open state of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is continued until (see FIG. 8-9 (C)).

In the case of a small hit (small hit A, small hit B), it is set as the time before opening the special winning opening (fanfare time) from the start of the small hit game to the control of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 in the open state. Eight seconds are set, and the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state, and at the same time, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) is controlled to the open state. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), while the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, the special winning opening is opened four times for 0.016 seconds. Therefore, in the small hit (small hit A, small hit B), the special winning opening for 0.016 seconds is opened four times during the period in which the V winning is possible.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning opening in the small hit (small hit A, small hit B) is as short as 0.016 seconds, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 Is formed with a plurality of restricted pieces, and on the bottom member 120IW17a of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, about 2 to 3 game balls meander and flow down, so even if the opening time is short, the bottom member 120IW17a If is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball on the bottom member 120IW17a can fall into the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to win a prize.

If a game ball wins in the special winning opening and wins a V, after the closing time (interval time) and small hit end time (ending time) of a predetermined period have passed after the final opening of the special winning opening is completed, a big hit The game state is entered, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state from the second round to the sixth round or the tenth round.

In this example, when the final opening of the special winning opening is completed in the small hit game, the small hit game is ended based on the lapse of the closing time (interval time) and the small hit end time (ending time). The case is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, detection switches capable of detecting a game ball are provided in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) at two locations, the upstream side and the downstream side, and after the final closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the upstream side. After waiting until the number of detections of the detection switch on the side and the detection switch on the downstream side match (all the winning game balls are ejected in the special winning opening), the game shifts to the small hit end time (ending time), and the small hit The small hit game may be configured to end when the end time (ending time) has elapsed.

Further, in this example, both the small hit A and the small hit B are configured so that the V prize can be won during the small hit game, but the V prize is difficult or impossible during the small hit game. The hit type may also be provided.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 120IW. Of these, FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B) show specific examples of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Further, FIGS. 8-10 (C) and 8-10 (D) show specific examples of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol. Further, FIGS. 8-10 (E) and 8-10 (F) show specific examples of a variation pattern table (for non-time reduction state) for time reduction deviation. Further, FIG. 8-10 (G) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for shortening the relief time.

First, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B). As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PT1-1 (normally) is used as the variation pattern. It is determined to be one of variation), variation pattern PT1-2 (shortened variation), variation pattern PT1-3 (normal reach), and variation pattern PT1-4 (super reach). In addition, when executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, either the variation pattern PT1-5 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT1-6 (super reach) is used as the variation pattern. Will be decided. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if a small hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern is either the variation pattern PT1-7 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT1-8 (super reach). Is decided.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed and the deviation occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PT2-1 (high speed) is used as the fluctuation pattern. It is decided to be out of order). Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time saving state, the variation pattern PT2-2 (high-speed jackpot variation) is determined as the variation pattern. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if a small hit occurs during the time saving state, the variation pattern PT2-3 (high-speed small hit variation) is determined as the variation pattern.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-10 (C) and 8-10 (D). As shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the variation occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PT4-1 (normally) is used as the variation pattern. It is determined to be one of variation), variation pattern PT4-2 (shortened variation), variation pattern PT4-3 (normal reach), and variation pattern PT4-4 (super reach). Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, either the variation pattern PT4-5 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT4-6 (super reach) is used as the variation pattern. Will be decided. Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if a small hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern is either the variation pattern PT4-7 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT4-8 (super reach). Is decided.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is out of alignment during the time saving state (including both the first time saving state and the second time saving state). In the case, as the fluctuation pattern, any one of the fluctuation pattern PT5-1 (shortened fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PT5-2 (super shortened fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PT5-3 (normal reach), and the fluctuation pattern PT5-4 (super reach). Will be decided. In addition, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if a big hit occurs during the time reduction state (including both the first time reduction state and the second time reduction state), the variation pattern PT5-5 (variation pattern PT5-5 (including both the first time reduction state and the second time reduction state)) It is determined to be either normal reach) or fluctuation pattern PT5-6 (super reach). In addition, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if a small hit occurs during the time reduction state (including both the first time reduction state and the second time reduction state), the variation pattern PT5-7 is used as the variation pattern. It is determined to be either (normal reach) or fluctuation pattern PT5-8 (super reach).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the time saving deviation (for the non-time saving state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-10 (E) and 8-10 (F). As shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), in this example, when the time reduction is out of A to C (designations "2", "4", "6") in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern is changed. It is determined to be either pattern PT6-1 (normal variation) or variation pattern PT6-2 (time saving fanning effect).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (F), in this example, when the time saving is out of A (symbol "8") in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PT7-1 (normal fluctuation) and the fluctuation. It is determined to be either pattern PT7-2 (time saving fanning effect) or variable pattern PT7-3 (time saving revival effect).

In this example, when the time reduction is A to C in the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the same as the deviation (no time reduction).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the relief time reduction will be described with reference to FIG. 8-10 (G). As shown in FIG. 8-10 (G), in this example, in the case of a small hit or a miss, the variation pattern PT8-1 (relief time shortening rush effect) is determined as the variation pattern. To.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. The control to execute the variable display is performed, but in this example, it is decided that the normal state has a 10% probability of hitting the normal figure, and the time saving state has a 90% probability. It is decided that it will be a hit with a probability. Further, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) in the open state based on the determination that the normal symbol hit is achieved in the normal symbol process process (step S26).

(Direction control command)
8-11 and 8-12 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-11 and 8-12, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Variation pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when any one of the commands 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command to be non-time saving. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (missing designation) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation A (symbol "8"). Command)). Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (missing designation) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation A (symbol "6"). Command)). Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (missing designation) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation B (symbol "4"). Command)). Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command) (missing designation) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation C (symbol "2"). Command)).

Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (6R time reduction jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R time reduction jackpot A. Is. Command 9007 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R time-saving jackpot B (display result 7 designation command (6R time-saving jackpot B designation command)). Is. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (10R time reduction jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 10R time reduction jackpot. ..

The command 9009 (H) is an effect control command (display result 9 designation command (small hit A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the small hit A. .. The command 900A (H) is an effect control command (display result 10 designation command (small hit B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the small hit B. ..

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B300 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. The command B301 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening. The command B402 (H) is an effect control command (V winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been decremented by 1. The command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been decremented by 1.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time reduction state at the end of the big hit game. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time reduction state when the time reduction is lost. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state at the time of relief time saving.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) that specifies to start right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) for designating the end of right-handed notification.

The command E2XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating a set setting value. The set value set in "XX" is set. For example, when the setting value is set to "1", the command E201 (H) is transmitted, and when the setting value is set to "6", the command E206 (H) is transmitted.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 8-11 and 8-12, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. It should be noted that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 8-11 and 8-12 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the feature unit 120IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S2, the processes of steps S3 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

In this example, when the initial setting is performed in step S2, the CPU 103 performs a setting change / confirmation process (step 120IWS11). In the setting change / confirmation process, it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a set value command according to the currently set set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS12).

Further, when the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step 120IWS13). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter. That is, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and then the jackpot and the time reduction are not generated even if the fluctuation display is executed 900 times, the relief time is shortened and the time reduction state is achieved. Will be controlled by. In this example, the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter can be specified based on the effect control command for instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9.

In this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter to make the initial setting, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, it may be configured not to perform the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the state of continuation of the value of the relief time reduction counter on the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, the relief time reduction counter is configured not to be initially set only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear processing is executed, and the RAM is configured. When the error is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction counter may be initially set.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the feature unit 120IW. In this example, the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) is substantially the same as the starting winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. Further, the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110) to the special symbol stop process (step 120IWS113) are substantially the same as the special symbol normal process (step S110) to the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. However, in this example, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the process proceeds to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 120IWS114). Further, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (so-called direct hit), the process proceeds to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 120IWS117).

Small hit release pre-processing (step 120IWS114): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 100 executes a process of controlling the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state, and changes the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to the small hit opening process (step). It is updated to the value corresponding to 120IWS115) (5 in this example).

Small hit opening process (step 120IWS115): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. When the opening time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is open, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to be in the closed state, and the closing time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is closed and is still open. If the number of times remains, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to be in the open state. Further, when the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is reached, the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, and when the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is reached, the V winning opening opening / closing plate is closed. The 120IW20 is controlled to the closed state. Further, it is confirmed whether or not the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is turned on, and if the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is turned on, the V winning opening flag is set. When all the opening of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is completed and the closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed to the value corresponding to the small hit closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) (step 120IWS116). In this example, it is updated to 6).

Small hit closing post-processing (step 120IWS116): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. When the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (7 in this example) corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 120IWS117). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110).

The jackpot opening pre-processing (step 120IWS117) to jackpot end processing (step 120IWS120) is substantially the same as the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) to jackpot end processing (step S117) shown in FIG.

In this example, when the game is determined to be a big hit and the big hit / small hit symbol is derived and displayed, or after the V prize is generated during the small hit game and the small hit game is completed, the game immediately shifts to the big hit game. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, instead of immediately shifting to the jackpot game, the game is configured to shift to the jackpot game on the condition that the game ball passes through the operating gate (which may also be used as the passing gate 41) provided in the game area. May be good.

(Special design normal processing)
8-15 and 8-16 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step 120 IWS110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 120IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 120IWS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage counter for counting the second reserved storage is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed on the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step 120IWS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS54).

In this feature unit 120IW, by executing the processes of steps 120IWS52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 120IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. And store it in the random number buffer area of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 120IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step 120IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to send a setting value command capable of specifying the currently set setting value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS58). In this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation every time the fluctuation display is executed is shown, but the setting value command is transmitted at the end of the fluctuation, for example, not limited to such a mode. It may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 reads a hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 120IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 120IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y of step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS64. On the other hand, if it is decided not to make a big hit (N in step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS66. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

In step 120 IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Further, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS65). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (A) is selected, and the value of the special symbol pointer is set. When "second" is shown, the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (B) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to use the type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (6R time-saving jackpot A, 6R time-saving jackpot B, 10R time-saving). The jackpot) is determined as the type of jackpot (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

On the other hand, in step 120IWS66, the CPU 103 selects the small hit determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small hit determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second". Select the small hit determination table for the second special symbol. Then, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on the random number for hit determination using the selected small hit determination table, and determines whether or not to make a small hit (step 120IWS67). In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) and 8-4 (B), the probability of being determined as a small hit is small at about 1/400 when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. It is determined to be a hit, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined to be a small hit with a probability of about 1/7.

When it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 120IWS69). Then, the CPU 103 selects the small hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS70). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (C) is selected, and the value of the special symbol pointer is selected. When indicates "second", the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (D) is selected. After selecting the small hit type determination table, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS71.

Unless it is decided to make a small hit (N in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 shifts to step 120IWS71.

In step 120IWS71, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit count counter for counting the number of small hits controlled during the time saving state is 0 (step 120IWS71). If the value of the small hit count counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS76.

If the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS72). If the small hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS76.

When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit count counter (step 120IWS73).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit count counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74). If the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS76.

When the value of the small hit count counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation (step 120IWS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS76.

In step 120IWS76, the CPU 103 confirms whether any of the time reduction flags is set (step 120IWS76). If neither of the time reduction flags is set, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS83. When any of the time reduction flags is set, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the total time reduction counter (step 120IWS77).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74), and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS82. When the count value of the total time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is to be started (step 120IWS79). It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is to be started can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. If it is not the case to start the variable display of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to step 120IWS83.

When starting the variation display of the second special symbol, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second time reduction counter (step 120IWS80), and determines whether or not the count value of the second time reduction counter after the subtraction is 0. Confirm (step 120 IWS81). The CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS83 when the count value of the second time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, while it proceeds to step 120IWS82 when the count value of the second time reduction counter after subtraction is 0.

In step 120IWS82, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation (step 120IWS82).

In this example, a case is shown in which steps 120IWS76 to S82 are executed before the count processing of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 120IWS83 to perform the subtraction processing of the time reduction counter. I can't be limited. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the time reduction counter after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 120IWS83. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that shortens the relief time, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "900" in the time reduction counter (see step 120IWS149), the value of the time reduction counter becomes 1 extra. Since the value is subtracted, the value of the time reduction counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process in the variable display that shortens the relief time. Further, it may be configured to set "901", which is one more time reduction counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 120IWS83). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the relief time reduction counter value (step 120IWS84). In this example, by executing the process of step 120IWS83, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state. Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 120IWS83, it does not matter whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , The value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS85). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 120IWS86). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS87.

In this example, since the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is executed not only in the case of the out-of-order fluctuation but also in the case of the small hit fluctuation, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction occurs. The fluctuation display may be a small hit fluctuation. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is not executed. Therefore, when the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction should occur is a jackpot fluctuation, the relief time reduction is not controlled. Normal jackpot control is performed.

In step 120IWS87, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS87). If the small hit flag is set, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS91. In this case, the CPU 103 uses the small hit type determination table selected in step 120IWS70, and uses the type (small hit A or small hit B) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area. Is determined as the type of small hit (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the second hold storage buffer, and determines the small hit type. Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined small hit type in the small hit type buffer in the RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 uses the time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving is lost, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for determining the time saving, and decides whether the time saving is lost. It is determined whether or not (step 120 IWS88). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/200. (See FIG. 8-4 (A)). If the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving loss determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/400 (). See Figure 8-4 (B)). If it is not decided to be out of time (if it is decided to be out of time), the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off (Y in step 120IWS89), the CPU 103 selects the time reduction type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS90). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-6 (A) is selected, and the value of the special symbol pointer is set. When "second" is shown, the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (time saving loss A, time saving loss B, time saving loss C) corresponding to the value matching the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the time saving type (step). 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

When the process of step 120IWS91 is completed, the CPU 103 selects a symbol determination table (see FIGS. 8-7 (A) to 8-8 (H)) according to the result of the type determination performed in step 120IWS91 (step 120IWS92). ). In the case of a loss without a time reduction, the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (I) is selected as it is, and the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

In step 120IWS93, the CPU 103 determines the symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the symbol determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS93).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 120IWS94).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step 120 IWS111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) confirms whether or not the story has been set (step 120 IWS1701). In addition, the story is a fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time according to the number of fluctuations of the symbol, and whether or not the story has been set is set with flags and data set according to the story when a big hit occurs. Check if it is.

If the story has already been set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1702). When the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table for relief time reduction (see FIG. 8-10 (G)) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

If the story has not been set, or if the rescue time reduction determination flag has not been set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction is off (step 120IWS1704). If the time reduction is not missed, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIGS. 8-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, the game state, and the display result (step 120IWS1709), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. .. Therefore, in this example, even if the variation display is a relief time reduction, if the story is not set, the variation pattern for the normal use is uniformly determined instead of the variation pattern for the relief time reduction.

If the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag (see step 120IWS150, step 120IWS160, and step 120IWS537) is set (step 120IWS1705). When the time saving flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIGS. 8-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, the game state, and the display result (step 120IWS1709), and steps. Move to 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if it is determined that the time reduction is off, the same fluctuation pattern as the time reduction (no time reduction) is determined when the time reduction state is in effect.

If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the symbol "8" is determined in the symbol determination (see step 120IWS93) (step 120IWS1706). If the symbol "8" is not set, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIG. 8-10 (E)) for time saving deviation (other than the symbol "8") (step 120IWS1707), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. When the symbol "8" is used, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIG. 8-10 (F)) for the time saving deviation (symbol "8") (step 120IWS1708), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

In step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 120IWS1703, S1707, S1708, S1709 and the random number for determining the variation pattern stored in the hold storage buffer indicated by the special symbol pointer. , Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 8-10 is used (step 120IWS1710). In this example, by determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1711).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 120IWS1712), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 120IWS1713). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 120IWS1714).

(Special symbol change processing)
FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (step 120IWS112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not to make a big hit, and then decides whether or not to make a small hit, if it has not been transmitted yet. As a result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 designation command ~ Control is performed to transmit the display result 10 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step 120IWS1122), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step 120IWS1123), confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1124). ). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 120IWS1126, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the right-handed LED 120IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" in the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 120IWS1127). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1128). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS1139.

On the other hand, when the relief time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of the time reduction (step 120IWS1129). It should be noted that whether or not the case is determined to be out of time can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 120IWS93.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1131).

By executing the process of step 120IWS1131, in this example, when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the right-handed LED 120IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, or the time saving flag C is set (step 120IWS1132). If none of the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, and the time saving flag C is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets the definite display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the symbol determination period timer for measurement (step 120IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1134). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, or the time saving flag C is set (that is, if it is in the time saving state), the CPU 103 measures the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the symbol determination period timer for this purpose (step 120IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS1139.

Unless it is decided to be out of time (N in step 120IWS1129), the CPU 103 sets the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0". Set the value according to ".5 seconds" (step 120IWS1137). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1138). .. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S113) (step 120IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
8-19 to 8-21 are flowcharts showing a special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 120IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step 120IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 counts the time reduction flag (time reduction flag A, time reduction flag B, time reduction flag C) and the number of times of execution of the variation display during the time reduction state if it is set. The time reduction counter is reset (step 120 IWS134).

As the time reduction counter, a special 2 time reduction counter corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol and a total time reduction counter corresponding to the number of fluctuations of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. ing. When simply referred to as "time reduction counter", it indicates both the special 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter.

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step 120IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the big hit, and even if the fluctuation display of 900 times is executed after the big hit game is completed, neither the next big hit nor the time reduction occurs. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

In this example, when a big hit is obtained by executing the process of step 120IWS135, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big hit and the initial setting is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "900" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "900" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to make the initial setting. It may be configured as.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 120IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 120IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 120IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 120IWS141). If the time saving end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148. If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 120IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 120IWS143).

Next, if the value is set, the CPU 103 resets the small hit count counter, the total time reduction counter, and the special 2 time reduction counter (step 120IWS144), and controls to end the lighting of the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS145). ). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS146). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS147). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS148.

In this example, the process of steps 120IWS141 to S147 is executed to shift to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period and end the right-handed notification in the time saving final variation. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right-handed notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 120IWS148). When the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 sets "900" for the special 2 time reduction counter, "900" for the total time reduction counter, "900" for the relief time reduction counter, and the small hit count counter. Is set to "1" (step 120IWS149). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 120IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS151). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

In this example, even if the small hit fluctuation is performed, if the relief time reduction determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the end of the symbol determination period, step 120IWS150 is executed, and in the subsequent small hit game state, the time reduction state is executed. It is controlled by C.

If the relief time reduction flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not it is decided to be out of the time reduction (step 120IWS152). It should be noted that whether or not the case is determined to be out of time can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 120IWS93.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not any of the time reduction flags (time reduction flags A to C) is set (step 120IWS153). If neither of the time reduction flags is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" to the special 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter if the time reduction is out of A (Y in step 120IWS154). Each of the counters is set to "900" (step 120IWS155). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS 160.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the special 2 time reduction counter and "900" in the total time reduction counter if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 120IWS156) (step 120IWS157). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS 160.

If it is not the time reduction B (N in step 120IWS156), that is, if it is the time reduction C, the CPU 103 sets "30" in the special 2 time reduction counter and "900" in the total time reduction counter (step). 120IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS 160.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 120IWS160).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step 120IWS161). Therefore, in this example, when "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the time reduction, and the next big hit or the time reduction does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed 900 times after the time reduction is performed. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to subtract 1 from the small hit count counter (step 120IWS162) and transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

If any of the time reduction flags is set (Y in step 120IWS153), the process proceeds to step 120IWS164. Therefore, in this example, even if the time reduction is lost, if the time reduction state is in progress, a new time reduction state is not set based on the time reduction deviation, and the current time reduction state is continued (hence, therefore). The values of the special 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter continue to be the current values).

In step 120IWS164, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS164). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS167). Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-opening time timer (step 120IWS168). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S118) (step 120IWS169).

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag if it is set (step 120IWS170).

In step 120IWS171, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 120IWS171).

(Pre-processing for small hit opening)
FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening pre-processing (step 120 IWS 114) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening pre-opening time timer has timed out (step 120IWS401). If the time timer before opening the special winning opening has not timed out (that is, the fanfare time has not elapsed), the process ends as it is.

If the time before opening the special winning opening time timer has timed out (that is, if the fanfare time has elapsed), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state. (Step 120 IWS 402). Further, the CPU 10103 sets a value corresponding to the first opening time (0.016 seconds in this example) of the special winning opening in the opening time timer (step 120IWS403).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step 120IWS115) (step 120IWS404).

(Processing during small hit opening)
FIG. 8-23 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening process (step 120 IWS 115) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit opening process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening switch 120IW24 is turned on (step 120IWS421). If the special winning opening switch 120IW24 is in the ON state (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 issues a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control to transmit (step 120IWS422).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is turned on (step 120IWS423). If the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 issues a V winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control to transmit (step 120IWS424). Further, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the V winning has been done (step 120IWS425).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 has come (step 120IWS426). Whether or not the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 has been reached is determined by, for example, the time after the timer is set when the small hit game is started and the small hit game is started (in this example). , 8 seconds) can be determined by confirming whether or not it has been reached. When the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is reached, the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 to the open state (step 120IWS427).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 has come (step 120IWS428). Whether or not it is the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is determined by, for example, setting a timer when the opening of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is started, and starting the opening of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the time from the time has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). When the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is reached, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 to the closed state (step 120IWS429).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening is 0 (step 120IWS430). If the value of the open time timer is not 0 (that is, if the special winning opening is being opened), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time timer (step 120IWS431), and the value of the open time timer after the subtraction is set. It is confirmed whether or not it is 0 (step 120 IWS432). If the value of the open time timer is 0, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the closed state (step 120IWS433). Further, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined closing time (a value corresponding to the interval time (step 120IWS434) in the closing time timer for measuring the closing time after opening the special winning opening, and ends the process.

If the opening time timer is 0 in step 120IWS430 (that is, if the special winning opening is closed), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the closing time timer value (step 120IWS435), and the value of the closing time timer after the subtraction. It is confirmed whether or not is 0 (step 120IWS436). If the value of the closing time timer is 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not all the special winning openings have already been opened (step 120IWS437). In this example, if the special winning opening has already been opened four times, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS437, and the process proceeds to step 120IWS440.

If all the special winning openings have not been opened (that is, if the 2nd to 4th opening remains), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 and opens the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. (Step 120 IWS438). Further, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the opening time (0.016 seconds in this example) in the closing time timer (step 120IWS439). Then, the process is terminated.

If all the special winning openings have been opened (Y in step 120IWS437), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the small hit closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) (step 120IWS440). ).

(Post-processing after closing the small hit)
FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing the small hit closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit closing post-processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 120IWS451), and if the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS453. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer the time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 120IWS452), and the process ends.

In step 120IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS454). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 120IWS455). When the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the time saving number counter if it is set (step 120IWS456). Further, the CPU 103 resets the V winning flag (step 120IWS457). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS458). Further, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before opening the big winning opening (step 120IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 120IWS117) (step 120IWS460).

When it is confirmed that the V winning flag is not set in the process of step 120IWS456, the CPU 103 resets the small hit flag (step 120IWS461). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462). Then, if set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 120IWS463), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS464). ..

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step 120 IWS 121) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 120IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS535. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit flag or the small hit flag (step 120IWS532), and controls to send the big hit end designation command (step 120IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 in the big hit end display timer (step 120IWS534), and performs processing. finish.

In step 120 IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS536). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 120IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A (step 120IWS537) and confirms whether or not the relief time saving flag is set (step 120IWS538). When the relief time reduction flag is set, when the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction occurs is a small hit fluctuation, a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated. be. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction flag (step 120IWS539), sets "1" in the special 2 time reduction counter, sets "99" in the total time reduction counter, and sets "1" in the small hit count counter. Is set (step 120 IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

On the other hand, when the relief time saving flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not it is a big hit generated in the time saving state (step 120IWS541). Whether or not the jackpot has occurred in the time-saving state is determined by, for example, whether the time-saving flag is set before the processing of step 120IWS134 or step S120IWS456 is executed at the start of the big-hit game and the time-saving flag is reset. Check whether or not, and if the time saving flag is set, the big hit time saving flag indicating that the time saving state was set at the time of the big hit is set, and in step 120IWS541, whether or not the big hit time saving flag is set. Can be determined by checking.

In the case of a big hit that occurred in the time saving state, the CPU 103 sets "7" in the special 2 time saving number counter, sets "99" in the total time saving number counter, and sets "1" in the small hit number counter. (Step 120 IWS 540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If it is not a big hit that occurred in a time-saving state (a big hit that occurred in a normal state), it is confirmed whether or not the finished big hit game state is based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (step 120IWS543). .. It should be noted that whether or not the hit is a big hit based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer. If the finished big hit game state is based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 sets "1" in the special 2 time reduction counter, sets "99" in the total time reduction counter, and sets the total number of small hits. Set the counter to "1" (step 120IWS544). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the finished jackpot game state is not based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (if it is based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol), the CPU 103 sets "99" in the special 2 time reduction counter and totals. “99” is set in the time reduction counter, and “1” is set in the small hit counter (step 120IWS545). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed by executing the above processing, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, the time saving state is changed to one time saving number. It is controlled (see step 120IWS544), and if a big hit occurs during the time saving state, it is controlled to the time saving state with 7 times of time saving (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving state (in this example, the time saving) is more advantageous when the big hit is made during the time saving state than when the big hit is made during the normal state. It is controlled by many times).

Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, the time reduction state is controlled to 99 times of time reduction (see step 120IWS545), and the big hit is performed during the time reduction state. If this happens, the time reduction is controlled to 7 times (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is more advantageous to have a big hit during the normal state than to have a big hit during the time saving state (in this example, the time saving state). It is controlled by many times).

Further, in this example, when the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction occurs is a small hit fluctuation, and the V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated, the time reduction number of times 1 It is controlled to the time saving state of the times (see step 120 IWS540). Therefore, when the variation display in which the relief time reduction occurs is a small hit fluctuation, and the V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated, the time reduction of the one with the lower advantage is achieved. It is controlled by the state (in this example, the number of time reductions is as small as 1).

In addition, for example, when the fluctuation display in which the relief time is shortened is a small hit fluctuation, when a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated, it is the second special symbol. If the V prize is won by the small hit fluctuation based on the fluctuation display of the above, it may be configured to be controlled to the time saving state (hence, the time saving state with high advantage) of 99 times of time saving.

(state change)
Next, the state transition in the feature unit 120IW will be described. FIG. 8-26 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature unit 120IW. As shown in FIGS. 8-26, in the normal state, when a big hit occurs, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) (see step 120IWS537). Further, even if the pattern is out of order in the normal state, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving outlier) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 120IWS160). Furthermore, even if the time is lost, the number of fluctuations has reached 900 times without the next big hit or time saving loss after the RAM clear processing, big hit or time saving loss. In the case), it is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) (see step 120IWS150).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time saving state A, when a big hit occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled again (see step 120IWS537). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time saving state A, if a small hit occurs, the control is controlled to the small hit state (see step 120IWS69), and if a V prize is won in the small hit state, the big hit is passed. Then, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) (see step 120IWS537). Further, in the time saving state A, even if the time saving state A is out of order, if the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out of time) (see step 120IWS160). Further, in the time saving state A, even if a small hit does not occur, it is controlled to the normal state when the variation display of the second special symbol of 1, 7, or 99 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit. (See steps 120IWS82, S143). Further, in the time saving state A, when a small hit occurs once, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73 to 75).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time saving state B, when a big hit occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled (see step 120IWS537). Further, in the time saving state B, when a small hit occurs, the small hit state is controlled (see step 120IWS69). Further, in the time saving state B, even if a small hit does not occur, the normal state is restored when the variation display of the second special symbol of 30, 50, 100, and 200 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit. It is controlled (see steps 120IWS82, S143). Further, in the time saving state B, even if the time saving state B is out of order, if the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out of time) is controlled (see step 120IWS160). Further, in the time saving state B, when a small hit occurs once, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73 to 75).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time saving state C, when a big hit occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled (see step 120IWS537). Further, in the time saving state C, when a small hit occurs, the small hit state is controlled (see step 120IWS69). Further, in the time saving state C, when the variation display of 900 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the time saving state C is controlled again (see step 120IWS150). Further, in the time saving state C, when the number of fluctuations reaches 900 times, the time saving state C is controlled again (see steps 120IWS149,150). Further, in the time saving state C, when a small hit occurs once, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73 to 75).

If a small hit is obtained in the time saving state A but the V is not won, the time saving state A is continued as it is after the small hit game is completed. Further, if a small hit is obtained in the time saving state B but the V is not won, the time saving state B is continued as it is after the small hit game is completed. Further, if a small hit is obtained in the time saving state C but the V is not won, the time saving state C is continued as it is after the small hit game is completed.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 8-27 to 8-28 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 120IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 120IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 120IWS613). The reason for +2 is to read 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 120IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 120IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 120IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS618). ).

The received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (1st symbol confirmation A designation command, 1st symbol confirmation B designation command, 1st symbol confirmation C designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation A designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation. If it is a B designation command, a second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 120IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 120IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 120IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 120IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 120IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 120IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a large winning opening winning designation command (step 120IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 sets the large winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS626). If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 120IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 sets the special winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS628). If the received effect control command is a V winning opening winning designation command (step 120IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the V winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a normal state specification command (step 120IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 has a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 120IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a time reduction state A designation command (step 120IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, a sunset state) corresponding to the time reduction state A (time reduction state via a jackpot) in the image display device 5. Control to switch to the yellow background image according to the mode) (step 120IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a time reduction state B designation command (step 120IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a time reduction state via a time reduction loss) corresponding to the time reduction state B. Control to switch to the green background image according to the forest mode) (step 120IWS636).

If the received effect control command is the time saving state C designation command (step 120IWS637), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is set with the special effect mode flag indicating that the effect mode is set to the special effect mode. Is confirmed (step 120 IWS638). When the special effect mode flag is not set, the image display device 5 switches to a background image (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the mandarin orange field mode) according to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving). Control is performed (step 120IWS638). On the other hand, when the special effect mode flag is set, the image display device 5 controls to switch to the background image according to the special effect mode (for example, the red background image according to the flame mode) (step 120IWS640). ..

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 120IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 controls to store the set value in the set value storage area (step 120IWS642).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 120IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 120IW20 (step 120IWS644). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when a symbol that is out of time is derived and displayed or when the relief time is shortened (see step 120IWS1126, S1131). At the beginning of the symbol determination period, the right-handed notification LED 120IW20 is turned on.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 120IWS645), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 120IW20 (step 120IWS646), and executes the left-handed notification effect. Start (step 120 IWS647).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 120IWS648). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-29 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 120IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 120IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 120IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 120IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 120IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 120IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control CPU 120 when the received display result specification command indicates "big hit" or when the received display result specification command indicates "small hit". Determines a combination of decorative symbols (large hit symbol, small hit symbol) in which three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. In this example, the case where the combination of the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are the same for both the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol is determined, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the received display result designation command indicates "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 is configured to determine the combination of the decorative symbols of "135" as the stop symbol as the small hit symbol. You may.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols with two left and right symbols is determined. Further, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of decorative symbols of the out of place symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols of the out-of-order symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) may be determined according to the time saving type.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) that reminds us of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is the variation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 8-10 (G)) that specifies the relief time saving rush effect. (Step 120IWS803). In the case of the variation pattern PT8-1, the effect control CPU 120 has the set value specified by the set value command (the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 120IWS642)). It is confirmed whether or not the setting is any of "4" to "6" (step 120IWS804). If the setting value is neither of the settings "4" to "6", the process proceeds to step 120IWS808.

When the set value is any of the settings "4" to "6", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a relief setting effect depending on which of the set values "4" to "6". The type is determined (step 120IWS805). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the relief time setting effect (step 120IWS806). If it is decided not to execute the relief setting effect, the process proceeds to step 120IWS808. When it is decided to execute the relief time setting effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the special effect mode flag (step 120IWS807), and proceeds to step 120IWS808.

In step 120IWS808, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a relief time setting suggestion effect when it is determined to execute the relief time shortening rush effect and the relief time setting suggestion effect (step 120IWS808). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS814.

On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is not the fluctuation pattern PT8-1, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is used. Check whether it is the variation pattern PT6-2 (see FIG. 8-10 (E)) that specifies the time-saving fanning effect or the variation pattern PT7-2 (see FIG. 8-10 (F)) that specifies the time-saving fanning effect. (Step 120 IWS809). In the case of the variation pattern PT6-2 or the variation pattern PT7-2, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the time-saving fanning effect (step 120IWS810). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS814.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 is not the variation pattern PT6-2 or the variation pattern PT7-2, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 specifies the time saving restoration effect. It is confirmed whether or not it is 3 (see FIG. 8-10 (F)) (step 120IWS811). In the case of the variation pattern PT7-3, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the time saving restoration effect (step 120IWS812). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS814. If it is not the variation pattern PT7-3, the effect control CPU 120 selects a normal process table according to the variation pattern (step 120IWS813). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS814.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step 120IWS808, step 120IWS810, step 120IWS812, and step 120IWS813 (step 120IWS814).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative pattern in the variable mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 120IWS815). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 120IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 120IWS816).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 120IWS817).

(Relief setting suggestion production decision table)
FIG. 8-30 is an explanatory diagram of the relief setting suggestion effect determination table used in step 120IWS805 of FIG. 8-29 when the variation pattern is the variation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 8-10 (G)). be.

As shown in FIG. 8-30, in the relief time setting suggestion effect determination table, when the setting value is the setting "4", the selection ratio without the relief time setting suggestion effect is 50%, and the selection of the relief time setting suggestion effect A is selected. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is 40%, the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect B is 5%, and the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect C is 5%.

When the set value is set to "5", the selection ratio without the relief setting suggestion effect is 30%, the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect A is 10%, and the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect B is 50. %, Judgment values are assigned so that the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect C at the time of relief is 10%.

When the set value is the setting "6", the selection ratio without the relief setting suggestion effect is 10%, the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect A is 15%, and the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect B is 15. %, The determination value is assigned so that the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect C at the time of relief is 60%.

Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that if the relief setting suggestion effect A is executed, it is highly likely that the setting value is set to "4", and if the relief setting suggestion effect B is executed, the setting value " It is suggested that there is a high possibility that it is set to "5", and it is highly likely that it is set to the set value "6" if the setting suggestion effect C at the time of relief is executed.

The relief time setting suggestion effect is a suggestion effect of the set value executed when the relief time shortening rush effect is executed in the image display device 5.

In this example, the relief setting suggestion effect is configured to be executable when the setting values "4" to "6" are set, so the relief setting suggestion effect is set to a relatively high setting. It is a setting suggestion effect that suggests that it is done.

(Variable display effect processing)
8-31 and 8-32 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect process (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 120IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 120IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 120IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 120IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 120IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received (step 120IWS846). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode transition effect (an effect of notifying the transition to the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and right-handed. The process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 120IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS848). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 120IWS849). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 120IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS867.

If neither the first symbol confirmation A designation command nor the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command. (Step 120IWS851). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the continuation effect (the effect of notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 120 IWS852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS853). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 120IWS854). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 120IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS867.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (Step 120IWS861). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed C command reception flag or the second confirmed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 120IWS863.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 120IWS862). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y in step 120IWS861), or when the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step 120IWS862), the effect control CPU 120 is normally used. Select the process table according to the symbol confirmation display of (step 120IWS863). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS864). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 120IWS865). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 120IWS866). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS867.

In this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, even when the fluctuation time timer times out (see step 120IWS862), the process shifts to the processing after step 120IWS862 and shifts to the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not missed, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS862 and the process does not shift to the processing after step 120IWS862.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 120IWS867).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
8-33 and 8-34 are flowcharts showing the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 120IWS871), and confirms whether or not the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 120IWS871). Step 120 IWS872). If the value of the final effect period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 120IWS873), and the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data). In accordance with n), control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed (step 120IWS874).

Further, when the process timer times out (step 120IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 120IWS876). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS878). Stopping the decorative symbol If the symbol is being confirmed and displayed, the process ends as it is. If the display of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is not being confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (non-time-saving missed symbol, time-saving missed symbol, big hit symbol, small hit symbol). Step 120 IWS879).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS881). Then, the process is terminated.

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS882), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit stop flag indicating that the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS883A). Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the execution of the V winning promotion effect for promoting the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening (step 120IWS883B), and ends the process.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol fixed period has elapsed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot stop flag is set (step). 120IWS884). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 120IWS885A). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 120IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 120IWS885B). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and type of the jackpot setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the set value command (the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 120IWS642)). (Step 120 IWS886).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table for the big hit medium effect according to the presence / absence of the big hit setting suggestion effect and its type (step 120IWS887). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 120IWS888), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step 120IWS889).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the big hit (step 120IWS890).

If the big hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit stop flag is set (step 120IWS891). If the small hit stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 120IWS892). It should be noted that whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If the small hit start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 120IWS893). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 120IWS894). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 120IWS895), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step 120IWS896).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step 120IWS897).

If the small hit stop flag is not set (that is, when the non-time saving missed symbol or the time saving losing symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the variable display start waiting process (that is, when the time reduction loss symbol is stopped and displayed). The value is updated according to step S170) (step 120IWS898).

(Big hit setting suggestion production decision table)
FIG. 8-35 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot setting suggestion effect determination table used in step 120IWS886.

As shown in FIG. 8-35, in the jackpot setting suggestion effect determination table, when the setting value is set "1", the selection ratio without the jackpot setting suggestion effect is 65%, and the selection of the jackpot setting suggestion effect A is selected. The ratio is 10%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect B is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 5%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is. The determination value is assigned so that the selection ratio of the above is 5% and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%.

When the set value is set to "2", the selection ratio without the big hit setting suggestion effect is 65%, the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect A is 5%, and the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect B is 10. %, The selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is 5%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%. The judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

When the set value is set to "3", the selection ratio without the big hit setting suggestion effect is 65%, the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect A is 5%, and the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect B is 5. %, The selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 10%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is 5%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%. The judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

When the set value is set to "4", the selection ratio without the big hit setting suggestion effect is 60%, the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect A is 5%, and the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect B is 5. %, The selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 15%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is 5%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%. The judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

When the set value is set to "5", the selection ratio without the big hit setting suggestion effect is 60%, the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect A is 5%, and the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect B is 5. %, The selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is 15%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 15%. The judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

When the set value is the setting "6", the selection ratio without the big hit setting suggestion effect is 60%, the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect A is 5%, and the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect B is 5. %, The selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is 5%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%. The determination value is assigned so that is 15%.

Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the set value is set to "1" if the jackpot setting suggestion effect A is executed, and if the jackpot setting suggestion effect B is executed, the setting value is set. It is suggested that the value is relatively high to be set to "2", and it is suggested that it is relatively likely to be set to the set value "3" if the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is executed. If the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is executed, it is suggested that the setting value is relatively likely to be set to "4", and if the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is executed, the set value is "5". It is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "6", and it is suggested that the setting value "6" is relatively high if the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is executed.

The jackpot setting suggestion effect is a suggestion effect of the set value executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the relief time reduction rush effect and the relief time setting suggestion effect when shifting to the time reduction state C, which is the relief time reduction, will be described. 8-36 to 8-37 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the time saving state is entered. In FIGS. 8-36 to 8-37, the effect screens are changed in the order of (A), (B), (C), ... (G).

As shown in FIG. 8-36 (A), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol 120IW100 is started before one variation of the variable display that shifts to the relief time reduction.

As shown in FIG. 8-36 (B), when the variable display of the decorative symbol 120IW100 is started, the relief time saving rush effect is started. In the relief time saving rushing effect, first, the rushing suggestion display 120IW105 suggesting the entry into the relief time saving is displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol 120IW100, and the relief time saving rushing effect is started. After that, in the relief time saving rush effect, the decorative symbol 120IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 120IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (C), an operation suggestion image 120IW106 suggesting that the push button 31B (see FIG. 8-1) is operated (pressed) is displayed. For example, in the operation suggestion image 120IW106, the character "press" is displayed together with the image prompting the push button 31B to be pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (D), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 120IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses from the display of the operation suggestion image 120IW106, "V". The character display 120IW107 "STOCK x 1" is displayed, and it is notified that the relief time reduction is started. In addition, a right-handed instruction display 120IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed next to the small symbol 120IW101. Further, when the execution of the relief time setting suggestion effect is determined, the relief time setting suggestion effect is executed, and the set value suggestion display 120IW200 suggesting the set value is displayed at the lower right of the screen. This suggests that the set value is one of the settings "4" to "6".

For example, when the relief time setting suggestion effect A is executed, the set value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in a blue display color, and when the relief time setting suggestion effect B is executed, the set value suggestion is displayed in a green display color. When the display 120IW200 is displayed and the setting suggestion effect C at the time of relief is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in a red display color, and the display color of the setting value suggestion display is displayed according to the type of the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief. It may be configured to be different.

Further, not limited to such an aspect, for example, when the relief time setting suggestion effect A is executed, the triangular setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and when the relief time setting suggestion effect B is executed, the diamond shape is displayed. Setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and when the setting suggestion effect C at the time of relief is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 of a star shape is displayed, and the setting value suggestion display is displayed according to the type of the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief. It may be configured so that the display shape is different.

In this example, even if a big hit occurs, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" as in FIG. 8-36 (D). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead determination process for whether or not a big hit is achieved and a variation pattern type in the start winning determination process (step S101), and makes a look-ahead determination. Sends a look-ahead judgment result specification command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (so-called hold continuous effect) in the same manner as in FIG. 8-36 (D) based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command. For example, if it is specified that there is one big hit in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to produce the hold continuous effect. To execute. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to hold the hold. Perform a series of productions.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, there is a high ratio that the fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see FIG. 8-10 (B)). ), Therefore, the variable display is digested extremely quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the symbol confirmation period) in which the relief time is shortened, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 8-36 (D) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 8-36 (D) has the same aspect as the pseudo hold continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production to notify.

If the fluctuation that reaches the relief time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is secured, and the same effect as in FIGS. 8-36 is performed to temporarily reduce the relief time. After executing the effect, the effect of notifying the big hit may be executed.

The case where the display of the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 120IW107 of "V STOCK x 1" is shown, but the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. No. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol one time before, and various modes can be considered.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed when the relief time is shortened and the pseudo hold continuous effect is executed is shown. It may be configured to execute the setting suggestion effect even when the setting suggestion effect is executed, or it may be configured not to execute the setting suggestion effect when the hold continuous effect is executed due to a big hit. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed when the hold continuous effect is executed as a big hit, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be different from the case where the relief time is shortened, and the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect. May be different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (E), the mode selection screen 120IW109 for selecting the effect mode for shortening the relief time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. When the predetermined time elapses without selecting the effect mode, the effect mode in which the cursor matches is automatically confirmed. Further, even when the mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 120IW101. In addition, the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief is continuously executed, and the set value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed on the screen as well.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (F), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, the start notification screen 120IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the characters "Relief time reduction rush" are displayed. At this time, the small symbol 120IW101 stops.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (G), and when the next fluctuation is started, the time saving state C is entered and the relief time saving is started. At this time, the background image is changed to the background image (red) for the special effect mode.

In this example, the relief time reduction rush effect is executed before one change that rushes into the relief time reduction, but before the change, the remaining rotation speed until the relief time reduction, the explanation of the effect in the relief time reduction, and the countdown. It may be displayed.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which a symbol confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds and a mode transition effect or a right-handed notification is executed in a variable display in which the relief time is shortened, but the symbol confirmation period is normally 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect.

Further, in this example, the case where the relief time reduction counter is initially set to "900" at the time of executing the RAM clear processing, at the time of a big hit, or when the time reduction is lost is shown. Or, when it is configured to execute a story (such as whether to make it a high-speed fluctuation), it may be configured to clear the selection buffer and the story counter of the story. Further, it may be configured so that a story can be set when the relief time is activated, or a different story can be set according to the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, a case is shown in which the time saving state A via the big hit, the time saving state B via the time saving loss, and the time saving state C via the relief time saving continue until one small hit occurs uniformly. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, depending on whether the time saving state A via the big hit, the time saving state B via the time saving loss, or the time saving state C via the relief time saving occurs, the time saving state is continued until a different number of small hits occur. It may be configured. Hereinafter, a modified example in which the time saving state is continued until a different number of small hits occur depending on whether the time saving state A via the big hit, the time saving state B via the time saving loss, or the time saving state C via the relief time saving occurs. 1 will be described.

FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing in the first modification. In the first modification, the processing of steps 120IWS131 to S148 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20. In the first modification, if the relief time reduction determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets "900" for the special 2 time reduction counter, "900" for the total time reduction counter, and the relief time reduction counter. Is set to "900" and "2" is set to the small hit count counter (step 120IWS149X). The processes after step 120 IWS150 are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 8-20.

By executing the above processing, in the modified example 1, in the case of the time saving state A via the big hit and the time saving state B via the time saving loss, the time saving state is continued until one small hit occurs. In the case of the time saving state C via the relief time saving, the time saving state is continued until two small hits occur.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, even in the case of the time saving state A via the big hit and the time saving state B via the time saving loss, the time saving state is continued until a different number of small hits occur. It may be configured as. Further, in this example, in the case of the time saving state C via the relief time saving, the time saving state is continued until the small hit occurs twice, but the time saving state is continued until another number of times such as three small hits occur. May be configured to continue.

(Modification 2)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, the case where the subtraction processing of the small hit number counter (see steps 120IWS71 to S75) is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the small hit fluctuation is shown, but the processing mode is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, the subtraction process of the small hit number counter may be executed at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation. Hereinafter, a modification 2 in which the subtraction process of the small hit number counter is executed at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation will be described.

FIG. 8-39 is a flowchart showing the small hit closing post-processing in the second modification. In the second modification, the processing of steps 120IWS451 to S463 is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 8-24. Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit count counter is 0 (step 120IWS463A). If the value of the small hit count counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit count counter (step 120IWS463B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit count counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS463C). If the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

When the value of the small hit count counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the set time saving flags (time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 120IWS463D). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS464.

The process of step 120 IWS464 is the same as the process shown in FIG. 8-24.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, when the relief time is shortened, the case where the time is uniformly controlled at the end of the symbol determination period is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the variation display for the relief time is small. In the case of a hit variation, it may be configured to control the time saving state at the end of the small hit game. Hereinafter, a modification 3 will be described in which when the variation display that shortens the relief time is a small hit variation, the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the small hit game.

FIG. 8-40 is a flowchart showing the processing after closing the small hit in the modified example 3. In the third modification, even if the relief time reduction determination flag is set in step 120IWS148 in the special symbol stop processing, the processing of steps 120IWS149 to S151 is not executed if the small hit flag is set. ..

In the third modification, the processing of steps 120IWS451 to S462 is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 8-24. Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 120IWS462A). When the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag that has been set (step 120IWS462B). Further, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the special 2 time reduction counter, "900" in the total time reduction counter, "900" in the relief time reduction counter, and "1" in the small hit number counter (step). 120IWS462C). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 120IWS462D). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462E). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS464.

The process of step 120 IWS464 is the same as the process shown in FIG. 8-24.

(Modification example 4)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, when the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is a small hit variation, a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated. Although the case of controlling to the time saving state (the time saving state of one time saving number of times) having the lower advantage is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to control to a time saving state having a lower advantage (for example, a time saving state with 7 times of time saving). Hereinafter, when the variation display in which the relief time reduction occurs is a small hit fluctuation, and the V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated, the time reduction with the higher advantage is achieved. A modification 4 for controlling the state (time saving state with 7 times of time saving) will be described.

FIG. 8-41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process in the modified example 4. In the modified example 4, in the jackpot end processing, the processing of steps 120IWS531 to S539 is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 8-25. Next, the CPU 103 sets "7" in the special 2 time reduction counter, "99" in the total time reduction counter, and sets "1" in the small hit number counter (step 120IWS540X). The processes of steps 120IWS541 to S541 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 8-25.

In the modified example 4, when the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is a small hit variation by executing the above processing, a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is performed. When it ends, it is controlled to the time saving state of 7 times (see step 120IWS540). Therefore, when considering the case of executing the variation display of the first special symbol, when the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is a small hit variation, a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transfer is made. When the game is ended, it is controlled to the time saving state (in this example, seven time saving states in which the number of time saving is more than one), which has a higher advantage. On the other hand, when considering the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, when the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is a small hit variation, a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transition is made. When the jackpot game is completed, it is controlled to the time saving state (in this example, the time saving state is 7 times, which is less than 99 times), which has the lower advantage.

(Modification 5)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, after the relief time is shortened, if the variation display of 900 times is completed without any big hit or small hit even during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, the relief time is shortened again. (Relief time reduction loops) has been shown, but not limited to such a mode, the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction may be configured to end once. Hereinafter, a modified example 5 in which the time saving state C via the relief time saving is temporarily terminated will be described.

FIG. 8-42 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, in the special symbol normal processing, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S85 is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 8-15 and 8-16. In the modification 5, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (Y in step 120IWS85), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag C is set (step 120IWS85A). If the time reduction flag C is set (that is, when the variation display of 900 times is completed without a big hit or a small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction counter. Is set to "900" (step 120 IWS85B). The processes after step 120 IWS86 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 8-16.

FIG. 8-43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, in the special symbol stop processing, the processing of steps 120IWS to S148 is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20. In the modification 5, when the relief time reduction determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets "900" for the special 2 time reduction counter, "900" for the total time reduction counter, and a small hit. Each "1" is set in the count counter (step 120IWS149Z). That is, in the modification 5, the relief time reduction counter is not performed at the end of the variation display in which the relief time reduction has occurred. The processes after step 120 IWS150 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 8-20 and 8-21.

By executing the above processing, in the modified example 5, the relief time reduction count counter is not set at the end of the variation display in which the relief time reduction occurs, and then a big hit or a small hit is performed during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction. When the fluctuation display of 900 times is completed without the above result, the relief time reduction counter is set. Therefore, in the modified example 5, after the relief time is shortened, even if the fluctuation display of 900 times is completed without any big hit or small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, the time reduction state C is temporarily terminated. However, the relief time reduction does not loop.

(Modification 6)
In the above modification 5, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 when the relief time is shortened. Therefore, during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS83 in the special symbol normal processing. Step 120 The subtraction process of the relief time reduction counter in IWS84 is not executed. It should be noted that the subtraction process of the relief time reduction counter may be executed even during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction. Hereinafter, a modification 6 in which the subtraction process of the relief time reduction counter can be executed even during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction will be described.

FIG. 8-44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing in the modification 6. In the modified example 6, in the special symbol normal processing, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S82 is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 8-15 and 8-16. In the modification 6, then, there is no determination process of the value of the relief time reduction counter in step 120IWS83, and the CPU 103 directly subtracts the value of the relief time reduction counter by 1 (step 120IWS84).

Next, the CPU 130 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is smaller than 0 (that is, a negative value) (step 120IWS84A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is smaller than 0, the CPU 103 sets "0" in the relief time reduction counter (step 120IWS84B). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS87.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not less than 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS84C). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag C is set (step 120IWS84D). If the time reduction flag C is set (that is, when the variation display of 900 times is completed without a big hit or a small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction counter. Is set to "900" (step 120IWS84E). The processes after step 120 IWS86 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 8-16.

By executing the above processing, in the modified example 6, as in the modified example 5, the relief time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variation display in which the relief time reduction occurs, and then the time reduction via the relief time reduction is performed. When the fluctuation display of 900 times is completed without a big hit or a small hit during the state C, the relief time reduction counter is set. Therefore, in the modified example 6, after the relief time is shortened, even if the fluctuation display of 900 times is completed without any big hit or small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, the time reduction state C is temporarily terminated. However, the relief time reduction does not loop.

(Modification 7)
In the above-mentioned modification 5 and modification 6, the look-ahead notice effect may be further configured to be feasible. Then, the look-ahead notice effect may be restricted in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the end of the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction. Hereinafter, a modification 7 for limiting the look-ahead notice effect in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the end of the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction will be described.

In the modification 7, in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) of the special symbol process process, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) becomes a big hit or a small hit. , Whether or not the time reduction is missed, the pre-reading judgment of the big hit type, the small hit type, the time reduction type, the fluctuation pattern type, etc. is performed. Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the pre-reading determination result designation command capable of specifying the pre-reading determination result to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and type of the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the received pre-reading determination result specification command in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process, and displays the variation of the advance notice target. Control is performed to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect over one or a plurality of variable displays before the execution.

FIG. 8-45 is a timing chart showing the timing of the look-ahead notice effect limiting period in the modified example 7. As shown in FIGS. 8-45, when the variation display of 900 times is completed without a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction loss after the relief time reduction counter is set, the relief time reduction occurs and the time reduction state C is controlled. To. Next, when the variation display of 900 times is completed without becoming a big hit or a small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction (that is, when counting after the relief time reduction counter is set, the 1800th variation display is displayed. When finished), the time saving state C is finished.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 limits the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the end of the time saving state C. In this example, since the upper limit of the total number of reserved storages is 8, the predetermined period from the fluctuation display before the 8 fluctuations before the end of the time reduction state C to the relief time reduction, and the time reduction state C after the relief time reduction is reached. The execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted over a specific period until the change display after 8 changes after the end. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 8-45, when counting after the relief time reduction counter is set, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined from the 1792th variation display to the 1808th variation display.

The "restriction on the look-ahead notice effect" may be controlled so that the look-ahead notice effect is not executed at all, the execution probability of the look-ahead notice effect is lowered, or a part of the plurality of types of the look-ahead notice effect is executed. It may be possible to execute only the type of look-ahead notice effect.

(Modification 8)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW and each modification, the control to a plurality of time saving states may be configured to be able to be executed in parallel at the same time. FIG. 8-46 is a timing chart showing the timing of control of various time saving states in the modified example 8. In the example shown in FIGS. 8-46, when the big hit game state is finished (timing T1), the case where the time saving state A is shifted to the time saving state A with 99 times of time saving is shown.

Next, it is assumed that a new time saving occurrence condition (in this example, occurrence of time saving deviation) is satisfied at the continuous timing T2 of the time saving state A. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIGS. 8-46, in parallel with the control of the time reduction state A, the control of the time reduction state B (in this example, the number of time reductions is 30 times) based on the time reduction deviation is newly started. Will be done. Then, when the variation display of 30 times is completed (timing T3), the control to the time saving state B is terminated. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 8-46, since the variation display of 99 times has not been completed at the stage of timing T3, the control of the time saving state A is continued. In the period from timing T2 to T3, the time saving state A control processing and the time saving state B control processing are executed in parallel in terms of internal processing, but the time saving state is apparently the same. Looks like it's continuing.

Next, it is assumed that a new time saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of the time saving deviation) is satisfied at the continuous timing T4 of the time saving state A. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIGS. 8-46, in parallel with the control of the time reduction state A, the control of the time reduction state B (in this example, the number of time reductions is 30 times) based on the time reduction deviation is newly started. Will be done. Then, at the timing T5 before the end of the 30-time variation display, the 99th variation display is ended after being controlled by the time-saving state A, and the control to the time-saving state A is ended. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 8-46, since the variation display of 30 times has not been completed at the stage of timing T5, the control of the time saving state B is continued. Then, when the variation display of 30 times is completed (timing T6), the control to the time saving state B is terminated. Therefore, in terms of internal processing, the time saving state A is ended at the timing T5 after the big hit game is finished, but the control of the time saving state B is also executed in parallel, so that 99 after the big hit game is finished. It seems that it was controlled in a reduced working hours state over times.

(Modification 9)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, by determining Y in step 120IWS1702 and executing steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, even if the time reduction is lost, the relief time is shortened. The case where a common variation pattern is configured to be decidable is shown, but it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured so that different fluctuation patterns can be determined even when the time reduction is missed and the relief time is shortened.

(Modification 10)
Further, the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW shows a case where the setting suggestion effect can be executed even after the variation display in which the relief time is established by switching to the background image corresponding to the special effect mode. I can't be limited. For example, based on the look-ahead determination result, the setting suggestion effect can be executed by executing a fanning effect such as "special effect mode ??" in the variation display before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established. May be good.

As described above, in the present feature portion 120IW and each modification, the following (means A1) to (means A10), (means B1) to (means B6), (means C1) to (means C5) are shown below. , And the configurations of the inventions shown in (means D1) to (means D5) are shown.

(Means A1) Variable display of the identification information including the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display, and is a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. Numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the special state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. ) Is updatable (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 120IWS84), and the special state control means is provided with a special number of times (for example, 900 times) the numerical information updated by the update means. ) Corresponds to a specific value (for example, "0"), and when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a relief time reduction is satisfied), the special state can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is (Step 120 IWS150 is executed), the updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the first special symbol). Regardless of whether the variable display of the second special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly), which is different from the specific display result. When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state is obtained. (Part for executing steps 120IWS114 to S116), special counting means for counting the number of special states generated in the special state (for example, the part for executing steps 120IWS73 in the game control microcomputer 100), and ending the special state. The special state ending means is further provided with a special state ending means (for example, a portion for executing step 120IWS143 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state ending means is such that the number of special states counted by the special counting means is a specific number of times (for example,). It is possible to end the special state based on the fact that it has become (once) (for example, a microcomputer for game control). The counter 100 sets the time saving end flag in step 120IWS75 when it is Y in step 120IWS74, determines Y in step 120IWS141 and executes step 120IWS143), and the special state control means is special in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. When the display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to control the special state during the special state based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a small hit variation. However, if the relief time reduction determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the end of the symbol confirmation period, step 120IWS150 is executed, and in the subsequent small hit game state, the time reduction state C is controlled), the special counting means is In the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result is not counted (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS73 at the start of the fluctuation to set the small hit count counter to 1. When the reduction is performed and the relief time is shortened, step 120IWS149 is executed at the end of the fluctuation to set the small hit count counter. Therefore, in the small hit fluctuation in which the relief time is satisfied, after the small hit count counter is set in step 120IWS149, The small hit count counter is not immediately subtracted from the fluctuation display). According to such a configuration, it can be suitably controlled in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately even though the special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this example, regarding "controllable to a special state during a special state", if the fluctuation display that becomes the relief time reduction is a small hit fluctuation, the time reduction state C is entered at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and then the time reduction state C is set. Although the case where the time saving state C is controlled even during the small hit game is shown, the timing of shifting to the time saving state C is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it may be configured to shift to the time saving state C from the start of the fluctuation of the small hit variation which is the relief time saving, or may be configured to shift to the time saving state C from the middle of the small hit game. As such, it suffices if there is a period controlled in the time saving state C during the small hit game in some form. In the case of configuring to shift to the time saving state C from the start of the fluctuation of the small hit fluctuation, the subtraction process of the small hit count counter may be executed at the start of the fluctuation of the small hit fluctuation.

Further, in this example, the case where the "specific number of times" is one is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to end the time saving state based on a plurality of small hits such as two or three times during the time saving state, or a plurality of times may be set as a specific number of times.

(Means A2) In the means A1, the special state ending means has a specified number of times (for example, once) as the number of times of the special state counted by the special counting means, and a predetermined number of times (for example, once) in the special state. When the variable display of 7 times, 99 times, 900 times is executed, and when the special state is terminated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving end flag in step 120IWS75 when it is Y in step 120IWS74). Then, when it is Y in step 120IWS78 and when it is Y in step 120IWS81, the time saving end flag is set in step 120IWS82, and it is determined as Y in step 120IWS141 to execute step 120IWS143). According to such a configuration, it can be suitably controlled in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately even though the special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the special state control means can be controlled to the special state based on the control to the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control micro). The computer 100 executes step 120 IWS537), and the special state termination means is controlled to the special state when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition and when it is controlled to the advantageous state. When the number of special states counted by the special counting means becomes the same (for example, once), the special state is terminated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a small hit in step 120IWS149). It may be configured to set "1" to the number of times counter). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special condition from being satisfied and the controlled special state from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to an advantageous special state.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to the means A3, the special state control means can be controlled to the special state based on the control to the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the means A4). The game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS537), when the special state termination means is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, and when the special state is controlled based on the advantageous state. The special state is terminated when the number of times of the special state counted by the special counting means becomes different (for example, twice) from the time when the special counting means is controlled (for example, in the modification example 1, the game control micro is used. The computer 100 may be configured to set the small hit count counter to "2" in step 120IWS149X). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special condition from being satisfied and the controlled special state from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to an advantageous special state.

It should be noted that the time saving state via the relief time saving may be difficult for the player to immediately notice, but in the modified example 1, the time saving state is completed with one small hit in the normal time saving state, whereas the time saving state is completed via the relief time saving. Since it is configured to end the time saving state with two small hits only when it is controlled to the time saving state, even if the winning to the second start winning opening is missed by the first small hit (second). (Even if you miss the charge of the hold memory), you can give another chance to win the second start winning opening.

Further, in the modified example 1, in the normal time reduction state, the number of time reductions is often as small as 1 or 7, and the time reduction state ends due to the occurrence of a small hit, whereas the relief time reduction is used. In the time-reduced state, the number of time-reduced times is as high as 900 times, and there are many cases where the time-reduced state is terminated by the occurrence of a small hit. can.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to the means A4, the special state control means counts the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied (for example, modification). In Example 2, since the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS463B at the end of the small hit game, in the small hit variation in which the relief time is satisfied, after the small hit count counter is set in step 120IWS149, the variation is displayed. The small hit count counter is immediately subtracted). According to such a configuration, it can be suitably controlled in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, if a special condition is satisfied and a capture element by controlling the special state remains in the special state, the capture element becomes a capture element for the player, and the possibility of becoming a disadvantage of the playground can be reduced.

(Means A6) In any of the means A1 to the means A5, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the special display result is derived and displayed. It is possible to control the special state after the special state based on the above (for example, in the modification 3, since the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS462D at the end of the small hit game, the small hit variation in which the relief time is shortened is established. It may be configured to be controlled to the time saving state C at the end of the small hit game). According to such a configuration, it can be suitably controlled in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, when a special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled, it is possible to wait until the start of the control of the special state, so that various controls can be easily performed.

(Means A7) In any one of the means A1 to the means A6, the special state control means can be controlled to the first special state (for example, a time saving state with one time saving number) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), and the second special state (for example, time saving) having a higher advantage than the first special state after being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state. It can be controlled to a time saving state of 7 times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and the special display is performed. In the special state based on the derivation and display of the display result, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control the first special state after the advantageous state (). For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120 IWS537 and S540). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the playground).

(Means A8) In any one of the means A1 to the means A6, the special state control means can be controlled to the first special state (for example, a time saving state with one time saving number) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), and the second special state (for example, time saving) having a higher advantage than the first special state after being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state. It can be controlled to a time saving state of 7 times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and the special display is performed. In the special state based on the derivation and display of the display result, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control the second special state after the advantageous state (). For example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120 IWS537 and S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the playground).

(Means A9) In any one of the means A1 to the means A6, the special state control means can be controlled to the first special state (for example, the time saving state of 99 times of time saving) after being controlled to the advantageous state in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120 IWS537, S545), and the second special state (for example, time saving) having a lower advantage than the first special state after being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state. It can be controlled to a time saving state of 7 times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and the special display is performed. In the special state based on the derivation and display of the display result, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control the first special state after the advantageous state (). For example, when the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542, if it wins a V prize with a small hit variation based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is 99 times. It may be configured to be controlled by). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the playground).

(Means A10) In any one of means A1 to means A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (for example, a time saving state of 99 times of time saving) after being controlled to an advantageous state in a normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120 IWS537, S545), and the second special state (for example, time saving) having a lower advantage than the first special state after being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state. It can be controlled to a time saving state of 7 times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and the special display is performed. In the special state based on the derivation and display of the display result, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control the second special state after the advantageous state (). For example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120 IWS537 and S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the playground).

(Means B1) Variable display of the identification information including the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display, and is a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. Special state control means that can be controlled (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the execution of variable display. ) Can be updated (for example, a portion that executes step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) and an effect executing means that can execute an effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, step 170 in the effect control CPU 120). (Part for executing S173), and the special state control means is provided with a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) of the numerical information updated by the updating means. When the special condition is satisfied (for example, the relief time is satisfied), the special state can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS 150), and the updating means is the variable of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the display is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation of the second special symbol). Regardless of whether the display is executed or not, the value of the relief time reduction count counter is uniformly updated), and the special state control means has a special display result (for example, a time reduction deviation symbol) different from the specific display result. It is possible to control to a special state when it is derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), and it is special when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. The state is controlled, and the special display result is the first special display result (for example, the symbol "6" in the time saving loss A) and the second special display result (for example, the symbol "8" in the time saving loss A). There are a plurality of types including, and the special state control means can control the same special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a game). Control microcomputer The data 100 executes step 120 IWS160 regardless of whether the symbol "6" is derived and displayed or the symbol "8" is derived and displayed), and the effect executing means is special in the normal state. When the variable display in which the condition is not satisfied is executed, different effects are executed depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, game control). The microcomputer 100 can execute steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 when N in step 120IWS1706 and steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 when Y in step 120IWS1706 to determine different fluctuation patterns). When the established variable display is executed, a common effect is executed between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a microcomputer for game control). The 100 is characterized in that, even if the time reduction is lost, if the relief time is shortened, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS1702 and steps 120IWS1703 and S1710 are executed to determine a common fluctuation pattern). do. According to such a configuration, it is suitable to control even in a situation where both when the special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled and when the special display result is derived and displayed to the special state. Can be done. For example, a suitable effect can be produced when the condition is controlled to a special state by satisfying a special condition.

In this example, as the "same special state", regardless of whether the symbol "6" is derived and displayed or the symbol "8" is derived and displayed, the time saving is A. Although the case where the time reduction state B is controlled to the same time reduction number of 100 times (see steps 120IWS155 and S160) is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the "same special state", (1) control the same number of time reductions, (2) determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol using the same fluctuation pattern table, and (3) use the same fluctuation pattern table. One or more of (4) controlling the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) to the open state by the same opening pattern is executed. It may be configured to execute all of (1) to (4).

Further, in this example, a case where different fluctuation patterns are determined as "performing different effects" is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, different addition times may be added to the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern depending on whether the symbol "6" is derived and displayed and the symbol "8" is derived and displayed. Further, for example, it may be configured to execute either (1) a process of determining a different fluctuation pattern and (2) a process of adding different addition times, or both of them may be executed. You may.

Further, for example, not only the fluctuation time may be different, but also the symbol determination period at the end of the fluctuation may be different.

(Means B2) In the means B1, the effect executing means can execute a common effect in the special state in the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed. (For example, if the game control microcomputer 100 is Y in step 120IWS1704 and Y in step 120IWS1705, it is possible to execute steps 120IWS1709 and S1710 to determine a common fluctuation pattern). good. According to such a configuration, it is suitable to control even in a situation where both when the special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled and when the special display result is derived and displayed to the special state. Can be done. For example, a suitable effect can be produced when the condition is controlled to a special state by satisfying a special condition.

In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, it is determined that the time reduction is out of order with a probability of about 1/200, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is about 1/400. However, it is not limited to such a mode, and for example, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, the probability of time reduction is further reduced (for example, 1 /). 800), it may be configured so that the time reduction is less likely to occur during the time reduction state.

Further, for example, conversely, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, the probability of time reduction loss is increased, and when there is a second hold storage at the end of the time reduction state, the variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the time reduction state is performed. It may be configured so that the revival effect can be easily executed.

(Means B3) The means B1 or the means B2 includes display result determining means (for example, a portion for executing step 120 IWS93 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the display result determining means is controlled in an advantageous state. A common process is executed between the process of determining the type of display result that will be controlled to an advantageous state when the display result is performed and the process of determining the type of special display result when the special display result is obtained (for example). The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 120 IWS93 in common both in the case of determining the jackpot symbol and in the case of determining the time-saving out-of-time symbol). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the program capacity by standardizing the processing.

(Means B4) In any one of the means B1 to the means B3, a variable display control means (for example, a portion for executing steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control computer 100) is provided and variable. The display control means determines a variable display period, which is a period during which variable display is executed according to the type of display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern), and is a special condition in a normal state. When the variable display in which is satisfied is executed, the variable display period is determined to be different between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 100 can execute steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 when N in step 120IWS1706 and steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 when Y in step 120IWS1706 to determine different fluctuation patterns), and the variable display is executed in a special state. When the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable display period is determined to be common (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 saves time. Even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened, it may be determined as Y in step 120IWS1702 and steps 120IWS1703, S1710 may be executed to determine a common fluctuation pattern). .. According to such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be made suitable depending on the situation.

(Means B5) In any one of the means B1 to the means B4, the effect executing means is a case where the first special display result is derived and displayed when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed in the normal state. The effect different from the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed is executed (for example, in the modified example 9, the game control microcomputer 100 is a case where the time reduction is out of order and the relief time is shortened. It may be configured so that different fluctuation patterns can be determined). According to such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be made suitable depending on the situation.

(Means B6) In any one of means B1 to means B5, a variable display control means (for example, a portion for executing steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) for executing variable display control is provided and variable. The display control means determines a definite display period of the display result, and the definite display period can be changed according to the type of the display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has steps 120IWS1127, S1133, S1135, S1137. May be configured to perform). According to such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be made suitable depending on the situation.

In this example, the case where the relief time is shortened or the symbol determination period is different depending on the display result is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the symbol determination period may be constant (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of whether the relief time has been shortened or the display result.

(Means C1) Variable display of the identification information including the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display, and is a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. Special state control means that can be controlled (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the execution of variable display. ) Is updatable (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 120IWS84) and a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different ratios of being controlled in an advantageous state. A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (for example, a portion that executes step 120IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state control means is a numerical value updated by the update means. When the information becomes a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) and the special condition is satisfied (for example, the relief time reduction is satisfied), the special state can be controlled (for example). , The game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS150), and the updating means displays numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. It is updated (for example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated. ), Notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, relief time saving rush effect) for notifying that the special state is controlled by the special state control means based on the establishment of a special condition. In step 120 IWS808, S845 in step 120, and a suggestion effect executing means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting a set value set by the setting means (for example, a setting suggestion effect at the time of relief). Step 120 IWS808, a portion for executing S845), and the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the notification effect is executed (for example,). The effect control CPU 120 can execute steps 120IWS808 and S845 to execute the relief time setting suggestion effect when the relief time shortening rush effect is executed). According to such a configuration, it is suitable to control even in a situation where both when the special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled and when the special display result is derived and displayed to the special state. Can be done. For example, a suitable effect can be produced when the condition is controlled to a special state by satisfying a special condition. In addition, since the ratio at which the special condition is satisfied changes according to the set value, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player when the special condition is controlled by executing the suggestion effect according to the ratio at which the special condition is satisfied. can.

In this example, since the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, the ease of occurrence of the relief time reduction also differs as a result, and the relief time reduction occurs when the setting value is set low. It will be easy to do. Therefore, when the relief time is shortened, the player may feel that the setting value may be low. Therefore, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered by executing the relief time setting suggestion effect that makes it possible to feel that the setting value is high when the relief time is shortened. Therefore, in this example, when the setting values "4" to "6", which are relatively high settings, the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief can be executed, other timings such as the setting suggestion effect at the time of big hit can be executed. The execution ratio is different from the setting suggestion effect executed in.

(Means C2) In the means C1, the setting suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is relieved in the jackpot fluctuation). It may be configured so as not to perform the time saving process). According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be executed without disturbing other effects.

In this example, the relief time reduction process is not performed for the large hit fluctuation, while the relief time reduction process is performed for the small hit variation. However, not limited to such a mode, the relief time reduction process is performed even for the small hit variation. It may be configured not to perform the processing of.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or the means C2, the setting suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect even after the special condition is satisfied (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 120IWS640 when it is Y in step 120IWS638. ) May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a set value over a long period of time, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means C4) In any one of the means C1 to the means C3, the setting suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, in the modification 10, the effect control CPU 120 reads ahead. Based on the determination result, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the variation display before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established). With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a set value over a long period of time, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means C5) In any of the means C1 to the means C4, the setting suggestion effect execution means can execute another suggestion effect (for example, a jackpot setting) that can be executed at a timing different from the suggestion effect when the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS887, S889 and step S176), and the suggestion effect when a special condition is satisfied is more advantageous than the other suggestion effects. Suggestion effects that suggest values are easy to execute (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, the relief setting suggestion effects are configured to be feasible when the setting values are set to "4" to "6". Therefore, the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief may be configured to be a setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting is relatively high). According to such a configuration, since the rate at which the special condition is satisfied is lower as the setting value is more advantageous, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when the special condition is satisfied by executing the suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the jackpot setting suggestion effect is executed during the fanfare period of the jackpot game is not limited to such a mode, but it should be executed during the round period or the ending period of the jackpot game. It may be configured.

(Means D1) Variable display of the identification information including the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display, and is a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. A special state control means that can be controlled (for example, a portion that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and an initial value set based on the execution of the variable display (for example, for example). The special state control means includes an update means (for example, a portion for executing step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of subtracting and updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction count) from “900”). When the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, "0"), it can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control computer 100 executes step 120 IWS 150), and the update means. Is to subtract and update the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed). Regardless of whether the variable display of the second special symbol is executed or not, the value of the relief time reduction count counter is uniformly updated), and the numerical information to be subtracted and updated by the updating means holds a predetermined condition. Sometimes it is set to an initial value (for example, in the modified examples 5 and 6, the game control computer 100 executes steps 120IWS85B, S84E), and the special state control means is specified by the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means. After controlling from the normal state to the special state based on the value, the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means became a specific value during the period until the predetermined condition is satisfied and the initial value is set. Based on this, the control from the normal state to the special state is not performed again (for example, in the modified example 5, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the process of steps 120IWS84 to S86 when the time is Y in the step S120IWS83. In the modified example 6, the game is played. The control computer 100 performs the processing of steps 120IWS84D to S86 when it is Y in step S120IWS84A or when it is N in step 120IWS84C. Do not execute. ). According to such a configuration, when the control to shift to the special state is performed according to the number of variable displays, the subtraction update process can be common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value, so that the program can be used. It is possible to prevent the capacity from increasing and to enable suitable control. For example, if the transition in which the numerical information reaches a specific value does not shift to a special state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in capacity by preparing a dedicated program for after the numerical information reaches a specific value.

In addition to the case where the relief time reduction counter is set at the end of the time reduction state via the relief time reduction by executing the steps 120IWS85B and S84E under the predetermined conditions, the step 120IWS13 is set when the initialization process at the time of turning on the power is executed. This includes the case where the relief time reduction counter is set by being executed, and the case where step 120IWS135 is executed and the relief time reduction counter is set when a big hit occurs.

When the relief time reduction counter is set when a big hit occurs, it may be set at the start of the big hit game, or may be set during the round of the big hit game or at the end of the big hit game.

Further, when the relief time reduction counter is set at the time of executing the initialization process at the time of turning on the power, the process may be different depending on whether the setting is changed or not. For example, if the initialization process is executed after changing the settings, the relief time reduction counter is set, while if the initialization process is executed without changing the settings, the value of the current relief time reduction counter is set. It may be configured to be maintained. On the contrary, when the setting is changed and the initialization process is executed, the value of the current relief time reduction counter is maintained, while when the initialization process is executed without changing the setting, the relief time is shortened. It may be configured to set a count counter.

(Means D2) In the means D1, the updating means performs variable display when the subtraction-updated numerical information is a value larger than a specific value and when the subtraction-updated numerical information is a specific value. Is executed, the numerical information can be subtracted and updated (for example, in the modification 6, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS84), and the subtracted and updated numerical information is larger than the specific value. When it is a value, the numerical information is updated to the numerical information after subtraction (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS84C to S86 when N in step 120IWS84A), and the subtracted and updated numerical information is used. When the value is smaller than the specific value, the numerical information may be updated to the specific value (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may execute step 120IWS84B at Y in step 120IWS84A). .. According to such a configuration, when the control to shift to the special state is performed according to the number of variable displays, the subtraction update process can be common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value, so that the program can be used. It is possible to prevent the capacity from increasing and to enable suitable control. For example, if the transition in which the numerical information reaches a specific value does not shift to a special state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in capacity by preparing a dedicated program for after the numerical information reaches a specific value.

(Means D3) In the means D1 or the means D2, an operating means (for example, a clear switch) for performing an operation and an initial value setting means (for example) for setting numerical information updated by the updating means according to the operation of the operating means as initial values. , A portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 120 IWS13). According to such a configuration, it is possible to select whether or not to set the initial value by operating the operating means, so that the convenience in terms of operation can be enhanced.

As an operating means for changing the setting or setting the relief time reduction counter, a dedicated operating means (button or switch) different from the clear switch may be provided.

(Means D4) In any one of the means D1 to the means D3, the special state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving missed symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed. Yes (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS 160), and even when the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means is a specific value, it can be controlled to a special state when the special display result is displayed. Therefore, even after the numerical information that has been subtracted and updated by the updating means becomes a specific value, it is possible to control the special state when the special display result is displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. Step 120 IWS88 may be executed regardless of whether or not the time saving state C via the relief time saving is in progress). According to such a configuration, since the numerical information that has been subtracted and updated may be controlled to a special state after it becomes a specific value again, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means D5) In any one of the means D1 to the means D4, a determination means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state (for example, a portion for executing step 120IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a determination means. Pre-reading notice effect based on the determination means for determining whether or not the control is in an advantageous state (for example, the portion for executing step 120IWS101 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the determination result of the determination means. (For example, the part that executes step S161 in the effect control CPU 120), a predetermined period before the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means becomes a specific value, and the updating means subtracting and updating. In the specific period after the numerical information is set to a specific value, the look-ahead notice effect limiting means for limiting the execution of the look-ahead notice effect (for example, in the modification 7, as shown in FIGS. 8-45, the time saving state C is set. Execution of the look-ahead notice effect over a predetermined period from the end 8 fluctuation display before the change to the relief time reduction and a specific period from the relief time reduction to the 8 change change display after the end of the time reduction state C. (Restrict), and may be configured to include. According to such a configuration, since the numerical information that has been subtracted and updated may be controlled to a special state after it becomes a specific value again, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is uniformly 900 times is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode and varies depending on, for example, a set value. The relief time may be shortened based on the fact that the variable display is executed for the number of times. For example, when the set values are "1" to "5", the relief time is shortened while the relief time is shortened based on the fact that the variation display is executed 900 times without the big hit, the small hit, and the time reduction. When the value is "6", it may be configured so that the relief time reduction occurs based on the execution of the fluctuation display 600 times without the big hit, the small hit, and the time reduction deviation, and a specific setting. Only in the case of a value, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be different.

Further, for example, for all of the set values "1" to "6", the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be different for each set value. In this case, for example, the ratio of the denominator of the jackpot probability to the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be configured to be the same as about 3 times. Further, for example, within the range of 2.5P ≦ n ≦ 3.0P (P = denominator of jackpot probability, n = number of fluctuations until the relief time is controlled), the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is made different. May be.

Further, even in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving state may not always be continued until the next big hit occurs. In this case, as shown in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, the small hit occurs. It may be configured to end the time saving state, and as shown in the modified example 5 and the modified example 6, the time saving state is terminated based on the completion of the fluctuation display of the specified number of times (900 times in this example). It may be configured as follows.

Further, as shown in the modified example 5 and the modified example 6, after the fluctuation display of the specified number of times (900 times in this example) is finished in the time shortened state via the relief time saving and the normal state is entered, the big hit or the small hit is further performed. , If the fluctuation display of the specified number of times (for example, 900 times) is completed without losing the time reduction, the relief time may be shortened again and the state may be changed to the time reduction state, or the relief time may not be reduced again. It may be configured. In this case, when the relief time is not shortened again, for example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0, it may be controlled not to perform the subtraction processing of the relief time reduction counter from the next processing. Then, the process of subtracting the relief time reduction counter from the next process and returning it to 0 when it becomes a negative value may be performed.

Further, the configurations shown in the following (means 1A) to (means 10A) may be applied to the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1A) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, step 120 IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). A portion for executing S160 and S537) and an update means (for example, a portion for executing step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display are provided. The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, step 120IWS85 in the game control microcomputer 100). , The part that executes S86. The part that executes step 120 IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.), The updating means is executed when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed. It may be configured to update the numerical information depending on the case (for example, the part where the step 120 IWS 84 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is variablely displayed, the numerical information is continuously updated, which makes it easier for the player to be rescued and motivates the game. Can be done.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special condition is satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from the specific display result is continuously derived and displayed a special number of times as the display result of the variable display (means 2A). For example, a portion for executing steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; a portion for executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100) may be configured. According to such a configuration, since the display result that is disadvantageous to the player is continuously derived and displayed, it is relieved, so that the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A or the means 2A, the updating means updates the numerical information (for example, when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a time saving state, which may be a probabilistic state)). , The part that executes step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to the special state once, it can be controlled to the special state again, so that it can be controlled to the special state until it is substantially controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, the investment of the player can be suppressed and the disadvantage to the player can be prevented.

(Means 4A) In any of means 1A to means 3A, the updating means sets numerical information as an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, steps 120 IWS13, S135, S149, in the game control microcomputer 100). It may be configured to execute S161). According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to an advantageous state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 5A) In the means 4A, the predetermined condition may be configured to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a portion for executing step 120 IWS 135 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to an advantageous state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 6A) In the means 4A, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, game control). (Part of executing step 120 IWS 160 in the microcomputer 100 for game control), a predetermined condition is configured to derive and display a special display result (for example, a portion of executing step 120 IWS 161 in the microcomputer 100 for game control). You may. According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to a special state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7A) In the means 4A, the predetermined condition may be configured such that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, a portion for executing step 120 IWS 149 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 8A) In the means 4A, when the power supply is stopped, the updating means includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped. , Set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the initial value when the specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of the initialization process) (for example, the part where step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). , The predetermined condition may be configured such that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a portion for executing steps S8 and 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when the initialization is performed in the amusement park, if the numerical information up to a special number of times is retained, it may be too disadvantageous for the amusement park, so it is operated for the amusement park. Can be made easier.

(Means 9A) In any one of the means 1A to the means 8A, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, a portion for executing steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means has a special number of times. Based on the execution of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more (for example, the part where steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed), and the special state is special. Based on the execution of the variable display of the number of times, it is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, the portion where steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed), and the effect control means is It may be configured to execute different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the situation is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time, so measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display should be taken. By making changes to the production mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 10A) In any one of the means 1A to the means 8A, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, a portion for executing steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means has a special number of times. Based on the execution of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more (for example, the part where steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed), and the special state is special. Based on the execution of the variable display of the number of times, it is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, the portion where steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed), and the effect control means is It may be configured to execute a common effect in the first specific period and the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to the special state in the second specific period, it is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware of the uncontrolled situation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification, the configurations shown in the following (means 1B-1), (means 1B-2) to (means 5B) may be applied.

(Means 1B-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming area that is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can divide a game medium into a first path (for example, a path by left-handed hitting) and a second path (for example, a path by right-handed hitting). A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a portion that executes steps 120 IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display. A plurality of types including an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of (for example, a portion for executing step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control, and advantageous state control. A process execution means for updating a data value indicating a game progress state required for executing a process and executing a process corresponding to the data value (for example, a portion for executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100). The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, a game control micro). The part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the computer 100. The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display is executed (for example, the portion where step 120IWS84 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the processing execution means is the first regarding the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value. One process is executed (for example, the portion where steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control computer 100), and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second process regarding the advantageous state is executed (for example). , The part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control computer 100), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. (For example, a game control microcomputer) The data 100 may be configured to execute the next variable postponement process), the game medium is launched to the first path in the normal state, and the game is played in the special state, and the game medium is sent to the second path in the special state. It may be configured to include a launch promotion notification means for firing and performing a game and executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1B-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A step in a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that is a game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. Variable with 120IWS150, S160, S537 (execution part) and update means (for example, part for executing step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) in which numerical information can be updated based on execution of variable display. A process execution means (for example,) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including display control and advantageous state control, and executes a process corresponding to the data value. A portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step S25), and the state control means is provided when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. It can be controlled to a special state (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control computer 100; a part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control computer 100), and the updating means is the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the second identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part where step 120IWS84 is executed in the game control computer 100), and the processing execution means is , The first process related to the variable display is executed when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the portion where steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control computer 100), and the data value is different from the first numerical value. At this time, the second process relating to the advantageous state is executed (for example, the portion where steps S114 to S117 are executed in the game control computer 100), and the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The state control means executes a third process for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute the next variation postponement process). Information that informs that the special state is controlled during the execution of the third process. It may be configured to include an effect executing means for executing an intellectual effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 2B) In the means 1B-1 and the means 1B-2, the process executing means executes the second process after the first process when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, since the control of the advantageous state is prioritized, the result is not disadvantageous to the player, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3B) In means 1B-1, means 1B-2 or means 2B, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, performs step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part), the processing execution means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value, and the special information when the state control means controls the special state. May be changed from the second information to the first information, and may be configured to execute different processing when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. According to such a configuration, the process of shifting to the special state can be suitably executed by managing the special information.

(Means 4B) The means 3B includes variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern for variable display, and the variable display pattern determining means is special. It may be configured to determine different variable display patterns when the information is the first information and when the information is the second information. According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

(Means 5B) The means 3B includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determining means is special. It may be configured to determine a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs depending on whether the information is the first information or the second information. According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

Further, the configurations shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 6C) may be applied to the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1C) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling the game, and an effect corresponding to the variable display. The game control means includes a effect control means for controlling (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A state control means that can be controlled (for example, a portion that executes steps 120 IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example,). , The portion that executes step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means that controls the state information that can specify the state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is variable. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the display (for example, the part where step 120IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100) and updated. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a portion for executing steps 120 IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100). The portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 120 IWS150.), The updating means is numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), the state information control means sets the state information as the first numerical value in the normal state, and the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result. When the state information is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state based on the derivation display, the state information is set as the second numerical value, and when the state information is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition. Is different from the first and second numbers As a numerical value, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and when in a special state, the specific information according to the case where the state information is the second numerical value and the case where the state information is the third numerical value. May be configured to be capable of transmitting. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be suitably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the state information control means obtains the state information as the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value when the special condition is satisfied again after being controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be suitably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3C) In the means 1C or the means 2C, the effect control means controls the special state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed, and the state control means satisfies the special condition. It may be configured so that different effects can be executed when the special state is controlled based on what is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently digest the variable display in the special state where the special condition is satisfied and controlled, so that it is possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4C) In any of the means 1C to the means 3C, the effect control means controls the special state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed, and the state control means is special. It may be configured so that a common effect can be executed (for example, a common background image is displayed) when the special state is controlled based on the condition being satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because no new production is required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

(Means 5C) In any of the means 1C to the means 4C, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, the part where step 120IWS160 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means controls the state when the state control means controls the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result. The control means may be configured so that different effects can be executed when the control means is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition. According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently digest the variable display in the special state where the special condition is satisfied and controlled, so that it is possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6C) In any of the means 1C to the means 4C, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means , When the state control means controls the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition. It may be configured so that the effect of can be executed (for example, a common background image is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because no new production is required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

Further, the configurations shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 4D) may be applied to the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1D) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling the game, and an effect corresponding to the variable display. The game control means includes a effect control means for controlling (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A state control means that can be controlled (for example, a portion that executes steps 120 IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example,). , A portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 120 IWS84), and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can hold numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped. Including, the state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100). The part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86. The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control computer 100), the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the variable display of the second identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether it is executed (for example, a portion where step 120IWS84 is executed in the game control computer 100), and the game control means transmits predetermined information to the effect control means when the power supply is started. It is possible, and even if the effect control means is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed in a predetermined period after the power supply is started based on the reception of the predetermined information. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, and to increase the operating rate of the game machine.

(Means 2D) In the means 1D, the game control means is configured to be able to transmit specific information that can specify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when the power supply is started. May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, increase the operating rate of the game machine, and suppress the increase in the processing load.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or the means 2D, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the effect control means is based on the establishment of the special condition. It is possible to execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on specific information, and as specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is less than or equal to a predetermined value. It includes the first specific information (for example, a command for specifying the number of times of relief time reduction 1) and the second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, the number of times of relief time reduction). The command may be configured to specify the number of times 2). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss and preferably realize processing related to specific information.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to means 3D, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first predetermined number of variable displays less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that, and every time a second predetermined number of variable displays less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the special number of variable displays is executed, the suggestion effect can be executed. It may be configured to be. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, the risk of unknowingly causing a loss can be reduced.

Further, the configurations shown in the following (means 1E-1) and (means 1E-2) may be applied to the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1E-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. It corresponds to a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a game and a variable display, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state). The game control means includes a production control means for controlling the effect (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A state control means that can be controlled by the state) (for example, a part that executes steps 120 IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display. (For example, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 120 IWS84) and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped. , A step in the initialization means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means including information on the number of times that the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (the part for executing S8). For example, the part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control computer 100; the part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed. And when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part where step 120IWS84 is executed in the game control computer 100), and the effect control means has the stored contents of the backup storage means. Specified when the specific display result is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after initialization, and after the stored contents of the backup storage means are initialized. The display result is derived and displayed. After that, it may be configured to execute different effects when it is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition and when it is controlled to the special state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value can be increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Means 1E-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. It corresponds to a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a game and a variable display, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state). The game control means includes a production control means for controlling the effect (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A state control means that can be controlled by the state) (for example, a part that executes steps 120 IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display. (For example, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 120 IWS84) and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped. , A step in the initialization means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means including information on the number of times that the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (the part for executing S8). For example, the part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control computer 100; the part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed. And when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part where step 120IWS84 is executed in the game control computer 100), and the effect control means has the stored contents of the backup storage means. Specified when the specific display result is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after initialization, and after the stored contents of the backup storage means are initialized. The display result is derived and displayed. After that, it may be configured to execute different effects when it is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition and after it is controlled to the special state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value can be increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Explanation of feature section 090IW)
Next, the feature unit 090IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 090IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state (non-time saving state) or a time saving state. As will be described in detail later, it is possible to control from the normal state to the time saving state via the small hit game state based on the derivation and display of the small hit symbol. Further, the display result of the small hit includes the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B which can be controlled in the time saving state, and the display result of the small hit C which cannot be controlled in the time saving state. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result which becomes a small hit is derived and displayed, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result which becomes a small hit is derived and displayed. The ratio of the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is different.

(Big hit type judgment table, small hit type judgment table)
9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 9-1 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 9-1 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , It is a table referred to for determining the type of big hit to "10R time saving big hit".

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , It is a table referred to for determining the type of big hit to "10R time saving big hit".

The "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. After shifting to the reduced working hours state, the reduced working hours state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, the 10R time saving big hit is determined with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, the 10R time saving big hit is determined with a 100% probability.

The jackpot type is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, even if the number of time reductions is different (for example, 3 or 5 times) and a plurality of types of time reduction jackpots are provided, or the number of rounds is different (for example, 2 rounds or 4 rounds) and a plurality of types of time reduction jackpots are provided. good. Further, in this example, only the case where only the time-saving jackpot that shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided, but the non-time-saving jackpot (normal jackpot) that does not shift to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided. It may be configured. Further, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the case where the 100R time saving jackpot is determined with a 100% probability is shown, but the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Even in this case, it may be configured to be determined by a plurality of types of jackpots.

FIG. 9-1 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (C), the small hit type determination table is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type as either "small hit A", "small hit B", or "small hit C".

"Small hit A" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small hit game (1st round) did not win a V prize (detected by the non-V winning opening switch and does not pass through the V winning opening). It is a small hit that shifts to a time-saving state after the small hit game is completed on condition that it is detected. When shifting to the reduced working hours state, the reduced working hours state is maintained until the 10-time variation display is completed. The "small hit A" is a small hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the second round to the fourth round on condition that the V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, when it becomes "small hit A", the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device is controlled so as not to win V.

"Small hit B" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small hit game (1st round) did not win a V prize (detected by the non-V winning opening switch and does not pass through the V winning opening). It is a small hit that shifts to a time-saving state after the small hit game is completed on condition that it is detected. When shifting to the reduced working hours state, the reduced working hours state is maintained until the five fluctuation displays are completed. The "small hit B" is a small hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the second round to the fourth round on condition that the V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, when the "small hit B" is reached, the opening pattern for opening the special variable winning ball device is controlled so as not to win the V prize.

"Small hit C" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small hit game (1st round) did not win V (detected by the non-V winning opening switch and did not pass through the V winning opening). Even if it is detected that there is a small hit), it is a small hit that does not shift to the time saving state after the small hit game is completed. Further, the "small hit C" is a small hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the second round to the fourth round on condition that the V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, when the "small hit C" is reached, the opening pattern for opening the special variable winning ball device is controlled so as to win a V in most cases.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (C), in this example, 25% of the cases where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained is determined as "small hit A", and 25% is determined. It is determined to be "small hit B" and 50% is determined to be "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (D), in this example, 5% of the cases where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained is determined as "small hit A", and 5% is It is determined to be "small hit B" and 90% is determined to be "small hit C".

The small hit type is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of types of time saving jackpots may be provided with different number of time saving times (for example, 3 times or 5 times). Further, it may be configured to provide a small hit without V winning, which is substantially impossible to win a V during the small hit game and does not shift to the big hit game after the small hit game.

Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a small hit is higher than the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, so that the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Has a higher ratio of small hit A or small hit B (that is, small hit with time reduction), but when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit with time reduction is 100%. You may hit it.

(Opening pattern of small hit game)
Next, the opening pattern of the small hit game will be described. FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 9-2, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) elapses after the small hit game is started at the timing S1, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at the timing S2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is controlled to be in the closed state, a special variable of 0.05 seconds is performed. After opening the winning ball device (special winning opening), after a closing time of 1 second, the special winning opening is opened and closed again for 0.05 seconds, and after a closing time of 12 seconds, the special winning opening is similarly opened twice. Performs opening and closing operations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the case of small hit C (no time reduction), the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) is controlled when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is controlled to be in the open state. By repeating the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds after opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds and then closing the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds again so that is controlled to the open state, one small The special winning opening is opened 10 times by hitting.

The operation of the V winning opening opening / closing plate is common to the case of small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) and the case of small hit C (without time reduction), and in either case, it is opened for 8 seconds.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning opening in a small hit is as short as 0.05 seconds, but as already explained, a plurality of restricted pieces are formed in the special variable winning ball device. On the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device, about 2 to 3 game balls meander and flow down, so if the bottom member is controlled to be open even if the opening time is short, it will be on the bottom member. The game ball can fall into the special variable winning ball device and enter.

Then, in the case of small hit C (no time reduction), the special variable winning ball device is opened when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is open, so that the game ball can be won in the V winning opening. It is possible. In addition, in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), the special variable winning ball device is opened when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is closed, so that the game ball is won in the V winning opening. Impossible or difficult to make.

When the small hit C (no time reduction), the game ball that has entered the special winning opening is not controlled to the time saving state when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening, but the small hit A or B (with time reduction). In this case, the game ball that has entered the special winning opening is controlled to a time saving state when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening. As a result, when the small hit C (no time reduction), the game ball is likely to pass through the V winning opening and be controlled to the big hit state, but is not controlled to the small hit state, and the small hit A or B is not controlled. In the case of (with time reduction), it is extremely unlikely that the game ball will be controlled in the jackpot state without passing through the V winning opening, but it is highly likely that it will be controlled in the time reduction state.

Then, if the game ball wins in the special winning opening and V wins, after the closing time (interval time) and the small hit end time (ending time) of a predetermined period have elapsed after the final opening of the special winning opening is completed. , The game shifts to the big hit game state, and the control to the open state of the special variable winning ball device 7 is performed from the second round to the fourth round.

In addition, in both cases of small hit A or B (with time reduction) and small hit C (without time reduction), the ending period shifts from timing S3 to S4, but small hit A or B (with time reduction). ), The ending period t3 is longer than the ending period t4 in the case of the small hit C (no time reduction). For example, the ending period t3 is 10 seconds longer than the ending period t4. As a result, in the case of a small hit A or B (with a time reduction), it is possible to secure a time for displaying the start screen (see FIG. 9-9 (N)) in the time reduction state.

In the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), the ending period may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening (that is, whether or not to shift to the time reduction state). Specifically, when the game ball does not win in the V winning opening, the time is controlled to be shortened. In this case, the ending period is lengthened.

As described above, in this example, different patterns are used when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed (open in this example). The special variable winning ball device can be controlled to the open state by the number of times). Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the time saving state is controlled.

Specifically, in this example, the V prize that performs a common operation when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. When a mouth opening / closing plate is provided and a display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, it is special when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is in a state of obstructing the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening. When the variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state and the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is in a state of not obstructing the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening. The special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the time saving state is controlled.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 9-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 090IW. Of these, FIG. 9-3 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 9-4 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

First, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. As shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is used as the variation pattern. Fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (non-reach in normal fluctuation → development effect), variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA1-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development effect), variation pattern PA2-1 ( It is determined to be one of a variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development effect), a variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), and a variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β). In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the variation occurs during the time saving state, the variation patterns include the variation pattern PA1-5 (shortened variation) and the variation pattern PA1-6 (non-shortened variation). Reach → development effect), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development effect), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β) Is decided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PB1-1 (normal reach) is used as the variation pattern. , The variation pattern PB1-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PB1-3 (super reach β) is determined. Further, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, if a big hit occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of the patterns PB1-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit C (no time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. It is determined to be one of PC1-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), and fluctuation pattern PC1-3 (super reach β). Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the small hit C is obtained during the time saving state, the variation patterns are the variation pattern PC1-1 (normal reach) and the variation pattern PC1-2 (super reach α). , Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC1-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, when the small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. It is decided to be one of the fluctuation pattern PC1-4 (non-reach → development production with normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PC1-5 (non-reach → development production with shortened fluctuation), and the fluctuation pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development production). Will be done. In addition, when executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if the small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the variation pattern PC1-6 (non-reach in shortened variation →) is used as the variation pattern. It is determined to be either development effect) or variable pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the variation occurs during the normal state, the variation patterns are the variation pattern PA3-1 and the variation pattern PA3-. It is decided to be one of 2 (non-reach in normal fluctuation → development production). In addition, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a deviation during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns are the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (shortened fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 (non-shortened fluctuation). Reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PB3-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB3-2 (normal reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PB3-3 (super reach α,) fluctuation pattern PB3-4 (super reach β) Is decided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PA3-5 (normal reach) is determined as the variation pattern. .. In addition, when executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if a big hit occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PC3-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of the patterns PC3-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the small hits A to C occur during the normal state, the variation pattern PA3-6 (normal reach) is used as the variation pattern. Will be decided. If the small hit C occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PD3-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PD3-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PD3-3 (super reach β). It will be decided by either.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. It is determined to be either a variation pattern PD3-4 (non-reach → development effect in shortened variation) or a variation pattern PD3-5 (normal reach → development effect).

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. The control to execute the variable display is performed, but in this example, it is decided that the normal state has a 10% probability of hitting the normal figure, and the time saving state has a 90% probability. It is decided that it will be a hit with a probability. Further, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) in the open state based on the determination that the normal symbol hit is achieved in the normal symbol process process (step S26).

As described above, in this example, the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed, and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The rate at which development effects are executed is different. Specifically, in the case of small hit A or small hit B, the effect is pasted and the effect is executed, but in the case of small hit C, the development effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-reading notice effect and the effect after the big hit game state or the time-saving state, so that the pre-reading notice effect can be suitably executed.

In the case of a small hit A or a small hit B (with a time reduction), a variation pattern common to the small hit C (no time reduction), the missed time, and the big hit may be provided.

(Post-processing after closing small hits)
FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing the small hit closing post-processing (step 090IWS116) in the special symbol process processing in the feature unit 090IW. In the small hit closing post-processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 090IWS451), and if the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS453. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer the time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 090IWS452), and the process ends.

In step 090IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 090IWS454). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 090IWS455). When the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the time saving number counter if it is set (step 090IWS456). Further, the CPU 103 resets the V winning flag (step 090IWS457). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS458). Further, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before opening the big winning opening (step 090IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 090IWS117) (step 090IWS460).

When it is confirmed that the V winning flag is not set in the process of step 090IWS456, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is a small hit A (step 090IWS461). In the case of small hit A, it is confirmed whether or not the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS461a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. When the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS462). “10” is set in the time reduction counter (step 090IWS463). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation A command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS464). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

Further, when the CPU 103 confirms that it is not a small hit A (N in step 090IWS461), it confirms whether or not it is a small hit B (step 090IWS467). In the case of small hit B, it is confirmed whether or not the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS467a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. When the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS468). “5” is set in the time reduction counter (step 090IWS469). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation B command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS470). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

Further, when it is confirmed that the CPU 103 is not the small hit B (N in step 090IWS467), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation C command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS471). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

In step 090IWS465, the CPU 103 resets the small hit flag (step 090IWS465). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS462). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS463).

A value is set in the timer that measures the ending period after the small hit is closed depending on whether it is the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction) or small hit C (without time reduction). Alternatively, the value is set so that the ending period in the case of B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period in the case of small hit C (without time reduction).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
9-6 and 9-7 are flowcharts showing the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7 in the feature unit 090IW. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the big hit stop flag is set (step 090IWS871). The jackpot stop flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has already been derived and displayed but before the jackpot start designation command is received, and is set in step 090IWS875 described later. If the jackpot stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS876.

If the big hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit stop flag is set (step 090IWS872). The small hit stop flag is a flag indicating that the small hit symbol has already been derived and displayed but before the small hit start designation command is received, and is set in step 090IWS883 described later. If the small hit stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS885.

If the small hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, big hit symbol, small hit symbol) (step 090IWS873).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (Y in step 090IWS874), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS875). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 090IWS876). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 090IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS877). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 090IWS878). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 090IWS879), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step 090IWS880).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the big hit (step 090IWS881).

Unless the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (N in step 090IWS874), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (step 090IWS882). .. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (Y of step 090IWS882), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS883). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 090IWS885). It should be noted that whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If the small hit start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS886). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with a time reduction) (step 090IWS887a). In the case of a small hit A or a small hit B, the process table of the small hit notification effect for notifying that the hit is a small hit and the right-handed instruction A for instructing a right-handed hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). If it is not a small hit A or a small hit B, that is, if it is a small hit C (no time reduction), a V winning promotion effect for promoting the winning of a game ball to the V winning opening and a right-handing instruction B for instructing a right-handed hit Select the process data of (step 090IWS887b). It should be noted that the right-handed instruction A and the right-handed instruction B are different in mode. Further, the right-handed instruction is different from the right-handed instruction C in the time-saving state. For example, as a difference in mode, the size, position, and content of the image of the right-handed instruction are different.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 090IWS888), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). The control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 090IWS889). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period during the small hit game (step 090IWS890).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step 090IWS891).

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state during the small hit game, in the small hit medium effect processing, the effect corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device is performed as the small hit medium effect. Will be executed.

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step 090IWS882), that is, when it is determined that the hit is off, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag. The value is updated according to the display start waiting process (step S170) (step 090IWS895).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect of the small hit A or the small hit B (with time reduction) and the small hit C (without time reduction) will be described.

FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10 show the transition of the screen when the small hit A or the small hit B (with time reduction) is reached in the normal state (low probability / low base state).

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), when controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the image display device 5 corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the upper left. The small symbol 090IW100 on the left, middle, and right is displayed. In this example, since the starting prize is almost generated in the first starting winning opening in the normal state, an example is shown in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 is started. .. Then, in conjunction with the fluctuation display of the small symbol 090IW100, the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left, middle, and right, which is larger than the small symbol 090IW100, starts to fluctuate in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 9-8 (B) and 9-8 (C), it is assumed that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 are stopped and the jackpot symbol reaches normal reach. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (D), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 090IW101 inside is stopped and the out-of-order symbol is stopped. At this time, the decorative symbol 090IW101 is not in a completely stopped state, but in a temporary stop state accompanied by shaking. The small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 090IW101 is temporarily erased, and the development effect is executed. In this example, the character 090IW102, which suggests that the time saving state is controlled, is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100. The small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (F), after the development effect shown in FIG. 9-8 (E) is executed, the decorative symbol 090IW101 that has been temporarily stopped is displayed in a variable manner again. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 9-8 (G) and 9-8, it is assumed that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 are stopped and the small hit A or the small hit B is in the reach state. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (I), it is assumed that the remaining decorative symbol 090IW101 is stopped and the small hit symbol "135" of the small hit A or the small hit B is stopped. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 also stops at "135" at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (J), when the small hit symbol "135" is stopped in the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101, the small hit is generated in the time before opening before the special variable winning ball device is opened. The character 090IW103 suggesting that it should start is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (K), when the small hit game is started, the background A during the small hit is displayed, and the character "small hit" is displayed to notify that the small hit game is in progress. 090IW105 is displayed. Further, in the case of the small hit A or the small hit B, it is difficult to win the game ball in the V winning opening, and it is difficult to generate the big hit. For this reason, it is more disappointing for the player than the small hit C, which tends to generate a big hit, but in the case of the small hit A or the small hit B, V is not won and the time is controlled to be shortened. Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to enter toward the special variable winning ball device, the right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed, and the right-handed instruction is given so as not to agitate the player unnecessarily. Display (Right-handed instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner at the lower right of the screen. The right-handed instruction display 090IW106 is composed of the characters "right-handed" and one arrow pointing to the right. In order to make the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 inconspicuous, the small hit medium background A is a flashy background that attracts the interest of the player, such as the appearance of a character.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (L), when the small hit game state ends without winning the V winning opening, the end screen is displayed in the ending period of the small hit. For example, the background and characters corresponding to the end screen are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (M), after the end screen of the small hit game is displayed, the start screen in the time saving state is displayed. For example, an image indicating that the time saving state is started and the number of fluctuations in the time saving state are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (N), when the display of the start screen of the time saving state is completed, the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left middle right is started, and the control of the time saving state is started. When the control of the time reduction state is started, the background during the time reduction is displayed, and the remaining number of fluctuations 090IW107 in the time reduction state is displayed in the upper right of the screen. Further, during the time saving state, the right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction C) 090IW108 is displayed at the upper part of the screen in order to allow the game ball to enter toward the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B. The right-handed instruction display 090IW108 in the time-saving state is composed of the character "right-handed" and two right-pointing arrows. The right-handed instruction display 090IW108 is larger than the right-handed instruction display 090IW106, and the display position is also different.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (O) and 9-10 (P) (Q), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 090IW101 is stopped, the small symbol 090IW100 is stopped, and the out-of-order symbol is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (R), when the next fluctuation is started and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol 090IW101 and the small symbol 090IW100 is started, the remaining number of fluctuations 090IW107 is subtracted. After that, the same control is performed until the time saving state ends.

FIGS. 9-11 to 9-12 show the transition of the screen when the small hit C (no time reduction) occurs in the normal state (low probability / low base state).

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), when controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the image display device 5 corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the upper left. The small symbol 090IW100 on the left, middle, and right is displayed. In this example, since the starting prize is almost generated in the first starting winning opening in the normal state, an example is shown in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 is started. .. Then, in conjunction with the fluctuation display of the small symbol 090IW100, the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left, middle, and right, which is larger than the small symbol 090IW100, starts to fluctuate in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (B), (C), and (D), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left, middle, and right stops, and the small hit symbol "357" of the small hit C stops. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 also stops at "357" at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (E), when the small hit symbol "357" is stopped in the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101, the small hit is generated in the time before opening before the special variable winning ball device is opened. The character 090IW103 suggesting that it should start is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (F), when the small hit game is started, the background B during the small hit is displayed, and the game ball is launched aiming at the V winning opening of the special variable winning ball device. The character 090IW109 "Aim for V!" Is displayed to notify that. Further, in the case of the small hit C, it is easy for the game ball to win the V winning opening, and it is easy to generate a big hit. For this reason, the player is pleased to be able to obtain a large amount of balls. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter toward the special variable winning ball device and generate a big hit, the right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction B) 090IW110 is displayed, and the right-handed instruction display 090IW110 is greatly conspicuous in the center of the screen. Display with. The right-handed instruction display 090IW110 is composed of the characters "right-handed" and three right-pointing arrows. In order to make the right-handed instruction display 090IW107 more conspicuous, the small hit medium background B has a simple screen without characters or the like appearing, and is a sober background that does not attract the interest of the player. The right-handed instruction display 090IW110 is larger than the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 in the small hit A or the small hit B and the right-handed instruction display 090IW108 in the time saving, and the display positions are also different.

As described above, the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 in the small hit A or the small hit B, the right-handed instruction display 090IW110 in the small hit C, and the right-handed instruction display 090IW108 in the time saving are the sizes, display positions, and display modes ( The number of arrows) is different.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (G), when the V winning opening is won and the small hit game state ends, it is suggested that a winning is generated at the V winning opening and a big hit is generated during the ending period of the small hit. The letter "V" 090IW104 is displayed in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (H), the character 090IW111 "ROUND2" suggesting that the big hit game (second round) is started is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (I), when the big hit game (second round) is started, the background during the big hit is displayed, and the game is performed in the big hit game state. The same applies to the third and fourth rounds. In this example, an example in which a small hit C is obtained during the normal state is described, but even if a small hit C is obtained during the reduced working hours state, the same effect as described above is performed during the small hit game, and the small hit is performed. A larger right-handed instruction is displayed than in the case of hit A or small hit B. Further, different effects may be executed depending on whether the small hit C is obtained during the normal state and the small hit C is performed during the time saving state, and the size of the right-handed instruction display may be different.

As described above, in this example, the special variable winning ball device is in the open state depending on whether the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The effect that is executed when controlled by is different. Specifically, in the case of a small hit A or a small hit B, the character 090IW105 indicating that the small hit game is in progress is displayed while the character 090IW105 is displayed (FIG. 9-9 (FIG. 9-9). K)), the character 090IW109 "Aim for V!" Is displayed to notify that the game ball is launched aiming at the V winning opening of the special variable winning ball device (FIG. 9-11 (F)). Therefore, when the display result that is a small hit is derived and displayed, the effect can be suitably executed.

Further, in this example, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided so that the game ball passing through a right-handed path through which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area can enter. Then, the launch promotion display regarding the promotion of the launch of the game ball to the right-handed path is performed, and the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed, and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The launch promotion display is designed to be displayed in a different manner from time to time. Specifically, unlike the small hits A and B, the small hit C tends to generate a large hit. Therefore, when the small hit A or B is used, the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 (FIG. 9-9 (K)). (See) is displayed, and when the small hit is C, the right-handed instruction display 090IW110 (see FIG. 9-11 (F)) is displayed. Therefore, the game can be suitably advanced.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (E), it is possible to execute an effect suggesting that the time is controlled as a notice effect of becoming a small hit. That is, the character 090IW102 of "time reduction?" Is displayed, which suggests that the development effect is executed and controlled to the time reduction state. Therefore, since the variation of the look-ahead notice effect increases, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example)
Next, a modified example of the effect executed in the feature unit 090IW will be described. Hereinafter, in the modified example, in FIG. 9-2, a special variable winning prize is obtained when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. By making the opening pattern of the ball device different, the ease of winning the game ball to the V winning opening is made different, and an example of controlling whether or not to control the time saving state is given, but in the modified example, a small hit is given. The special variable winning ball device is opened according to the same pattern when the display result of A or small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, but the special variable winning ball is opened. By making the time before opening of the device different, the ease of winning the game ball to the V winning opening is made different, and it is controlled whether or not the time is controlled to be shortened. The description of the parts common to FIG. 9-2 will be omitted.

FIG. 9-13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small hit game. The operation of the V winning opening opening / closing plate is common to the case of small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) and the case of small hit C (without time reduction).

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), after the small hit game is started at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) elapses, at timing S2. The special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state. By setting the pre-opening period t1 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is controlled to the closed state. Then, after opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds, after a closing time of 1 second, the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds is repeated, so that the special winning opening is opened 10 times with one small hit. Be released.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), in the case of the small hit C (no time reduction), after the small hit game is started at the timing S1, the pre-opening period t2 (fanfare time) shorter than the pre-opening period t1 is set. After that, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at the timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t2 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state. Then, according to the same pattern as in FIG. 9-13 (A), the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds is repeated after the closing time of 1 second after opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds. One small hit opens the special winning opening 10 times.

As described above, in this example, the special variable winning ball has the same pattern when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The device can be controlled to the open state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state, and it is possible to prevent in advance from being detected in advance which small hit display result will be derived and displayed.

Further, in this example, the V winning opening opening / closing plate that performs a common operation when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The special variable winning ball device is controlled to be open depending on whether the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The period until is different. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the time saving state is controlled.

(Other modified examples)
In this feature unit 090IW, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of small hits in which a game ball cannot be won in the V winning opening. Then, as multiple types of small hits, a small hit that shifts to a shorter time state when the special winning opening is won but the game ball does not win in the V winning opening, and a small hit that wins in the special winning opening but is played in the V winning opening. A small hit that does not shift to the time saving state when the ball does not win is provided. Then, a small hit that shifts to a shorter time state when the special winning opening is won but the game ball does not win in the V winning opening, and when the special winning opening is won but the game ball does not win in the V winning opening. It is possible to configure it to perform a different effect depending on the small hit that does not shift to the time saving state. In the effect, either one of the variable state and the small hit game state may be different, or both may be different.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modifications, the mode of transitioning to the time saving state (high base state) always goes through the big hit state and the small hit state, but the present invention illustrates the mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time saving state (high base state) may be entered without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. ..

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be used as a part of the out-of-time symbol or as a part of the small hit symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, a lottery may be executed using a dedicated random number for time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a missed symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed by using other random numbers such as a lottery random number, a small hit symbol lottery random number, a big hit lottery determination random number, and a fall lottery lottery random number.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols, which are out-of-order symbols.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time-saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be the winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, the winning value is the specific missing symbol random number when the missing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, and the jackpot symbol random number is specified when the big hit symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. The big hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state has already been set, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time reductions given may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the derivation lottery for the time-reduced end symbol (time-reduced end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-reduced times may be set to the number of times until the time-reduced end symbol is derived and displayed after the time-reduced start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called a specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving limiters is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In this example, it is possible to control the symbol to a time-saving state (so-called ceiling) when the number of times the symbol changes in the normal state reaches a predetermined number of times. Specifically, a counter is provided to count the number of fluctuations until the time is reduced, and the counter starts counting when the RAM is initialized (when the clear switch is operated, when the setting is changed, etc.) or when the jackpot is completed. do. Then, when the counted number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is controlled. In the counting method, the value set in the counter is subtracted for each fluctuation to determine whether or not the count value has reached 0, thereby determining whether or not the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number of times. Alternatively, the value of the counter may be added each time the fluctuation occurs, and it may be determined whether or not the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number of times. In addition, the predetermined number of times until the time reduction state is controlled may be determined by lottery. As a result, it is not possible to know the timing at which the time is controlled to be shortened, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The predetermined number of times n, which is the number of fluctuations of the symbol until it is controlled to the time saving state, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, P = 319 when the jackpot probability is 1/319). It is possible to set 2.5P ≦ n ≦ 3.0P. Further, the predetermined number of times N, which is the number of fluctuations of the symbol until it is controlled to the time saving state, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, P = 319 when the jackpot probability is 1/319). It is possible to set 0.4P ≦ N ≦ 3.8P. Note that these are examples, and P is not limited to these ranges.

Further, the RAM initialization (when the clear switch is operated, the setting is changed, etc.) and the setting of the predetermined number of times P at the time of a big hit may be inherited from the number of times before the initialization. In this case, it can be expected that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times P shortly after the start of the game and is controlled in a time-saving state, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine can be increased.
On the other hand, when the RAM is initialized (when the clear switch is operated, when the setting is changed, etc.) or when the predetermined number of times P is set at the time of a big hit, the number of times before the initialization may not be inherited. In this case, any player can be allowed to play the game under fair conditions.

Further, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times and the time reduction state is controlled, the time reduction state may be terminated when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit number, or the time reduction state may be continued until the next big hit. good.

When the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the counting of the number of fluctuations may be started again. In this configuration, for example, if an upper limit number of times in the time saving state is set and the upper limit number of times is made larger than the predetermined number of times until the time saving state is controlled, the count value reaches the predetermined number of times during the time saving state. Since the upper limit number of times is set again, it is possible to continue the time saving state until the next big hit while setting the upper limit number of times.

It is also possible not to count the number of fluctuations during the time saving state. In this case, when the upper limit number of times of the time saving state is set, the time saving state ends when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit number of times.

In addition, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the time saving state when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the first number, and when the lottery is not won, the time is shortened when the number of fluctuations reaches the second number. It may be controlled to the state (so-called pattern of reaching the ceiling via the temporary ceiling).

If the feature unit IW090 is provided with a ceiling and is configured to control the time reduction state when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, either small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) can be obtained. The value of the counter does not reset and continues counting. When the small hit is C (no time reduction), when the big hit does not occur, the value of the counter is not reset and the counting is continued. As a result, in the case of a small hit A or a small hit B (with a time reduction), the count value may reach a predetermined number of times during the time reduction after the end of the small hit game, and the time reduction state may be extended. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the development after the small hit game is completed. In addition, even if the small hit C (no time reduction) occurs and the big hit does not occur, it may be controlled to the time reduction state immediately after the small hit game ends, so expectation for the development after the small hit game ends. Can have.

As described above, the feature unit 090IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1) to (means 8).

(Means 1)
A gaming machine capable of controlling an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol).
A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state.
It has a special area (for example, V winning opening) and is controlled into a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Possible variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device),
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion in which step S76 is executed in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect.
When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, for game control. (Part of executing step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display result is a first special display result (for example, a display result of small hit A or small hit B) and a second special display result different from the first special display result (for example, small hit C). Display result), including
The state control means is
In the normal state, when the game medium does not pass through the special area when the first special display result (for example, the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B) is derived and displayed, the special state is entered. Controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of step 090IWS462 at Y at step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS468 at Y at step 090IWS467a).
In the normal state, when the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, the display result of small hit C) is derived and displayed, the special state is not controlled (for example). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, when the time is N in step 090IWS467 in the game control microcomputer 100, the processes of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 are not executed).
The ease of passing through the special area of the game medium differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, in FIG. 9-2). Shown part),
The effect executing means produces different effects when the variable means is in the first state depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed. It is feasible (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-7, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 090IWS887b, 887c, a portion shown in FIGS. 9-9 (K) and 9-11 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In this example, an example of shifting to a time-saving state after the end of the small hit game is given on the condition that the special winning opening is won but the V is not won, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the case of a small hit, the time may be shortened after the small hit game is completed on the condition that the game ball does not win in the special winning opening.

(Means 2) In means 1,
The ratio of the specific effect being executed in the effect during variable display differs between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. 9-). 3. As shown in FIG. 9-4, the development effect is performed at the time of the small hit A or the small hit B, and is not performed at the time of the small hit C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-reading notice effect and the effect after the advantageous state or the special state, so that the pre-reading notice effect can be suitably executed.

(Means 3) In means 1 or means 2.
The variable winning device is provided so that a game medium passing through a predetermined route (for example, a right-handed route) can enter.
Launch promotion display means for displaying launch promotion (for example, right-handed instruction display) relating to promotion of launch of a game medium to the predetermined route For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7, steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the effect control CPU 120 are executed. The part to do)
The launch promotion display means performs the launch promotion display in different modes depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. 9). As shown in −7, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 090IWS887b and 887c, a portion shown in FIGS. 9-9 (K) and 9-11 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the game can be suitably advanced.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device is opened so as not to win the V when the small hit A or the small hit B is shifted to the time saving state after the small hit game is completed on condition that the V prize is not won. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a small hit may be provided to shift to a shorter time state after the small hit game is completed on condition that the V prize is not won, and to open the special variable winning ball device so that the V prize can be easily won.

(Means 4) In any of means 1 to means 3,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state by different patterns depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example,). The part shown in FIG. 9-2).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 5) In any of means 1 to means 4,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state by the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state, and it is possible to prevent in advance from being detected which special display result is derived and displayed.

(Means 6) In any of means 1 to means 5,
The variable winning means is a movable member (for example, a V winning opening opening / closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. )
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of obstructing the passage of the game medium to the special area.
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of not obstructing the passage of the game medium to the special area (. For example, the part shown in FIG. 9-2).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 7) In any of means 1 to means 6,
The variable winning means is a movable member (for example, a V winning opening opening / closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. )
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. Part shown in 9-13).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 8) In any of means 1 to means 7,
A plurality of types of the special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area are provided.
The plurality of types of the special display result are the special display result controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and the special display result when the game medium does not pass through the special area. Including the special display result, which is not controlled by the state,
Controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area Controlled to the special state when the special display result is derived and displayed and when the game medium does not pass through the special area. When the special display result that is not displayed is derived and displayed, a different effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Explanation of feature 113IW)
Next, the feature portion 113IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 113IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state, a time saving state, or a probabilistic state (also controlled by the time saving state). In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, as compared with the normal state. There is a high probability that you will get a "hit" in a normal game. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10%, while in the short time state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90%, and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). It will be easier to do. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) can be used by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize.

Further, in this example, in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased as compared with the normal state and the time saving state. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a shorter time based on what has been done.

Further, in this example, even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after the big hit occurs, the next big hit Even if this does not occur, it may be controlled to a time saving state (relief time saving). This relief time reduction is provided to rescue a player who has played a game for a long period of time but has not generated a big hit (for example, to suppress investment in the game). , It is a game state called "play time".

Hereinafter, the time saving state controlled based on the occurrence of a big hit is "time saving state A" or "time saving state via a big hit", and the time saving state controlled based on the stop of the time saving symbol is "time saving state". "B" or "time saving state via time saving loss", in this example, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a big hit occurs, a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) The time saving state controlled when the next big hit does not occur even after the fluctuation display is finished may be referred to as "time saving state C" or "time saving state via relief time saving".

In the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). Control to lengthen and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of those (1) to (4) may be controlled, or (1) to It is not necessary to control a part of (4). For example, which of (1) to (4) may be controlled differs between the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be the same.

Further, for example, the probability of hitting a normal figure in a non-time saving state (normal state) is set to 100% (no deviation of the normal figure), or the probability of hitting a normal figure is substantially set to 100% by making the probability of losing the normal figure extremely low. In the time saving state, even if the control of (1) is not performed (that is, the probability of hitting a normal figure is not changed from the non-time saving state), a part or all of (2) to (4) is controlled. good.

It is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the relief time is controlled and the number of time reductions N in the relief time are specified as follows.

2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P
0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time reductions N is 120 to 1140. In this example, since the jackpot probability is different for each set value s, the number of fluctuations ns (set value s: 1 to 6) for each set value is as follows. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "1" is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5-957. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "2" is about 1/310, the number of fluctuations n2 is 775 to 930. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "3" is about 1/300, the number of fluctuations n3 is 750 to 900. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "4" is about 1/290, the number of fluctuations n4 is 725 to 870. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "5" is about 1/280, the number of fluctuations n5 is 700 to 840. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "6" is about 1/270, the number of fluctuations n6 is 675 to 810. Then, the following description will be given assuming that "800", which can be applied regardless of which set value is set, is set as the number of fluctuations n. Similarly, "800", which can be applied regardless of which set value is set, is set as the time reduction number N.

It should be noted that the number of fluctuations n is set to a value that can be applied regardless of which set value is set, but it corresponds to the case where the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability is set. Any value may be set as long as the value to be obtained (as described above, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5-957) is set. That is, a value such as "900" may be set as the number of fluctuations n.

Similarly, as the time reduction frequency N, a value that can be applied regardless of which set value is set is set, but it corresponds to the case where the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability is set. Any value that can be set may be used.

In this example, it is assumed that the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are the same value of 800, but the number of fluctuations n> the number of time reductions N may be satisfied, or conversely, the number of fluctuations n <the number of time reductions N may be satisfied. good.

(Variation pattern table)
10-1 and 10-2 are explanatory views showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 113IW. Of these, FIG. 10-1 (A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for big hits excluding the relief time-shortening rush fluctuation. Further, FIG. 10-1 (B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state. Further, FIG. 10-1 (C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 10-1 (D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for deviation in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation.

Further, FIG. 10-1 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving. Further, FIGS. 10-2 (F) and 10-2 (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for deviation within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 10-2 (F) is a variation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. Further, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 10-2 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more.

If the deviation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables F and G shown in FIGS. 10-2 (F) and 10-2 (G). In the period from the RAM clear to the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) even if the fluctuation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Is.

Further, FIG. 10-2 (H) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table H for deviation in the probable change state. However, in this example, even in the probability change state or the time saving state, when the number of reserved storages is not 1 or more (when there is no reserved storage), the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table B.

Further, FIGS. 10-2 (I) and 10-2 (J) show specific examples of the variation pattern tables I and J for the loss in the relief time shortening inrush variation. Of these, the variation pattern table I shown in FIG. 10-2 (I) is a variation pattern table selected in the non-time saving state (normal state). Further, the variation pattern table J shown in FIG. 10-2 (J) is a variation pattern table selected when the time is shortened.

If there is a deviation in the relief time reduction rush fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables I and J shown in FIGS. 10-2 (I) and 10-2 (J), but the RAM is cleared. In the period from the break to the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected by using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) even if the relief time shortening rush fluctuation is out of order.

Further, FIGS. 10-2 (K) and 10-2 (L) show specific examples of the fluctuation pattern tables K and L for the jackpot in the relief time shortening rush fluctuation. Of these, the variation pattern table K shown in FIG. 10-2 (K) is a variation pattern table selected in the non-time saving state (normal state). Further, the variation pattern table L shown in FIG. 10-2 (L) is a variation pattern table selected when the time is shortened.

In the case of a big hit in the relief time shortening rush fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables K and L shown in FIGS. 10-2 (K) and 10-2 (L), but the RAM is cleared. In the period from the break to the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected by using the fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 10-1 (A) even in the case of the big hit in the relief time shortening rush fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), in this example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PB2. It is determined to be one of -3 (super reach β). It should be noted that the variation pattern for the big hit secures a special figure variation time that is 10,000 ms longer than the variation pattern for the miss that performs the same reach effect. This is a blessing effect to congratulate the big hit after performing a reach effect of the same length as the out-of-order fluctuation, and a re-lottery effect to make it appear as if the lottery is being performed again (for example, 10R big hit A). This is because the big hit symbol shown is temporarily stopped, and a re-lottery effect is performed to change to the big hit symbol indicating the 10R big hit B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the normal state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , The variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (D), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is used as the variation pattern. It is determined to be one of a variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), a variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), a variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and a variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is used as the fluctuation pattern. , The variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (C), 10-1 (D), and 10-1 (E), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and fluctuations occur in the time-shortened state. The rate at which the pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Further, even in the same time saving state, in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is 80 as compared with the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. It is as high as%, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is as high as 99%. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (F), in this example, if the deviation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. For example, the fluctuation pattern can be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β). The probability of being determined and determined by the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is as high as 90%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (G), in this example, if the deviation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern can be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β). The probability of being determined and determined by the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) is as high as 90%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (H), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the probable change state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). ), The variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (C) and 10-1 (E), when determining the fluctuation pattern of the deviation variation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is shorter than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state. The selection rate of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation time is high. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the relief time is shortened after playing a game for a long period of time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (C) and 10-1 (E), when determining the fluctuation pattern of the deviation variation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more reach than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state. The selection rate of fluctuation patterns with effects is low. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the relief time is shortened after playing a game for a long period of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (H), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is determined with a high probability of 90% in the probabilistic state, and the fluctuation time averaged more than in the time-shortened state. Is getting shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (I), in this example, when the relief time saving inrush fluctuation causes a deviation in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (time saving inrush loss) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Will be done. When the variation pattern PA3-1 is determined, the time saving rush effect for notifying the transition to the time saving state (rushing) via the relief time saving is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (J), in this example, when the relief time saving inrush fluctuation causes a deviation in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (time saving promotion loss) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. To. When the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 is determined, the time reduction promotion effect for notifying the transition to the time reduction state (promotion) via the relief time reduction is performed. Hereinafter, the transition from the time saving state via the time saving loss to the time saving state via the relief time saving may be referred to as "promotion".

It should be noted that the time-saving rushing effect and the time-saving promotion effect are both effects performed when the time-reduced state C is controlled, but the contents of the effect are different. Specifically, in the time saving rush effect, a character string indicating that the time saving state C is controlled is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10-12 (G)), while in the time saving promotion effect, the time saving state C is displayed. A character string indicating control and promotion is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10-15 (D)). Further, in the time saving rush effect, the right-handed notification image for promoting right-handedness is displayed (see FIG. 10-12 (H)), while in the time-saving promotion effect, the right-handed notification image is not displayed. (See FIG. 10-15 (D)). In this way, the notification mode of controlling to the time saving state C is different between the case of being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C and the case of being controlled (promoted) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. ing. As a result, the player can be given a special feeling when the time saving state is promoted, and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the notification mode of controlling to the time saving state C is common between the case of being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C and the case of being controlled (promoted) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. May be good. For example, in any case, the variation pattern PA3-1 may be selected and the time saving rush effect may be performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of fluctuation patterns and the number of effect data, and save the storage capacity.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (K), in this example, when a big hit occurs due to the relief time saving rush fluctuation in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (time saving rushing rush big hit). It is determined. When the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 is determined, a time-saving rush effect is performed to notify the transition to the time-saving state (rushing) via the relief time-saving, and then a big hit is notified and a blessing effect is produced. And re-lottery production will be performed. It should be noted that the effect performed after the time-saving rush effect may be an effect that can be executed even when another variation pattern is selected, but an effect that is not executed when another variation pattern is selected. However, this can make the player feel unexpected and special.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (L), in this example, in the case of a big hit due to the relief time saving rush fluctuation in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 (time saving promotion pretending big hit). It is determined. When the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 is determined, after the time reduction promotion effect is performed to notify the transition to the time reduction state (promotion) via the relief time reduction, it is notified that it is a big hit and a blessing effect is performed. And re-lottery production will be performed. The effect performed after the reduced working hours promotion effect may be an effect that can be executed even when another variation pattern is selected, but is not executed when another variation pattern is selected. This may make the player feel unexpected or special.

In addition, although it was decided that the length of the fluctuation time differs depending on whether the relief time reduction rush fluctuation causes a deviation or the relief time reduction rush fluctuation results in a big hit, the fluctuation pattern having the same length of fluctuation time or common. A variation pattern may be selected. As a result, the storage capacity can be saved.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2 is an example, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the extremely shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high during the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the fluctuation display is displayed. Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of feasible advance notice effects and look-ahead advance notice effects. For example, when the time is shortened via the relief time saving, the effect image is displayed at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect of turning on the lamp or the LED, the effect of turning on the lamp or the LED, the predetermined effect sound, or the normal effect. An effect that outputs different fluctuating stop sounds is executed.

Further, in this example, the case where the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is provided, but the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is not provided, for example, via a big hit. The variation pattern table C (see FIG. 10-1 (C)) in the time saving state may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 10-2 (F) and (G)) are switched to. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or the number of divisions such as the remaining number of fluctuations of 100 or 200 may be switched. Only in the case of, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested.

(Test terminal processing)
10-3 and 10-4 are flowcharts showing processing examples related to the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. The test terminal process is executed in the game control timer interrupt process.

In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 first clears the bits of each signal in the test signal output buffer among the output port buffers (step 113IWS31). Then, when the jackpot symbol is being determined (Y in step 113IWS32), when the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period is in progress (Y in step 113IWS33), or when any of the time reduction flags is set (Y). Y) of step 113IWS34, the bit of the emission position designation signal 3 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113IWS35). The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is A, a first time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is B, and a time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is C. Is done.

If neither the jackpot symbol determination period nor the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period is set (N in step 113IWS34), the bit of the emission position designation signal 1 in the test signal output buffer is set. Is set (step 113IWS36).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal state, the firing position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period is started (Y in step 113IWS32), while the time-saving out-of-time symbol is stopped in the normal state. When it is displayed, since the time saving flag B is set when the symbol stop period of the time saving out-of-time symbol ends, the firing position designation signal 3 is output at the end of the symbol stop period (step 113IWS34). Y). That is, it is configured so that the switching timing of the launch position designation signal differs depending on the trigger for shifting to the time saving state.

Further, here, by switching the outputs of the launch position designation signals 1 and 3, it is possible to notify the external device (test device) of information indicating which method the player is expected to hit in the gaming state. However, by setting / reset control of a single launch position designation signal, information indicating which game state the player is expected to hit is notified to the external device (test device). It may be a possible configuration. For example, in the case of N in step 113IWS34, the firing position is specified instead of the processing of step 113IWS36 by configuring the configuration to shift to step 113IWS37 without performing the processing of step 113IWS36, or by not performing the processing of step 113IWS31 and specifying the firing position instead of the processing of step 113IWS36. By performing the process of clearing the bit of the signal 3, information indicating which way the player is expected to hit is displayed depending on whether or not the bit of the launch position designation signal 3 is set. It may be configured so that it can be notified to an external device (test device).

Further, when the jackpot symbol determination period in the first special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS37A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the signal per special symbol (step 113IWS37B) and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit2 (step 113IWS37B). Step 113 IWS37C).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 time reduction signal (step 113IWS37E) and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit1 when the time reduction deviation symbol determination period in the first special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS37D). (Step 113IWS37F). The processing of steps 113IWS37E and S37F can be output even if the relief time reduction counter becomes 0. As will be described later, when the time saving miss symbol is stopped and displayed in the relief time saving rush fluctuation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is preferentially controlled over the time saving state via the time saving time loss, but even in that case, the time saving state is controlled. A signal indicating that the out-of-order symbol has been stopped and displayed is appropriately output to the outside.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit0 (step 113IWS37H) when the symbol determination period without time reduction in the first special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS37G).

Further, when the jackpot symbol determination period in the second special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS38A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the signal per special symbol 2 (step 113IWS38B) and sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit2 (step 113IWS38B). Step 113 IWS38C).

Further, when the second special symbol is in the time saving loss symbol determination period (Y in step 113IWS38D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 time reduction loss signal (step 113IWS38E), and sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit1. (Step 113IWS38F). The processing of steps 113IWS38E and S38F can be output even if the relief time reduction counter becomes 0. As will be described later, when the time saving miss symbol is stopped and displayed in the relief time saving rush fluctuation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is preferentially controlled over the time saving state via the time saving time loss, but even in that case, the time saving state is controlled. A signal indicating that the out-of-order symbol has been stopped and displayed is appropriately output to the outside.

Further, when the second special symbol is in the period for determining the symbol without time reduction (Y in step 113IWS38G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit0 (step 113IWS38H).

Further, when the relief time reduction number is reached based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 relief count arrival signal (step 113IWS39B). Further, when the relief time reduction number is reached based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 relief count arrival signal (step 113IWS39D). Specifically, when the time saving flag C is set, the flag is set according to which of the "first" and "second" data is set in the special symbol pointer, and any special is set based on the flag. It is possible to identify whether the number of relief times has been shortened based on the fluctuation of the symbol. In this example, when the number of relief times shortened is reached based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the signal for reaching the number of relief times of the special symbol 1 is instantaneously output, but the relief is based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol. During the period controlled by the time saving state via the time saving, the special symbol 1 relief count arrival signal may be continuously output. Similarly, in this example, when the number of relief times shortened is reached based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the special symbol 1 relief count arrival signal is instantaneously output, but based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol. During the period controlled by the time saving state via the relief time saving, the special symbol 2 relief number arrival signal may be continuously output.

Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the probabilistic state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40B). Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the probabilistic state based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40D). Specifically, when the probability variation flag is set, the flag is set according to which of the "first" and "second" data is set in the special symbol pointer, and any special symbol is set based on the flag. It is possible to specify whether or not the probabilistic state is controlled based on the fluctuation of.

Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the time saving state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal (step 113IWS41B). Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the time saving state based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal (step 113IWS41D). Specifically, when the time saving flag is set, the flag is set according to which of the "first" and "second" data is set in the special symbol pointer, and any special symbol is set based on the flag. It is possible to specify whether or not the probabilistic state is controlled based on the fluctuation of.

Further, when the time saving flag A is set (Y in step 113IWS42A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 1 (step 113IWS42B). Further, when the time saving flag B is set (Y in step 113IWS42C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 2 (step 113IWS42D). Further, when the time saving flag C is set (Y in step 113IWS42E), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 3 (step 113IWS42F). As will be described later, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, each time saving flag is reset at the stop timing of the big hit fluctuation, and the time saving flag A can be set at the end of the big hit. When the 10R jackpot A occurs, the winning easy state designation signal 1 is temporarily turned off during the period from the stop timing of the jackpot fluctuation to the jackpot end timing.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits each signal as a test signal to the test signal terminal by outputting the contents of the test signal output buffer to the output port (step 113IWS43). By outputting the test signal in this way, the internal state of the gaming machine can be specified on the test device side.

(Customer waiting demo production control process)
FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo effect control process. The customer waiting demo effect control process is a process performed after step S161 in the effect control process process and before steps S170 to S177. That is, the customer waiting demo effect control process is a process performed every time the effect control process process is performed. In the customer waiting demo effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop display execution lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the telop display effect when 10 seconds have elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. (Y, S251 of step 113IWS250). Specifically, the presence or absence of execution of the telop display effect is determined using the telop display execution lottery table according to the set value.

10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B) are explanatory views showing a telop display execution lottery table. The telop display execution lottery table is assigned a judgment value corresponding to whether or not the telop display effect is executed for each remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B). , The percentage of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of brevity. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for telop display execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 10-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value “1” is set. FIG. 10-6 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value “6” is set. The illustration of the telop display execution lottery table used when the set values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display execution lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) is used, if the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more, the telop display effect is executed 30%. It is decided at the rate of 70% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 40% that the telop display effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 60% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 50% that the telop display effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 50% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 55% that the telop display effect is executed, and at a rate of 45% that the telop display effect is not executed.

When the telop display execution lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 10-6 (B) is used, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more, the telop display effect is executed 60%. It is decided at the rate of 40% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the telop display effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 30% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the telop display effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 20% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 85% that the telop display effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 15% that the telop display effect is not executed.

As described above, the execution rate of the telop display effect is higher when the number of remaining times until the relief time is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the relief time is 11 or more. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by expecting the arrival of the variation number of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages of the player due to the end of the game immediately before the arrival of the variation number of the relief time reduction. can.

Further, as described above, the telop display effect is configured to be executed at a higher rate when the set value "6" is set than when the set value "1" is set. As a result, the player can predict the set value according to the execution frequency of the telop display effect.

In addition, the smaller the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, the higher the telop display effect is executed. As a result, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, depending on the execution frequency of the telop display effect.

The remaining number of times until the relief time reduction can be specified by the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. In other words, before the command to specify the number of relief time reduction 2 indicating that the relief time reduction is 200 times is received, a lottery is performed assuming that the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 201 or more, and the relief time reduction is 200 times. Relief time reduction number 2 indicating that there is Relief time reduction number 2 After the designated command is received and before the relief time reduction number 2 designated command indicating that the relief time reduction is 100 times is received, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is received. Is 101 or more and 200 or less, and a lottery is performed. I do.

When it is decided to execute the telop display effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop display mode determination lottery process for determining the effect mode of the telop display effect (step 113IWS253). Specifically, the telop display mode determination lottery table according to the set value is used to determine the effect mode of the telop display effect.

10-6 (C) and 10-6 (D) are explanatory views showing a telop display mode determination lottery table. The lottery table for determining the telop display mode is assigned a determination value corresponding to the telop display effect effect mode (color of the frame of the telop display area, blue, red) for each remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. In the examples shown in -6 (C) and -6 (D), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of simplification of the explanation. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for telop display mode determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 10-6 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set value “1” is set. FIG. 10-6 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set value “6” is set. The illustration of the telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 10-6 (C) is used, the color of the frame of the telop display area is red when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more. It is determined at a rate of 40% to display with, and it is determined at a rate of 60% to display the color of the frame of the telop display area in blue. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is decided at a rate of 70% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 30%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 20%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 85% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined at a rate of%.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 10-6 (D) is used, the color of the frame of the telop display area is red when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more. It is determined at a rate of 70% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue at a rate of 30%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is decided at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 20%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 90% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 10%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 95% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined at a rate of%.

In this way, the ratio of displaying the frame color of the telop display area in red is higher when the number of remaining times until the relief time is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the relief time is 11 or more. It is configured to be. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by expecting the number of fluctuations in the relief time to be reached.

In addition, in this way, the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red at a higher rate when the setting value "6" is set than when the setting value "1" is set. It is configured. As a result, the player can predict the set value depending on the production mode of the telop display effect.

Further, as described above, the smaller the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, the higher the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red. Thereby, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened depending on the production mode of the telop display effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 starts the telop display effect of displaying the telop display area of the determined mode (step 113IWS254).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the demo movie when 3 minutes have elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command (Y, S256 in step 113IWS255).

Regarding the telop display and demo movie display displayed here, the display ends based on the fact that the game ball passes through the start opening, the next fluctuation is started, or the player's operation is detected. It is something to do.

FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step 113IWS1011), and if not, has not received the pre-reading notice as it is. End the setting process.

The start winning command is a disorder for the game control microcomputer 100 to determine a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern when there is a start winning to the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. It is a command that extracts a numerical value and indicates a winning judgment result in which a display result or a fluctuation pattern is pre-read and judged based on the extracted random number value. The start winning command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when there is a start winning to the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. Examples of the start winning command include a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start winning designation command, and a total hold storage number designation command.

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of the big hit. The variation category command is an effect control command that indicates a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value at the time of winning. The start winning prize designation command is an effect control command indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has a starting winning. The total hold storage number designation command is an effect control command for designating a total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

In the present embodiment, based on the variation category command, the variation is accompanied by a super reach, the variation is accompanied by a normal reach, the variation is accompanied by a pseudo-ream, or the variation is accompanied by a pseudo-ream. It is possible to specify how many times the fluctuation is accompanied by a pseudo-ream or is uncertain. The undetermined case is a case where the variation pattern corresponding to the random number for determining the variation pattern acquired at the time of the start winning is different depending on the number of reserved storages at the start of the variation corresponding to the start winning.

The start winning command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is temporarily stored in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Specifically, in the command analysis process (step S75), the effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order in which they are received in the first vacant storage area of the start winning command storage area. Then, each command stored in the start winning command storage area is stored in the first storage area 1 each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (every time the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is received). It is deleted from the ones that have been set, and the contents of the command storage area at the time of starting prize are shifted.

When a new start winning command is received in step 113IWS1011, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying a new hold display (step 113IWS1012). Then, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead flag indicating that the look-ahead notice effect is being executed is set (step 113IWS1013), and if it is set, the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated as it is. If it is not set, it is determined whether or not it is controlled in the time saving state (step 113IWS1014), and if it is controlled in the time saving state, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1016.

When the time reduction state is not controlled, the number of reserved storages is compared with the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction (step 113IWS1015), and if the number of reserved storages is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, the value is as it is. The reading notice setting process ends. When the number of reserved storages is a value equal to or less than the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less (step 113IWS1016). If the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated as it is. If the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is not 10 times or less, a look-ahead effect execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect. Specifically, the pre-reading notice effect execution lottery table is used to determine whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed.

In the pre-reading notice effect execution lottery table, whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect (first mode, second mode) for each winning judgment result (big hit, time reduction loss, time reduction no loss) ) Is assigned a judgment value.

The look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect is an effect of counting down the number of fluctuations until the change of the advance notice target of the look-ahead notice effect starts in red, and the look-ahead notice effect of the second aspect is a notice of the look-ahead notice effect. It is an effect that counts down the number of fluctuations until the start of the fluctuation of the target in blue.

For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit, it is decided to perform the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect at a rate of 70%, and to not perform the look-ahead notice effect at a rate of 30%. If the winning determination result is out of time, it is decided to perform the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect at a rate of 40%, and it is determined not to perform the pre-reading notice effect at a rate of 60%. If the judgment result at the time of winning is that there is no reduction in working hours, it is decided to perform the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect at a rate of 4%, and to perform the look-ahead notice effect of the second aspect at a rate of 6%. It is decided not to perform the look-ahead notice production at a rate of 90%.

As described above, since the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect can be executed in the case of a big hit and the case of no time reduction, it is a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the big hit is controlled. Further, since the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect can be executed depending on the case where the time reduction is off and the case where there is no time reduction, it is a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the time reduction is controlled.

When it is determined to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the look-ahead display area and the countdown display on the image display unit 5 (step 113IWS1019), and sets the look-ahead flag (step 113IWS1020).

In this way, by performing the process of step 113IWS1015, when the reserved storage number is a value larger than the remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction, that is, in the reserved storage stored before reaching the variation of the relief time reduction. Therefore, it is configured to limit (prohibit) the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation performed after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving. As a result, it is possible to limit the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect before and after the control of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect in the effect.

Further, by performing the process of step 113IWS1016, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted (prohibited). As a result, the countdown effect corresponding to the control of the relief time reduction and the look-ahead advance notice effect are not executed in duplicate.

For example, in a gaming machine that can execute a countdown display for reaching the number of fluctuations in the relief time and a countdown display as a look-ahead notice effect, as a countdown display and a look-ahead notice effect for reaching the number of changes in the relief time. If it is possible to execute the countdown display in duplicate, it is expected that the production will be complicated. In particular, when both the effect showing the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and the look-ahead notice effect are effects accompanied by a countdown display, it becomes difficult to understand which countdown display should be focused on, so that the effect is reduced. It is possible that it will end up. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced by configuring the effect indicating the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened and the pre-reading advance notice effect so as not to be executed in duplicate.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 113IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 113IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 113IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 113IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 113IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 113IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 113IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot A", the effect control CPU 120 has three symbols as stop symbols, which are even-numbered symbols. (10R jackpot A symbol) is determined. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot B", the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same as odd symbols as stop symbols (10R jackpot B symbol). To decide.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols with two left and right symbols is determined. Further, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of decorative symbols of the out of place symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols of the out-of-order symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) may be determined according to the time saving type.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) that reminds us of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a notice effect setting process for setting a notice effect indicating the reliability of controlling the jackpot game state (step 113IWS802A). Specifically, in the advance notice effect setting process, when it is decided whether or not to execute the advance notice effect using the advance notice effect execution lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, and when it is decided to execute the advance notice effect. In, the effect mode of the advance notice effect to be executed is determined by using the advance notice effect mode determination lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, and the execution of the advance notice effect of the determined effect mode is set. Although not shown, the process table including the advance notice set here is selected in steps 113IWS804, S806, and S807, which will be described later.

The advance notice effect execution lottery table is assigned a determination value corresponding to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed for each variable display result (big hit, miss). The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the advance notice effect execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the lottery table for executing the advance notice effect (number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened> 10) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is decided at a rate of 70% to execute the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect is executed. It is decided not to do it at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, it is determined at a rate of 10% that the advance notice effect is executed, and at a rate of 90% that the advance notice effect is not executed.

When the lottery table for executing the advance notice effect (remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened ≤ 10) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is decided at a rate of 70% to execute the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect is executed. It is decided not to do it at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, it is determined at a rate of 1% that the advance notice effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 99% that the advance notice effect is not executed.

In this way, the jackpot fluctuation is configured to be easier to execute the advance notice effect than the case where the jackpot fluctuation is an out-of-order fluctuation.

Further, in this way, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is 10 or less, the warning effect is given when the variable display result is out of order than when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is greater than 10. The configuration is such that the execution rate is low. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less.

The lottery table for determining the mode of advance notice is assigned a determination value corresponding to the mode of effect of the notice effect (color of the character to be displayed, blue, red) for each variable display result (big hit, miss). The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the advance notice effect mode determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the advance notice effect mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, red is determined at a rate of 70% as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect, and the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect. Blue is determined at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, red is determined at a rate of 10% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect, and blue is determined at a rate of 90% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect.

When the advance notice effect mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, red is determined at a rate of 70% as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect, and the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect. Blue is determined at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, red is determined at a rate of 1% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect, and blue is determined at a rate of 99% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect.

In this way, red is more likely to be selected as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect than in the case where the jackpot fluctuation is an out-of-order fluctuation.

Further, in this way, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is 10 or less, the color of the character is different when the variable display result is out of order than when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is greater than 10. Red is easy to select as. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less.

Next, if the pre-reading flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 updates the countdown display in the pre-reading advance notice effect (step 113IWS802B, S802C). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times (step 113IWS803). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 is determined by, for example, a command for specifying the relief time reduction number 2. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it has been received.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the effect control CPU 120 has the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. A process table including a fanning effect according to the number of fluctuations is selected (step 113IWS804). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction count 2 designated command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is "100". Select the process table that contains the appropriate fanning effect. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designated command is "07 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 700), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800 times". Select a process table that includes a fanning effect according to. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the effect control CPU 120 is used until the relief time is shortened. It is confirmed whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less (step 113IWS805). To check whether the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designated command is 10 or less. It can be determined by doing.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown effect and an effect effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. (Step 113IWS806). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designated command is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times), the count number until the relief time reduction is reached " Select a process table that includes a countdown effect according to "10". Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designated command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1), the count until the relief time reduction is reached. Select a process table that includes a countdown effect according to the number "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

In this example, a case where the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designated command and the relief time reduction number 2 designated command, and the fanning effect or the countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when configuring to send a background specification command that specifies a background image, it is configured to set the EXT data of the background specification command to a value according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and send it. You may. Then, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command and execute the fanning effect or the countdown effect.

Further, in this example, even if the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, if the jackpot fluctuation occurs, the same fluctuation pattern for the jackpot as usual is used, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, it may be configured to execute the variation display using a variation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short variation time.

Further, in this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the effect effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 5 is performed. For example, the smaller the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, the wider the display range of the effect image on the image display device 5 is to perform the effect effect.

Further, the processing of steps 113IWS803 to S806 can be performed regardless of the gaming state. As a result, even when the time is controlled to the time saving state B, it is possible to execute the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect according to the remaining number of times, as in the case of being controlled to the normal state. However, it is possible to improve the interest by giving Hokuseki to shorten the relief time.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 10 or less (N in step 113IWS805), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 113IWS807). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS808).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative pattern in the variable mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 113IWS809). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 113IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 113IWS810).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 113IWS811).

(Variable display effect processing)
10-9 and 10-10 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect process (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 113IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 113IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 113IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 113IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 113IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received (step 113IWS846). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode transition effect (an effect of notifying the transition to the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and right-handed. Select the process table according to the notification (step 113IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS848). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 113IWS849). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 113IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time reduction is lost and the relief time is shortened during the normal state. However, in step 113IWS847, when the time reduction is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time reduction deviation and the right-handed notification is selected, and when the relief time is shortened, the relief time is reduced. Select the process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. Whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as the relief time reduction is determined by, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command being "00 ( It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is "H)".

If neither the first symbol confirmation A designation command nor the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command. (Step 113IWS856). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 113IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 113IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received (Y in step 113IWS856), or when the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step 113IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 is normally used. Select the process table according to the symbol confirmation display of (step 113IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS859). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 113IWS860). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 113IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, even when the fluctuation time timer times out (see step 113IWS857), the process proceeds to the process after step 113IWS858 and the symbol confirmation period is entered. However, normally, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not missed, it is determined as Y in step 113IWS857 and the process does not proceed to the process after step 113IWS858.

In step 113IWS861A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a target variation of the look-ahead advance notice effect (step 113IWS861A). For example, the value of the number of reserved memories when the look-ahead notice effect is started is set as the number of executions K of the look-ahead notice effect, the number of executions K is subtracted by 1 at the start of the change, and the change in which the subtraction result becomes 0 is the look-ahead notice. It can be determined that the target fluctuation of the production. If the target change of the look-ahead notice effect, the look-ahead flag is reset (step 113IWS861B), and the process proceeds to step 113IWS862. In this way, the look-ahead flag is set when the look-ahead notice effect is started, the look-ahead flag is reset when the fluctuation of the notice target fluctuation of the look-ahead notice effect is stopped, and the hold memory generated during the set of the look-ahead flag is targeted. By configuring the structure so that the pre-reading notice effect is not performed, a plurality of pre-reading notice effects are not executed in duplicate. It should be noted that a plurality of pre-reading notice effects may be duplicated and executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 113IWS862).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode up to the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving, will be described. 10-11 to 10-15 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the time saving state is entered. In FIGS. 10-11 to 10-15, the effect screens change in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

10-11 to 10-14 show specific examples of the effect mode when the normal state is controlled to the time saving state C. FIG. 10-15 shows a specific example of the effect mode when the time saving state B is controlled to the time saving state C.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbol is stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, it is assumed that the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 are stopped and the detached symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "134") is derived and displayed when the remaining 700 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. At this time, the remaining rotation speed display 113IW102 stating "Relief time reduction starts in 700 rotations!" Is displayed in the upper left. At this time, the explanation of the effect in the short relief time is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 113IW103.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), for example, when the remaining 600 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 stop and come off (in this example, "423"). It is assumed that the combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 10-11 (A), the remaining rotation speed display 113IW102 stating "Relief time reduction starts with 600 rotations left!" Is displayed in the upper left. At this time, the explanation of the effect in the short relief time is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 113IW103.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) and 10-11 (B), a case is shown in which a fanning effect suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 400 to 700 times, the fanning effect is not executed, and when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (hence, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times), the fanning effect is performed. It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2 is received, a lottery process based on a random number is performed and it is decided to execute the fanning effect. It may be configured to perform the fanning effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) and 10-11 (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure the structure so that the execution rate of the fanning effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (C) to 10-12 (E), the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped, and only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed after 10 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction. Is displayed, and the countdown display 113IW104 according to the remaining rotation speed is displayed in the center of the screen. For example, in the countdown display 113IW104, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed every time the symbol variation display ends and the symbol stops. It should be noted that each figure shows an example in which out-of-order symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols of "653", "844", "278", and "216") are derived and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (C) to 10-12 (E), after 10 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the effect image of the display range corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is displayed. In addition to the effect effect being displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (F) to 10-12 (H), when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0, the time reduction rush effect is performed. The symbol is stopped and the out-of-order symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "254") is stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol may not be displayed, and the out-of-order symbol may be displayed only in the small symbol. It should be noted that FIGS. 10-12 (G) and 10-12 (H) show a state in which the out-of-order symbol as a small symbol is temporarily stopped, and the special symbol continues to fluctuate. 10-13 (I) to 10-14 (M) show a state in which the out-of-order symbol as a small symbol is definitely displayed, and the fluctuation of the special symbol is also stopped.

Further, in FIG. 10-12 (G), the control to the time saving state C is notified by displaying the character string indicating that the time saving state is controlled 800 times on the image display device 5. Then, in FIG. 10-12 (H), a right-handed promotion image for promoting right-handedness is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the case of controlling from the normal state to the time saving state C is shown here, the right-handed promotion image is displayed, but when controlling from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C, right-handing is already performed. Since this is done, the display of the right-handed notification image is restricted when the symbol is stopped (see FIG. 10-15 (D)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (I), when the symbol determination period is entered, the mode effect start display 113IW105 saying "super heat!" Is displayed, and the mode transition effect is started. After that, in the mode transition effect, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, the operation suggestion image 113IW106 suggesting that the push button 31B is operated (pressed) is displayed. For example, in the operation suggestion image 113IW106, the character "press" is displayed together with the image prompting the push button 31B to be pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses from the display of the operation suggestion image 113IW106, "V" is displayed. The character display 113IW107 "STOCK x 1" is displayed, and it is notified that the relief time reduction is started. Further, the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed next to the small symbol 113IW101.

In this example, even if a big hit occurs, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" as in FIG. 10-13 (K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead determination process for whether or not a big hit is achieved and a variation pattern type in the start winning determination process (step S101), and makes a look-ahead determination. Sends a look-ahead judgment result specification command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (so-called hold continuous effect) in the same manner as in FIG. 10-13 (K) based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command. For example, if it is specified that there is one big hit in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to produce the hold continuous effect. To execute. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to hold the hold. Perform a series of productions.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, there is a high ratio that the fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see FIG. 10-1 (E)). ), Therefore, the variable display is digested extremely quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the symbol confirmation period) in which the relief time is shortened, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 10-13 (K) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 10-13 (K) has the same aspect as the pseudo hold continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production to notify.

If the fluctuation that reaches the relief time is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is secured, and an effect is executed so that the relief time is shortened once, and then an effect of notifying the jackpot is executed. You may.

The case where the display of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 113IW107 of "V STOCK x 1" is shown, but the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. No. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 10-12 (H), and various aspects can be considered.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (L), the mode selection screen 113IW109 for selecting the effect mode for shortening the relief time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. When the predetermined time elapses without selecting the effect mode, the effect mode in which the cursor matches is automatically confirmed. Further, even when the mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 113IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, the start notification screen 113IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the characters "Relief time reduction rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, the state shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the remaining rotation speed until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time is explained, and the countdown is displayed, but it may be performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol or during the fluctuation.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which a symbol confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds and a mode transition effect or a right-handed notification is executed in a variable display in which the relief time is shortened, but the symbol confirmation period is normally 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect.

Further, in this example, the case where the relief time reduction counter is initially set to "800" at the time of executing the RAM clear processing or at the time of a big hit is shown. When it is configured to execute a story (such as), it may also be configured to clear the selection buffer and story counter of the story. Further, it may be configured so that a story can be set when the relief time is activated, or a different story can be set according to the game state.

As described above, FIGS. 10-11 to 10-14 show a case where the normal state is controlled to the time saving state C, but FIG. 10-15 shows the case where the time saving state B is controlled to the time saving state C. A specific example of the production mode will be shown. For example, FIGS. 10-15 (A) and 10-15 (B) showing an example of displaying the timing of the remaining 10 rotations and the remaining 1 rotation until the transition to the relief time reduction in the time reduction state B are the remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction in the normal state. In addition to the displays of FIGS. 10-11 (C) and 10-12 (E) showing examples of timings of 10 rotations and 1 rotation remaining, a right-handed notification effect (right-pointing arrow) due to the time saving state. Image display) is being performed. This right-handed notification effect is continuously performed while the time is controlled to be shortened. It is assumed that the value of the time saving state counter in FIG. 10-15 (A) is 60, and the value of the time saving state counter in FIG. 10-15 (B) is 51.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (C) and 10-15 (D), the time reduction promotion effect is performed when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (D), a character string indicating promotion is displayed. At this time, unlike FIG. 10-12 (H), since the time reduction state has already been controlled, the right-handed notification image is not displayed again.

It should be noted that the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed only when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced to 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player is expected to enter the relief time reduction by performing the countdown effect and the effect effect (by performing the so-called ghost effect) from a timing other than the case where the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times. It may be done. In that case, for example, the fluctuation in which the value of the time reduction counter is 50 is terminated, the next fluctuation is started, the countdown display and the effect display are started, and the countdown display and the effect display are performed over a plurality of fluctuations. The countdown display and the effect display may be ended at a predetermined timing (in the illustrated example, the third variation after the start of the countdown display and the effect display). The effect is not limited to the one performed at the timing when the value of the time reduction counter is 50, and the effect may be performed when the value of the time reduction counter is 100 or 200.

Further, the execution rate of the Gase effect may be different depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. For example, the occurrence rate may be higher as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shorter. As a result, the player can realize that the relief time is approaching, and the interest can be improved. Further, it may be assumed that this Gase effect is not performed when a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern accompanied by SP reach) is selected.

As described above, the feature unit 113IW includes the inventions shown below.

Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of fluctuations of a symbol is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit. Some are controlled to a probabilistic state based on (that is, based on a special number of fluctuations (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit). Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the execution frequency of the symbol change is high) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in the effect control in the gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number. Therefore, the following (means 113-1) to (means 113-7) gaming machines are described in the feature unit 113IW.

(Means 113-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
Based on the fact that the starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied, and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the variable) is satisfied. A variable display executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute the variable display.
A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer, a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met.
Decidable means that can be determined to control in an advantageous state,
Before the determination by the determination means, a determination means capable of determining that the control is in an advantageous state (for example, a portion for executing step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
A specific suggestion effect suggesting that the control is controlled to an advantageous state based on the determination result by the determination means (for example, the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect. The specific example of the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to the countdown display, but is a special decorative pattern. It may be an effect of stopping and displaying (chance eye), a hold change effect of changing the color or shape of the hold display, a zone effect of performing a special background display, etc.). (For example, the part that executes step 113IWS1019 in the effect control CPU 120) and
A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the normal state,
It is equipped with an update means that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. By doing so, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied.
A special suggestion effect execution means (for example, steps 113IWS804, S806, S254 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special suggestion effect (for example, a fanning effect, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display effect) related to the establishment of a special condition. With more parts to execute)
The means of executing the specific suggestion effect is
Of the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to limit the execution of the specific suggestion effect for which the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is the target of advance notice (for example). , When the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 113IWS1015, the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect of the first aspect straddling before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time is prohibited by not executing 113IWS1019).
A predetermined period from a predetermined value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) that the numerical information updated by the updating means is less than the special number of times to reach a specific value. (For example, in the case of Y in step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120, by not executing step 113IWS1019, the pre-reading notice of the first aspect in the variation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction is restricted. A gaming machine characterized by (prohibiting the execution of production).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and to suppress the deterioration of the interest while avoiding the occurrence of defects in the production.

In this example, when the time reduction is already controlled, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect straddling before and after the start of the control to the relief time reduction is not prohibited (when the time is Y in step 113IWS1014, step 113IWS1015 is not performed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the time saving state is controlled, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect straddling before and after the start of the control to the relief time saving may be prohibited.

Further, in this example, the special suggestion effect is executed in a predetermined period from the predetermined value corresponding to the predetermined number of times the numerical information updated by the updating means reaches the specific value, and the specific suggestion is performed in the predetermined period. We decided to limit the execution of the production. Specifically, it was decided to start the execution of the countdown effect from the timing when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened to 10 and prohibit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. As a result, the special suggestion effect and the specific suggestion effect are not performed in duplicate, so that the effect can be suppressed from becoming complicated and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, it is decided to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect straddling before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects, execution of some of the pre-reading notice effects among the plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects is prohibited when straddling before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time. On the other hand, the other pre-reading notice effects may not be prohibited (executable) even when they straddle before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time.

Similarly, in this example, it is decided to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects, some of the pre-reading notice effects among the plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects are prohibited from being executed in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction. The other look-ahead notice effects may not be prohibited (executable) in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction.

(Means 113-2) In the means 113-1, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. ,
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed.
When the special condition is satisfied and the special display result is derived and displayed, the state control means can be controlled to a special state having an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 saves time). By giving priority to the control to the time saving state via the relief time saving rather than the control to the time saving state via the relief time, the time saving time loss symbol is stopped in the fluctuation that becomes the relief time saving (the fluctuation that the relief time saving number counter = 0). If it is displayed, control to the time saving state via the relief time saving),
A special suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special suggestion effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect of the second aspect) suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed based on the determination result by the determination means. The part that executes step 113IWS1019 in
The special suggestion effect executing means is a specific value from a predetermined value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) that the numerical information updated by the update means is less than the special number of times. In the predetermined period until reaching (for example, in the case of Y in step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120, by not executing 113IWS1019, the variation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction The execution of the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect may be prohibited).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the production from becoming complicated, suppress the deterioration of the interest, and increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 113-3) In the means 113-1 or the means 113-2, the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less) is the predetermined period. It may be assumed that the execution rate of the special suggestion effect is higher than the previous period (for example, the period in which the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 times or more) (see FIGS. 10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B)). ..

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by expecting the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player due to the end of the game immediately before the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 113-4) In any one of the means 113-1 to the means 113-3, the special suggestion effect executing means has a plurality of effect modes depending on the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened). The ratio of whether to execute the special suggestion effect may differ depending on which of them (see FIGS. 10-6 (C) and 10-6 (D)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to establish the special condition and to improve the interest.

In addition to the telop display effect, if the configuration is such that whether or not to execute the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect, which indicate the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, is determined by lottery, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is determined. The execution ratio may be different.

(Means 113-5) In any one of means 113-1 to 113-4, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition is provided (FIG. 10-11 (A), (Refer to (B)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

As for the explanatory effect, the execution rate and the selection rate of the effect mode may be different depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. For example, the explanation effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened. In addition, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, by lowering the execution ratio of the explanation effect, the effect of the countdown effect and the effect effect suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is reduced. It may be suppressed.

(Means 113-6) In any one of the means 113-1 to the means 113-5, the special suggestion effect executing means is the first method in which it is easy to specify the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied as the special suggestion effect. The special suggestion effect (for example, fanning effect, countdown effect) and the second special suggestion effect (for example, effect effect, telop) in which it is more difficult to specify the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied than the first special suggestion effect. (Display effect) and can be executed (see FIGS. 10-11 (C) to 10-12 (E)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Means 113-7) A predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when the variable display is not executed and the hold information is not stored in the hold storage means in any of the means 113-1 to 113-6. Is provided with a predetermined image display means capable of displaying (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 113IWS256).
The special suggestion effect execution means can execute the special suggestion effect (for example, the telop display effect) when the predetermined image is displayed (for example, the telop display effect and the demo movie effect can be executed in duplicate). The order of execution of the display of the predetermined image and the suggestion effect may be either first or at the same time), depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. , The ratio of executing the special suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed may be different (see FIGS. 10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the special suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied, the selection ratio of the effect mode of the special suggestion effect is different when the predetermined image is displayed (FIGS. 10-6 (C), (D). )). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the special suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of fluctuations of the symbol is counted, and the count result reaches the value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on the fluctuation of a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit), there was something controlled to the probabilistic state. Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the execution frequency of the symbol change is high) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number, the interest when the special condition of the variable display number is satisfied is insufficient. Met. Therefore, the following (means 114-1) to (means 114-8) gaming machines are described in the feature unit 113IW.

(Means 114-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state.
It is equipped with an update means that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, so that the special condition is set. It can be controlled to a special state when it is established,
It is possible to control to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a symbol with a time saving deviation) is derived and displayed in the normal state.
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed.
The state control means has an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied when the special display result is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is set to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fact that the relief time saving fluctuation is reached when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the time saving state via the time saving time loss. Control (promote)),
When the special condition is satisfied, the notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, steps 113IWS806, S809, S845) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the time reduction rush effect, the time reduction promotion effect) for notifying the establishment is performed. Part)
The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied when the special display result is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display (for example). The effect control CPU 120 is a gaming machine characterized by executing a time saving promotion effect when the variation pattern PA3-2 is selected).

According to such a configuration, when the special condition is satisfied while the special display result is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display, it is possible to give a special feeling by the notification effect. You can improve your interest.

(Means 114-2) In the means 114-1, the notification effect executing means can execute the notification effect when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and in the special state. When the special condition is satisfied, the effect mode of the notification effect is different (for example, the effect control CPU 120 enters the time reduction state C when it is controlled from the normal state to the time reduction state C by performing steps 113IWS806, S809, S845. The effect may be executed, and the time reduction promotion effect may be executed when the time reduction state B is controlled to the time reduction state C).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the player and improve the interest by performing the notification effect in a mode suitable for the situation.

In this example, the fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the normal state and the fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the time reduction state are used to perform the notification effect during the fluctuation (time reduction rush effect, time reduction promotion effect). However, the execution timing of the notification effect is not limited to the change. For example, a fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the normal state and a fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the time reduction state, during the symbol confirmation period from the stop of the symbol to the start of the next fluctuation. The mode of effect of the notification effect to be performed may be different. In that case, a common effect may be performed during the fluctuation.

(Means 114-3) In means 114-1 or means 114-2, a launch promotion notification (for example, display of a right-handed notification image shown in FIG. 10-12 (H)) for promoting the launch of a game medium toward a special route is displayed. ) Is provided (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 in which steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845 are performed).
The launch promotion notification means can execute the launch promotion notification when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, while limiting the execution of the launch promotion notification when the special condition is satisfied in the special state (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 displays a right-handed notification image based on being controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state C (see FIG. 10-12 (H)), and is controlled from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C. Does not display the right-handed notification image (see FIG. 10-15 (D)). In FIG. 10-15 (D), the right-handed promotion image (under the small symbol) based on being controlled to the time saving state B. Although the displayed right-pointing arrow) is displayed, this right-handed promotion image is different from the right-handed notification image displayed based on the control of the time saving state C). May be good.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the production.

If the execution of the launch promotion notification is restricted when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, the execution of the launch promotion notification may be prohibited as shown in FIG. 10-15 (D). Alternatively, the launch promotion notification may be executed in a more passive manner than when the special conditions are satisfied in the normal state. For example, the display range may be reduced or an arrow may be transmitted to notify the launch promotion. Further, when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, the image display device 5 having a high degree of attention of the player performs launch promotion notification, while when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, the degree of attention of the player is the image display device 5. A lower light emitting member or speakers 8L, 8R may be used to perform launch promotion notification.

Further, as a launch promotion notification, the launch promotion notification means is a first launch promotion notification (for example, FIG. 10-12 (H)) that promotes the launch of the game medium toward the special route when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state. The right-pointing arrow of reference) and the second launch promotion notification (for example, the right-pointing arrow in FIGS. 10-15 (A) to (D)) that promotes the launch of the game medium toward the special path during the control of the special state. , Each of which can be executed in a different manner, and when a special condition is satisfied in a special state, the first launch promotion notification may not be executed, while the second launch promotion notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the production while performing the notification according to the situation.

(Means 114-4) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-3, the effect mode of the notification effect is common between when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state and when the special condition is satisfied in the special state. (For example, the effect executed when the normal state is controlled to the time saving state C and the effect executed when the time saving state B is controlled to the time saving state C are common).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of fluctuation patterns and the number of effect data, and reduce the storage capacity.

(Means 114-5) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-4, when the normal state is changed to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the variable display executed after the establishment of the special condition is subject to advance notice. While limiting the specific suggestion effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is N in step 113IWS1014, the step 113IWS1015 is executed), a special state having a low advantage (for example, for example) based on the establishment of the special condition. When transitioning from a time-saving state B) with a time reduction of 100 times to a special state with a high degree of advantage (for example, a time-saving state C with a time reduction of 800 times), a specific suggestion is made for the variable display executed after the special condition is satisfied. It may be possible to execute the effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 113IWS1014, step 113IWS1019 can be executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform a specific suggestion effect while suppressing the occurrence of a defect in the effect.

(Means 114-6) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-5, the special suggestion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the special suggestion effect related to the establishment of the special condition in the special state. The portion in which step 113IWS806 is executed regardless of whether or not the time is shortened) may be provided.

According to such a configuration, in a special state, it is possible to expect the establishment of a special condition and improve the interest.

It should be noted that the production mode of the special suggestion effect may be different between the normal state and the time saving state. For example, the character color of the countdown effect and the color or pattern of the effect of the effect effect may be different.

(Means 114-7) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-6, the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern other than the variation pattern PA1-2 to PA1-4) and the predetermined variable display pattern are more variable. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a shortened variable display pattern having a shortened display period (for example, variable patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4). The part of the computer 100 in which step S111 is performed) is provided.
In the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is non-variable in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled based on the derived display of the special display result. When a specific display result is obtained, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern may be high (see FIGS. 10-1 (D) and (E)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, it is assumed that stress will be given to the player if the ratio of selecting the deviation of the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is high even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the stress given to the player by configuring the variation pattern having a short variation time to be easily selected in the deviation variation of the time reduction state via the relief time reduction.

(Means 114-8) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-7, a plurality of variable displays including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of the reach effect. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for performing step S111) for determining a variable display pattern from the pattern is provided.
In the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is non-variable in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled based on the derived display of the special display result. When a specific display result is obtained, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern may be low (see FIGS. 10-1 (D) and (E)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time, it is assumed that stress will be given to the player if the ratio of reach loss being selected is high, so the relief time is shortened. The stress given to the player can be reduced by configuring the variation pattern of the out-of-reach to be difficult to select in the short time state.

Further, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of fluctuations of the symbol is counted, and the count result reaches the value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on the fluctuation of a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit), there was something controlled to the probabilistic state. Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the execution frequency of the symbol change is high) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in the control of the gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number. Therefore, the following (means 115-1) to (means 115-4) gaming machines are described in the feature unit 113IW.

(Means 115-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
A first passage area (for example, a first start winning prize) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific path (for example, the left side area) among a plurality of paths on which the game medium (for example, a game ball) can move can pass. Mouth) and
A second passage area (for example, a second start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special route (for example, the right side region) different from the specific route can pass.
As the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the first identification information based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening) and the second start condition (for example, the second). Variable display of the second identification information based on the establishment of the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and the variable display executing means (for example, steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute the variable display are executed. Part) and
A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal state.
It is equipped with an update means that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The second starting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game medium passes through the second passing region.
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, so that the special condition is set. It can be controlled to a special state when it is established,
It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can shorten the time by performing step 113IWS537. Control to state A),
A special state controlled after the advantageous state (for example, a time saving state via a jackpot (time saving state A)) and a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a time saving state via a relief time saving (time saving state C)). )) With a special output means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for performing steps 113IWS42B, S42F) capable of executing a special output (for example, the output of the winning easy state designation signals 1 and 3) that can be distinguished from the above. ,
In a specific output means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a specific output (for example, an output of a launch position designation signal 3) that can specify that a game medium should be launched toward a special path in a special state. , The part where step 113IWS35 is performed), and further
The specific output means can execute the specific output in common between the special state controlled after the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. A gaming machine characterized in that step 113IWS35 is commonly performed regardless of which time reduction flag is set).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally specify the opportunity to be controlled to the special state, and it is possible to standardize the specific signal. For example, it is possible to externally identify whether the opportunity to be controlled in the time saving state is the occurrence of a big hit or the relief time saving.

Further, in this example, a signal output that can distinguish between the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief time saving is output to the test device, and either the time saving state via the big hit or the time saving state via the relief time saving is performed. It is assumed that it is possible to output a signal that can specify that it should be hit right even when it is controlled to, but similarly to an external device such as a hall management computer, the time saving state via a big hit is also possible. It is possible to output a signal that can distinguish between the time saving state via the rescue time saving and the time saving state via the rescue time saving, and it is possible to specify that it should be right-handed regardless of whether it is controlled by the time saving state via the jackpot or the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be possible to output signals in common. As a result, in the hall management computer, it is possible to analyze the operation such as the relief time reduction arrival rate in actual operation and the customer base of the player when the relief time reduction is reached, and to standardize the signal. be able to.

(Means 115-2) In the means 115-1, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. ,
The special output means has a special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a time saving state via a time saving loss (time saving state B)) and a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a time saving state B). For example, it is possible to execute a special output (for example, the output of the winning easy state designation signals 2 and 3) that can be distinguished from the time saving state (time saving state C) via the relief time saving (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100). , Step 113 IWS42D, S42F).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally identify the opportunity to be controlled to the special state. For example, it is possible to externally identify whether the trigger for being controlled in the reduced working hours state is the reduced working hours symbol stop or the relief working hours.

(Means 115-3) In the means 115-1 or the means 115-2, the state control means is in a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Is controllable and
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed.
When the special condition is satisfied and the special display result is derived and displayed, the state control means can be controlled to a special state having an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 saves time). By giving priority to the control to the time saving state via the relief time saving rather than the control to the time saving state via the relief time, the time saving time loss symbol is stopped in the fluctuation that becomes the relief time saving (the fluctuation that the relief time saving number counter = 0). If it is displayed, it may be controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving).

According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 115-4) In any of the means 115-1 to the means 115-3, when the state control means derives and displays a special display result (for example, a time-saving missed symbol) different from the specific display result in the normal state. Can be controlled to a special state,
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed.
When the special display result is derived and displayed as the special condition is satisfied, the signal control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) that performs processing related to the output of a signal that can identify that the special display result is derived and displayed. Even if the variation causes a relief time reduction, it may be provided with a portion for performing step 113IWS37E when the time reduction deviation symbol is stopped and displayed.

According to such a configuration, the display result can be appropriately notified to the outside.

Further, the contents shown in the feature unit 113IW may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 105-1) to (means 107-15).

(Means 105-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. A possible state control means and an update means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the execution of the variable display are provided, and the state control means is specified as a display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after the display result is controlled to an advantageous state based on the derivation display, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by becoming a specific value corresponding to (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0), and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 shortens the relief time when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes. (Update the number of times counter), there are multiple types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state (for example, 10R jackpot A) and a special advantageous state (for example, 10R jackpot B), and control to any of the plurality of advantageous states. The advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on whether or not the special state is controlled, and the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. It is higher than the advantage of the controlled special state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and after the 10R jackpot B, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state until the next big hit occurs. ), The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state (for example, 100 mainly after the 10R jackpot A). It may be controlled to the time saving state of the times, and may be controlled to the time saving state of 800 times as the time saving state via the relief time saving. According to such a configuration, the relief degree of the player can be increased.

(Means 105-2) Controlled to an advantageous state when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. After that, the ratio controlled to the special state of special advantage (for example, the time saving state that continues until the next big hit occurs) is different (for example, the big hit type when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The selection ratio is different, and the special condition is satisfied when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The number of executions of the variable display for this is the same for the special number of times (for example, relief after a big hit based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol and after a big hit based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol). The number of fluctuations required for the time reduction may be 800 times in common). According to such a configuration, when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. While enhancing the interest by demonstrating different playability, the special number of times is common between the case of variable display of the first identification information and the case of variable display of the second identification information, resulting in excessive gambling. It is possible to suppress the increase to.

(Means 105-3) The disadvantage setting value (for example, the setting value "1") in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is the first probability (for example, about 1/319) and the control in the more advantageous state than the first probability. A setting that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value (for example, setting value "6") which is a second probability (for example, about 1/270) having a high probability of being set. The advantage of the special state, which is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is more likely to be satisfied when the special condition is provided and the disadvantage setting value is set than when the advantageous setting value is set. It is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and the time saving state via the relief time saving is 800 times. It may be controlled to a time saving state. According to such a configuration, even when a disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is. By being higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 105-4) A setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and any of a plurality of types after being controlled in an advantageous state. Whether it is controlled to the special state of advantage is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set. Yes, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same regardless of which set value is set (for example, the length of the time saving state via the relief time saving is any). It may be common regardless of whether the set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and to realize sound playability. be able to.

(Means 105-5) Of a plurality of types, one is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and the other is controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which advantageous state is controlled is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. And, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is common (for example, the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the second special symbol. It may be possible to control to the time saving state of 800 times in both cases of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first identification information. According to such a configuration, the variable display of the first identification information can be performed. Any set value is set for the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied, while exhibiting different playability between the case of performing the game and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information. Since it is common at times, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling and to obtain an appropriate degree of relief.

(Means 105-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-2) having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including PA1-4) is provided. Is shortened and variable when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The rate of determining the display pattern is high (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) in the time reduction state via the relief time reduction, and in the time reduction state via the jackpot. The variation pattern may be selected using the variation pattern tables C and H shown in FIGS. 10-1 (C) and 10-1 (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time is short) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. ..

(Means 105-7) A variable display pattern determining means (means 105-7) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to execution of a reach effect. For example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step S111) is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is controlled after the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that of the special state (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuation, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, FIG. 10-1. The fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in (E), and the fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) in the time saving state via the jackpot). .. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of occurrence of reach is suppressed) based on the game being played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 105-8) The updating means can update specific numerical information (for example, a time reduction counter) different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means is special. It is possible to control the special state by setting information (for example, a time saving flag), and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the specific numerical information is stored a predetermined number of times (for example) in the special state. , 100 times), the special state is terminated based on the predetermined value (for example, the value of the time reduction counter: 0), and the updating means updates the numerical information and the specific numerical value even if the power supply is stopped. Backup when a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and special information setting information and a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is on when the power is turned on) are satisfied. It is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the storage means, and the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and initializes the numerical information. It may not be set (for example, the presence / absence of the time reduction flag set and the value of the time reduction counter are reset, while the value of the relief time reduction counter is not reset). According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means 106-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the derivation display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is easier to be executed than a normal state. Possible state control means, update means that can update numerical information (eg, rescue time reduction counter) based on the execution of variable display, and start conditions (eg, first start winning opening or second start winning). A variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (for example, neither a big hit game state nor a variable state) as well as a winning of a game ball to the mouth) and a start condition. The hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage number buffer and the second hold storage number buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display as hold information when the start condition is not satisfied, and the power supply is stopped. When a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information and hold information and a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is on when the power is turned on) are satisfied. Initialization means that can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means, numerical information updated by the update means based on the storage contents of the backup storage means when power supply is started, and hold information stored by the hold storage means. The state control means includes a recovery means (for example, a part for executing step S6 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing recovery control, and the state control means variably displays the numerical information updated by the update means. By setting a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times of execution, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied, and it is restored. After the control is executed, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the recovered pending information, and the update means executes the variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the information is changed or the second identification information is variablely displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is relieved when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes. (Update the time reduction counter). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages of the player when a power failure occurs while optimizing the control by initialization.

(Means 106-2) It is controlled to an advantageous state when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. After that, the ratio controlled to the special state of special advantage (for example, the time saving state that continues until the next big hit occurs) is different (for example, the big hit type when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The selection ratio is different, and the special condition is satisfied when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The number of executions of the variable display for this is the same for the special number of times (for example, relief after a big hit based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol and after a big hit based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol). The number of fluctuations required for the time reduction may be 800 times in common). According to such a configuration, when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. While enhancing the interest by demonstrating different playability, the special number of times is common between the case of variable display of the first identification information and the case of variable display of the second identification information, resulting in excessive gambling. It is possible to suppress the increase to.

(Means 106-3) The disadvantage setting value (for example, the setting value "1") in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is the first probability (for example, about 1/319) and the control in the more advantageous state than the first probability. A setting that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value (for example, setting value "6") which is a second probability (for example, about 1/270) having a high probability of being set. The advantage of the special state, which is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is more likely to be satisfied when the special condition is provided and the disadvantage setting value is set than when the advantageous setting value is set. It is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and the time saving state via the relief time saving is 800 times. It may be controlled to a time saving state. According to such a configuration, even when a disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is. By being higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 106-4) A setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and any of a plurality of types after being controlled in an advantageous state. Whether it is controlled to the special state of advantage is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set. Yes, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same regardless of which set value is set (for example, the length of the time saving state via the relief time saving is any). It may be common regardless of whether the set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and to realize sound playability. be able to.

(Means 106-5) Of a plurality of types, one is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and the other is controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which advantageous state is controlled is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. And, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is common (for example, the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the second special symbol. It may be possible to control to the time saving state of 800 times in both cases of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first identification information. According to such a configuration, the variable display of the first identification information can be performed. Any set value is set for the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied, while exhibiting different playability between the case of performing the game and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information. Since it is common at times, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling and to obtain an appropriate degree of relief.

(Means 106-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-2) having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including ~ PA1-4) is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied. , When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is higher than that of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuation, the relief time is shortened). In the time saving state via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), and in the time saving state via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) is used. You may also select a pattern). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time is short) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. ..

(Means 106-7) A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to execution of a reach effect. In the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. In the case of, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) in the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. In the time saving state via the big hit, the fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H)). According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of occurrence of reach is suppressed) based on the game being played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 106-8) The updating means can update specific numerical information (for example, a time reduction counter) different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means is special. It is possible to control the special state by setting information (for example, a time saving flag), and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the specific numerical information is stored a predetermined number of times (for example) in the special state. , 100 times), the special state is terminated based on the predetermined value (for example, the value of the time reduction counter: 0), and the updating means updates the numerical information and the specific numerical value even if the power supply is stopped. Backup when a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and special information setting information and a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is on when the power is turned on) are satisfied. It is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the storage means, and the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and initializes the numerical information. It may not be set (for example, the presence / absence of the time reduction flag set and the value of the time reduction counter are reset, while the value of the relief time reduction counter is not reset). According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means 107-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. The state control means includes a possible state control means and an update means that can update the numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means is the numerical information updated by the update means. However, by setting a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied. The updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. When the 1st special symbol changes and the 2nd special symbol changes, the relief time reduction counter is updated), and suggestion effects related to the establishment of special conditions (for example, fanning effect, countdown effect, effect effect, telop display effect) are performed. Further provided with a feasible suggestion effect execution means, the suggestion effect execution means has a different ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes the suggestion effect is executed according to the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a countdown effect). In, the selection ratio of the numerical value to be displayed is different (the numerical value according to the remaining number of times until the relief time is selected at the ratio of 100%, but the value to be displayed is selected by the ratio according to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened by lottery. The effect display range is different in the effect production (it is displayed at a rate of 100% in the range according to the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, but it depends on the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction. The range to be displayed may be determined by lottery), the color of the telop display area is different in the telop display effect (see FIGS. 10-6 (C), (D)), and the effect mode of the suggestion effect is , It may be an embodiment suggesting a period until the special condition is satisfied (see FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the production mode of the suggestion effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-2) The effect mode of the suggestion effect (for example, countdown effect) is an mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied can be specified (see FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12). It may be that. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 107-3) The suggestion effect is an effect of displaying a specific image (for example, an effect effect of displaying an effect image), and the specific image is a color and size (size of a single image and a plurality of images). At least one of (including the size of the display range) is displayed in a plurality of different modes, and the period until the special condition suggested by which mode is displayed is different (FIGS. 10-11 and 10-). 12) may be used. According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on the aspect of the specific image and improve the interest.

(Means 107-4) The starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the variable) is satisfied. A variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the fact that is satisfied, and a hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (for example, the first). A predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) can be displayed when the variable display is not executed and the reserved storage is not stored in the reserved storage means (1 hold storage number buffer, 2 hold storage number buffer). An image display means and a suggestion effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a telop display effect) when a predetermined image is displayed (for example, a telop display effect and a demo movie effect). It is possible to execute in duplicate. The execution order of the display of the predetermined image and the suggestion effect may be first or at the same time), and the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. Depending on the number of times of execution of the above, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed may be different (see FIGS. 10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-5) The starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the variable) is satisfied. A variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the fact that is satisfied, and a hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (for example, the first). A predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) can be displayed when the variable display is not executed and the reserved storage is not stored in the reserved storage means (1 hold storage number buffer, 2 hold storage number buffer). An image display means and a suggestion effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a telop display effect) when a predetermined image is displayed (for example, a telop display effect and a demo movie effect). It is possible to execute in duplicate. The execution order of the display of the predetermined image and the suggestion effect may be first or at the same time), and the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. Depending on the number of times of execution of the above, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect may differ depending on the predetermined mode when the predetermined image is displayed (see FIGS. 10-6 (C) and 10-6 (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-6) The starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the variable) is satisfied. A variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the fact that is satisfied, and a hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (for example, the first). A predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) can be displayed when the variable display is not executed and the reserved storage is not stored in the reserved storage unit (1 hold storage number buffer, 2 hold storage number buffer). The suggestion effect executing means includes an image display means, and detects that the operation means (for example, the hitting ball operation handle 30) is operated and a predetermined area (for example, the first start) when the predetermined image is displayed. It is assumed that the suggestion effect (for example, the dialogue effect by voice output) can be executed based on at least one of the detection that the game medium has passed through the winning opening or the second starting winning opening. May be good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a suggestion effect to the player who actually plays the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

(Means 107-7) A setting means capable of setting any setting value from a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is set to any setting value. Depending on the situation, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the telop display effect) may be different (see FIGS. 10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-8) A setting means capable of setting any setting value from a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is set to any setting value. Depending on the situation, the ratio of performing the suggestion effect (for example, the telop display effect) may differ depending on the specific mode (for example, “red”) (see FIGS. 10-6 (C) and 10-6 (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-9) It is possible to execute a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value. Setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 of Modification 1 that executes the setting suggestion effect as a changing effect), and the setting suggestion effect execution means is set to any setting value. The ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the suggestion effect execution means may have the same ratio of executing the suggestion effect regardless of which setting value is set. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to suppress the complication of control.

(Means 107-10) It is possible to execute a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value. Setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 of Modification 1 that executes the setting suggestion effect as a changing effect), and the setting suggestion effect execution means is set to any setting value. The ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the special mode (for example, the second mode), and the suggestion effect execution means has a specific mode (for example, ". It may be assumed that the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is the same by "red"). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of suggestive effect, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of control.

(Means 107-11) The suggestion effect executing means is a case where the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started and a case where the recovery process is executed, and in a specific period after the power supply is started. The ratio of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the display of the initial result according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened) may be different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-12) A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2). The variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and the special variable display pattern can be determined before the special condition is satisfied. When the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed without determining (for example, the variable patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 can be changed only when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0). , A specific notification effect execution means capable of executing a specific notification effect (for example, a time-saving rush effect) for notifying that the special state is controlled may be further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and at the same time, the player can be clearly notified of the change in the gaming state. Can be improved.

(Means 107-13) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 without reach effect) and a specific variable display pattern (for example, reach effect) having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including the variable pattern PA2-1 to PA2-3 and PB2-1 to PB2-3) is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is provided. The specific variable display pattern can be determined regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not (see FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2) and is variable. When the display result of the display is a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern (see FIG. 10-1 (A)), and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (see FIG. 10-1 (A)). For example, the variable period in which the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less is more variable than the period before the predetermined period (for example, the variable period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 11 times or more). When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low (for example, the variation shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 11 times or more. When the variation pattern is selected using the pattern table and the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the selection ratio of the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 in FIGS. 10-2 (F) and 10-2 (F) and (G) is selected. The fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table changed to 0%). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 107-14) A notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect executing means displays a variable display. In both cases where the result is a specific display result and not a specific display result, the advance notice effect can be executed, and the case where the variable display display result is the specific display result is the specific display result. When the rate of executing the notice effect is higher than in the case where the notice effect is not satisfied, and the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. In addition, it may be assumed that the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 107-15) Execution of step 113IWS802A in the effect control CPU 120, which is capable of executing the advance notice effect for notifying that the specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The notice effect executing means has a specific mode (for example, "red") and a predetermined mode regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is a specific display result or not. (For example, "blue") can execute the advance notice effect, and when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode is higher than the predetermined mode, and the special condition is satisfied. In the predetermined period before the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect according to the specific mode may be lower than the period before the predetermined period. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Explanation of feature 116IW)
Next, the feature portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 108IW, the gaming state is controlled to one of a low probability / low base state (normal state), a low probability / high base state, a high probability / high base state, and a high probability / low base state. In this example, in the high base state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, which is compared with the normal state. In the game, the probability of becoming a "hit" is higher. For example, the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10% in the normal state, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90% in the time-saving state. Will be easier to win. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening) is obtained by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize. Further, in the configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) shown in FIG. 1 is provided, in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is used as compared with the normal state. You may make it easier for the game ball to win a prize.

Further, in this example, in the high probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is higher than in the low probability state. Hereinafter, in this example, the high base state is also referred to as a time saving state, and the high probability state is also referred to as a probabilistic state.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state) after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is displayed. It may be controlled to the time saving state (high base state) based on the derivation display. Hereinafter, the time saving state (high base state) in which the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled after the big hit game is completed is also referred to as a time saving state via the big hit, and the time saving state controlled based on the derivation display of the time saving out-of-time symbol is displayed. (High base state) is also referred to as a time saving state via a time saving deviation.

Further, in this example, even if the next big hit does not occur even after the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the big hit occurs, the time is shortened. It may be controlled to a state (high base state) (hereinafter, the time saving state controlled by such a process (high base state) is also referred to as a time saving state via the relief time saving, or simply a relief time saving. Also called). In this example, after the relief time reduction occurs, even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished without the next big hit, the relief time reduction is not controlled again. However, not limited to such a configuration, if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is completed without the next big hit occurring even after the relief time reduction occurs, the relief time reduction is controlled again. It may be configured so that it may occur. Further, for example, even if the next big hit or the time reduction deviation does not occur even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is completed after the time reduction deviation occurs, the time reduction state (relief time reduction) is controlled. It may be configured so that it may occur.

In the high base state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and (3) variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening) and variable. Control to lengthen the opening time of the winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed. All controls may be performed, or some of (1) to (4) may not be controlled. For example, which of (1) to (4) may be controlled differs between the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be the same.

Further, for example, in a low base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure may be 1/1, or the probability of hitting a normal figure may be extremely low and the probability of hitting a normal figure may be substantially 1/1. That is, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control of the above (1) is not performed, a part or all of the above (2) to (4) are controlled so that the high base state is obtained. May be.

It is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the relief time is controlled and the number of time reductions N in the relief time are specified as follows.
2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P
0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time reductions N is 120 to 1140. As will be described later, in this example, in the case of the set value "6" having the highest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is about 1/270, so that the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810 and the number of time reductions N is 108 to. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability, since the jackpot probability is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time reductions N is 127 to 1212. In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are both set to "800", and even when they are set to any of the set values, the above provisions are satisfied. In addition, the configuration is not limited to the configuration shown in this example, and may be configured to satisfy the above-mentioned provision at least in the case of the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 108IW, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

(First Embodiment)
Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described.

(Time saving type)
FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In this example, the time saving state (high base state) is the time saving state A via the jackpot (low probability / high base state) and the time saving state via the time saving loss (low probability / high base state). It is possible to distinguish between the state B and the time saving state C which is the time saving state (low probability / high base state) via the relief time saving.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, when 6R jackpot A is generated during the normal state (low base state) and controlled to the time saving state (high base state), the number of time saving is 100 times. When the 6R jackpot A is generated during the time saving state (high base state) and controlled to the time saving state (high base state), the time saving state is controlled to 200 times. That is, in this example, the advantage of the time saving state controlled after the big hit game is configured to be different depending on the game state when the big hit occurs. With such a configuration, the advantage can be different depending on the game state, and the interest can be improved. In this example, when any of the 6R jackpots B to D occurs, the time is shortened until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game, regardless of whether the occurrence state is the normal state or the time saving state. It is controlled to a state (high base state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, when the time reduction occurs during the normal state and the time reduction state is controlled to the time reduction state (high base state), the time reduction state (high base state) is performed 100 times. State) is controlled. On the other hand, if the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state), the time reduction count is not updated. That is, when the time reduction state (high base state) and the remaining number of times controlled to the time reduction state (high base state) is 50 times, even if the time reduction deviation occurs, the time reduction state (high base state) is controlled. The remaining number of times to be done remains 50 times and is not updated. Therefore, in this example, the time reduction deviation that occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) is substantially invalid. Further, in this example, as will be described later, the time saving may not be determined in the probabilistic state (high probability state).

The method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case of a time reduction is not limited to that shown in FIG. 11-1. For example, when the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled in the time reduction state (high base state) is set again (for example, set to 100 times). However, if the time reduction occurs only during the time reduction state (high base state) via the time reduction state (high base state), it is controlled to the time reduction state (high base state). It may be configured so that the remaining number of times is set again. Further, for example, even when a symbol that is out of time reduction is derived and displayed, it is controlled to 100 times of time reduction in the normal state, and is controlled to 0 times of time reduction in the time reduction state (that is, time reduction). It may be configured to fall from the state to the normal state). Various modes can be considered as a method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case of such a time reduction deviation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, in the normal state and the time saving state, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving state is controlled to 800 times. As described above, in this example, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the time saving loss because the number of time saving is large.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this example, when the relief time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) via the big hit or the time reduction deviation, the relief time reduction is updated while the relief time reduction is performed. It is configured so that the number of time reductions is not updated when the time reduction occurs during the including time reduction state (high base state). With such a configuration, in this example, the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving can be secured, and the relief degree of the player can be increased (for example, the investment amount of the player can be suppressed).

In this example, even if the variation display of 800 times is finished without the big hit after being controlled to the time reduction state of 800 times by the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction is not controlled again.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. The relief time reduction arrival rate is a rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by changing n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the big hit gaming state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated in this way.
K = (1-ML) n = {(P-1) ÷ P} n
(K = Relief time reduction arrival rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the set value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the set value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

(Variation pattern table)
11-2 to 11-4 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the first embodiment of the feature portion 116IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4, 14 types of first variation patterns # A to #N for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. Thirteen types of #A to #M are used.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the low probability / low base state (normal state), the first special symbol for the low probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (A). The variation pattern table A is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the first variation patterns # A to # It is determined to be one of F.

Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), for the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (B). The variation pattern table B for the first special symbol is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), in the case of a high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the first variation pattern # G ~ # I is determined.

In the variation pattern table B for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), each first variation pattern # G is compared with the variation pattern table A for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 11-2 (A). The fluctuation time specified by ~ # I is extremely long, 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the fluctuation display of the long fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed. Will be done.

Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), for the high probability / high base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (C). The variation pattern table C for the first special symbol is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), in the case of a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the first variation pattern # A In addition to ~ # F, it is determined to be one of the first fluctuation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), in the case of a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is off or a small hit, the first When the number of 1-held storages is 0, the first fluctuation patterns # J and # K having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved storage number is 1 or more, the first fluctuation patterns # A and #D having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds are determined.

Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the low probability / high base state, the variation for the first special symbol for the low probability / high base state shown in FIG. 11-3 (D). The pattern table D is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (D), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state, in addition to the first variation patterns # A to #F. It is determined to be one of the first fluctuation patterns # J, # K, and # L.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (D), in the low probability / high base state, if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is off or a small hit, the first reserved storage number is 0. If, the first fluctuation pattern # J, # K having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved storage number is 1 or more, the first fluctuation patterns # A and #D having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds are determined. Further, as will be described later, the low probability / high base state ends when the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times is executed, but when the fluctuation display of the final fluctuation of the low probability / high base state is executed, the fluctuation time is executed. It is determined to be the first fluctuation pattern # L (special fluctuation pattern) which is 5 seconds.

Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display is such that the relief time is shortened (when the value of the relief time reduction counter to be described later becomes 0), FIG. 11-3 (E). The variation pattern table E for the first special symbol for when the relief time reduction is established as shown in the above is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (E), if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the case of the variation display that shortens the relief time, either one of the first variation patterns # M and # N is executed. Will be decided.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-3, the first variation patterns # M and #N are not used for the variation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, and are used only for the variation display that results in the relief time reduction. It is a time-specific fluctuation pattern. In this example, when the first fluctuation pattern # M (relief time reduction inrush loss) is determined, the time reduction state is controlled (that is, the relief time reduction is controlled to the low probability / high base state) as described later. ) The time-saving rush effect (see, for example, FIGS. 11-23 (B) and (C)) for notifying the fact is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state), and the interest when the relief time is shortened is improved. be able to.

Further, when the first fluctuation pattern # N (relief time reduction rushing pretending big hit) is determined, the time reduction for notifying that the time reduction state is controlled (that is, the relief time reduction is controlled to the low probability / high base state) is notified. After performing an effect in the same manner as the inrush effect (for example, see FIGS. 11-23 (B) and 11-23 (C)), an effect for notifying that a big hit will be executed is executed. With such a configuration, once the player recognizes that the relief time has been shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the case of the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the second for the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (A). The variation pattern table A for a special symbol is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), in the case of the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the second variation pattern # A In addition to ~ # F, it is determined to be one of the second fluctuation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), in the case of a high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is off or a small hit, the first 2 When the number of reserved storages is 0, the second fluctuation patterns # J and # K having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the second reserved storage number is 1 or more, the second fluctuation patterns # A and #D having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds are determined.

Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is not in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), it is for a time other than the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (B). The second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed when the probability / low base state (first probability variation state) is not high, the second variation pattern # G to Determined to be one of #I.

In the second variation pattern table B for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), each second variation pattern # G is compared with the variation pattern table A for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 11-4 (A). The fluctuation time specified by ~ # I is extremely long, 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, in a state other than the high probability / low base state (first probability change state) (low probability / low base state, high probability / high base state (second probability change state), low probability / high base state). When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the long variation with the variation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the variation display is such that the relief time is shortened (when the value of the relief time reduction counter described later becomes 0), FIG. 11-4 (C). The second special symbol variation pattern table E for when the relief time reduction is established as shown in the above is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the case of the variation display that shortens the relief time, either of the second variation patterns # L and #M. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 11-4, the second fluctuation patterns # L and #M are not used for the fluctuation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, but are used only for the fluctuation display that results in the relief time reduction. Is. In this example, when the second fluctuation pattern # L (relief time reduction inrush loss) is determined, the time reduction state is controlled (that is, the relief time reduction is controlled to the low probability / high base state) as described later. ) The time-saving rush effect (see, for example, FIGS. 11-23 (B) and (C)) for notifying the fact is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state), and the interest when the relief time is shortened is improved. be able to. Further, when the second fluctuation pattern # M (relief time reduction rushing pretending big hit) is determined, the time reduction for notifying that the time reduction state is controlled (that is, the relief time reduction is controlled to the low probability / high base state) is notified. After performing an effect in the same manner as the inrush effect (for example, see FIGS. 11-23 (B) and 11-23 (C)), an effect for notifying that a big hit will be executed is executed. With such a configuration, once the player recognizes that the relief time has been shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

In this example, the same fluctuation pattern table is used (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same) in each of the time reduction state via the jackpot, the time reduction state via the missed time reduction, and the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. ), But it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, different fluctuation pattern tables may be used (that is, the average fluctuation time is different) depending on the time reduction state via the jackpot, the time reduction state via the off time reduction, and the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. For example, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more likely to be determined by the fluctuation pattern with the shortened fluctuation time than the time saving state via the jackpot or the missed time saving, and the average fluctuation time is shortened. May be good. With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed. In addition, for example, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) at the time of the loss. It may not be (or less determined) and the average variation time may be shorter. With such a configuration, if the relief time is shortened (that is, if a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the reach (or the reach with particularly high expectations) will not be missed, so the decline in interest should be suppressed. Can be done.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
11-5 to 11-7 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it means that the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 061IWS50A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 061IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the first reserved storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 061IWS53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 061IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are used. The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 061IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / low base, and the low probability / low base background specification command is executed. The probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / high base, and the low probability / high base background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / low base state is determined and the high accuracy / low base background specification command is executed. Send.

Regarding the processing of step 061IWS56A (and step 061IWS56B described later) for transmitting the background designation command according to the current gaming state to the effect control CPU 120, the first special symbol normal processing (and the second special symbol normal processing described later) ), It may be executed after the update process of the relief time reduction counter and the high base count counter and the control process related to the high base flag are performed. That is, when the relief time reduction counter is updated at the start of fluctuation and the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled by the establishment of the relief time reduction, the low accuracy / high base background specification command is immediately transmitted. When the background is changed or the high base count counter is updated and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) ends and the normal state is controlled, the low accuracy / low base background specification command is immediately sent. You may change the background.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS5601A). If the probability change flag is set, that is, if it is a probability change state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, when the process of step 061IWS5601A (and step 061IWS5601B described later) is executed to be in a probabilistic state (high probability state), the number of relief times after step 061IWS5602A (and step 061IWS5602B described later) is shortened. Do not execute counter update processing. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the probabilistic change state (high probability state), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened does not decrease even if the fluctuation display is executed, and the case is in the non-probability change state (low probability state). Only, when the fluctuation display is executed, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases. Not limited to the configuration of this example, even in the case of a probabilistic change state (high probability state), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be uniformly reduced when the fluctuation display is executed.

When the probability change flag is not set, that is, in the low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603A). In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5603A and the process of step 061IWS5603B described later, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Regardless of whether it is done or not, the value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly. That is, in this example, the relief time reduction counter can be updated at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is started and the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started. With such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the update of the relief time reduction counter.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data to reduce the relief time. Control is performed to transmit the number 1 designated command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605A). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 126, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 957E (H) as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5607A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" in the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the total number of variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the high base state. (Step 061IWS5608A).

In this example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter subtracted at the start of fluctuation becomes 0 by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and the relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state is 800 times. It is controlled to (low probability / high base state). In addition, if the state in which the relief time reduction occurs is a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) via a big hit or a time reduction deviation, the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) of 800 times of time reduction is performed again. Be controlled. Therefore, in this example, if the next big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clear processing or the big hit game is completed, the relief time reduction occurs and the time reduction state is controlled. It will be.

As described above, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the time saving loss. Is high. Then, in this example, when the relief time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) via the jackpot or the time reduction loss due to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later), the number of time reductions is performed. Is configured to be updated. For example, if the time saving state (high base state) via the big hit or the time saving time loss and the remaining number of times controlled to the time saving state (high base state) is 50 times, when the relief time saving occurs, the time saving state (high base state) The remaining number of times controlled by the base state) is updated to 800 times. On the other hand, in this example, when the time reduction state (high base state) including the relief time reduction occurs due to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B) described later, the number of time reductions is updated. It is configured not to be. For example, in the time saving state (high base state) via the relief time saving, when the remaining number of times controlled by the time saving state (high base state) is 500 times, even if the time saving deviation occurs, the time saving state (high base state) The remaining number of times controlled by the state) remains 500 times and is not updated. With such a configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to secure the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player (for example, to suppress the investment amount of the player).

Further, in this example, the relief time is shortened by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B described later). When the loss is derived and displayed, it is configured to be controlled to the time saving state by the relief time saving, which has a higher advantage than the time saving loss. Specifically, when the variation display (out of time reduction) of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started, the normal state (low probability / low base state) is changed to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state). The transition control is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, but at this time, the time reduction number is not updated due to the time reduction deviation (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). With such a configuration, even if the time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened, the advantage of the time reduction state due to the relief time can be secured, and the relief degree of the player can be increased (for example, the player). It is possible to curb the investment amount of.

Further, in this example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter subtracted at the start of fluctuation becomes 0 and the relief time reduction occurs, the value of the high base number counter is set to "800", but the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800". Not set. When the relief time reduction occurs, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" when the RAM clear processing is executed after the relief time reduction occurs or when a big hit occurs. Therefore, in this example, even if the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without a big hit after the relief time reduction occurs, the relief time reduction does not occur (that is, the relief time reduction is 800 times). It is not controlled continuously in a short time).

Specifically, when the variation display for 800 times of time reduction is executed without a big hit in the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction ends and the state shifts to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (that is,). No new relief time reduction will occur). Further, even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times without the big hit occurring in the transitioned normal state, the relief time reduction does not occur. After the relief time reduction occurs, the relief time reduction occurs again. For example, after the relief time reduction occurs, a big hit occurs, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800", and 800 times after the big hit game ends. If the next big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed, or after the relief time reduction occurs, the RAM clear processing is executed and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800", and 800 after the RAM clear processing. This is the case when the next big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display of the times is executed.

Not limited to the configuration of this example, for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" when the relief time reduction occurs, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to 1 each time the variation display is executed in the relief time reduction. By subtracting, a new relief time reduction may be established at the same time as the end of the relief time reduction, and the relief time may be continuously controlled until the next big hit occurs.

Further, for example, when the relief time reduction is established, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter, and the relief time reduction counter is not updated during the relief time reduction, so that a big hit occurs in the relief time reduction. Even if the fluctuation display of 800 times is executed without doing so, it is not controlled by the relief time reduction (that is, it is not continuously controlled by the relief time reduction of 800 times of time reduction), but a big hit occurs after the relief time reduction is completed. If the variable display is executed 800 times, the relief time may be shortened.

Further, for example, when the relief time reduction is established, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter and "200" is set in the high base number counter, so that a big hit does not occur in the relief time reduction. When the variation display for 200 times of time reduction is executed, the relief time reduction ends and the normal state (low probability / low base state) is entered, and the variation display of 600 times is performed without a big hit in the transitioned normal state. When executed, the relief time may be shortened.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), 800 times, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction number. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in step 061IWS5608A (or step 061IWS5608B described later), a value larger than "800" may be set in the high base number counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a plurality of types of values corresponding to the number of time reductions may be configured to be set in the high base number counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, "100" is set in the high base count counter, and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, "800" is set in the high base count counter. You may.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined in the lottery process is used as a high base number counter. It may be configured to be set. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10% and 800 times with a probability of 90%. When the number of time reductions is determined by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief variation flag indicating that the variation display satisfies the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5609A). By the process of step 061IWS5609A, in the first variation pattern setting process described later, it is possible to specify that the variation display is such that the relief time reduction is established, and to determine the variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction establishment.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS5610A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5610A). 061IWS5611A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later), in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when the relief time reduction is established. That is, in this example, in the low probability / high base state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long fluctuation. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently opened. Therefore, in order to make the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball launch operation (right-handed) aiming at the right side of the game area. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on. If the right-handed display 26 is already lit, such as when the relief time is shortened in the time saving state, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later) may be omitted.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. The command 957F (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614A). Next, in the game control microcomputer 100, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, Or 800 times) (step 061IWS5615A). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction count counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and the relief time reduction count 2 Control is performed to send the designated command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616A). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 800, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 9608 (H) as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction, and sends a relief time reduction number 1 designation command and a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction to suggest that the relief time reduction is established, or an effect suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction (for example, a fanning effect described later). And countdown effect) may be executed.

Further, for example, unlike the configuration of this example, in a configuration in which the relief time reduction can be continuously generated, the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command are transmitted only when the relief time reduction is performed for the first time. When the relief time is shortened after the second time, the relief time reduction number 1 designated command or the relief time reduction number 2 designated command may not be transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617A), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, it is controlled by one of low probability / low base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / high base state, and high probability / low base state. It is controlled to either the / high base state or the high probability / high base state. However, in the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), the high probability / high base state (second probability change state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, which will be described later). (See S2274), the number of times the variation display is executed in the high base state is not managed, and the value of the high base number counter is set to "0". Therefore, when the value of the high base number counter is not "0", it is controlled to the low probability / high base state.

In the first embodiment, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of times the variation display is executed in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R big hit A. When controlled to the / high base state, when controlled to the low probability / high base state via the time saving gap, and when controlled to the low probability / high base state via the relief time saving. In this example, when controlled to a low probability / high base state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are performed a predetermined number of times in total (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times). (See FIG. 11-1) Based on the execution, the low probability / high base state is terminated and the normal state (low probability / low base state) is entered.

When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 061IWS5618A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 061IWS5619A). If the value of the high base count counter does not reach "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5618A and the process of step 061IWS5618B described later, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The value of the high base count counter is updated regardless of whether it is done.

When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set (step 061IWS5620A). In this example, when Y is determined in step 061IWS5619A (or step 061IWS5619B described later), the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times) in total. Times. See FIG. 11-1) It is determined that the execution has been performed, the process of step 061IWS5620A (or step 061IWS5620B described later) is executed, the low probability / high base state is terminated, and the normal state (low probability / low base state) is executed. Will be migrated to.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621A). The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification until the variation display ends and continuing the right-handed state.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 061IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is a big hit is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A without performing the processing after step 061IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress in step 061IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 061IWS59A at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress in step 061IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 061IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a hit determination random number is a jackpot if it matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

As described above, in this example, the advantage of the time saving state controlled after the big hit game is configured to be different depending on the game state when the big hit occurs. Specifically, when a 6R jackpot A occurs during a normal state (low base state) and is controlled to a time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to a time saving state of 100 times of time saving, and the time saving state ( When a 6R jackpot A is generated during (high base state) and controlled to a time saving state (high base state), the time saving state is controlled to 200 times. With such a configuration, in this example, the execution of the jackpot determination module of step 061IWS59A (described later and step 061IWS59B) is performed by the relief time reduction counter of steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A (described later and steps 061IWS5602B to S5608B). It is configured to be executed after the update process and the high base flag setting process.

Therefore, in this example, when the display result of the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established is a big hit, the advantage of the time reduction state controlled after the end of the big hit game is determined assuming that the big hit has occurred in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction. To. Specifically, when the display result of the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is 6R jackpot A, it is assumed that 6R jackpot A has occurred in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction, and the time reduction state is 200 times after the end of the jackpot game. It is controlled (the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284 and S2286 to S2287 described later). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player by shortening the relief time (for example, suppressing the investment amount of the player).

When it is decided to make a big hit (step 061IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 061IWS62A), and the jackpot type is stored (step 061IWS63A). ), The process proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

If the big hit is not made in step 061IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 061IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 061IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS65A). Step 061IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 061IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 061IWS68A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. As for the small hit type, a plurality of types may be provided so that the opening pattern (that is, the ease of winning) of the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning opening) is different, or only one may be provided. .. When there is only one small hit type, the processing of steps 061IWS67A to S68A may be omitted.

Further, when the small hit is not made in step 061IWS65A, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS69A). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is a probability change state (high probability state)), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In this example, when the process of step 061IWS69A (and step 061IWS69B described later) is executed and the probability change state (high probability state) is reached, the time saving determination process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is performed. It is decided to leave it as it is without shortening the time without doing.

If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is in a low probability state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not to make a time saving loss determination. A lottery process is performed based on a random number, and it is determined whether or not the time reduction is lost (step 061IWS70A). In this case, it is decided that the time reduction will be lost with a probability of about 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

In this example, when the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state), the time reduction frequency is not updated (see steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A described later), which is substantially invalid. The time saving is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, when the time saving state (high base state) is set, the time saving deviation determination process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is not executed, and the time saving is performed as it is. It may be configured to be determined in.

Further, for example, among the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving, in the case of the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving deviation of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is determined. In the case of the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss, the time saving determination process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) may be executed without executing the process. That is, the time reduction may not occur in the case of the time reduction via the relief time reduction, and the time reduction may occur in the case of the time reduction state via the jackpot and the time reduction state via the time reduction deviation.

When multiple types of time reduction deviations are provided and the advantages (for example, the number of time reductions) are configured to be different, for example, a value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area is supported. Determine the type as the type that is out of time. Further, in this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the first start winning determination process (step S101A) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer, and determines the time saving type. Further, in this case, in addition to the large hit type determination and the small hit type determination, the determination process may be performed using a common type determination random number in the time saving type determination.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 061IWS71A). In this case, for example, if it is decided to use the 6R jackpot A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "1", and if it is determined to be the 6R jackpot B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "3". If it is decided to use 6R jackpot C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "5", and if it is decided to use 6R jackpot D, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "7". If it is decided to make a small hit, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be out of time, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "2". If it is decided and it is decided that it is out of order (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as "-". Further, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72A).

Then, in step 061IWS89A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89A).

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the relief variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091A).

When the relief fluctuation flag is set, that is, when the relief fluctuation time is satisfied, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092A) to determine the fluctuation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the variation pattern table E for the first special symbol for when the relief time reduction is established shown in FIG. 11-3 (B) is selected (step 061IWS17093A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717A.

If the relief variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710A). If the probability variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the low probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 11-2 (A). The first special symbol variation pattern table A for the low probability / low base state shown in is selected (step 061IWS1712A). If the high base flag is set (that is, low probability / high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses FIG. 11-3 (D) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) Is selected for the first special symbol variation pattern table D for the low probability / high base state (step 061IWS1713A).

If the probability variation flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1714A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the high probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B). The first special symbol variation pattern table B for the high probability / low base state shown in is selected (step 061IWS1715A). If the high base flag is set (that is, in the high probability / high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C). The first special symbol variation pattern table C for the high probability / high base state shown in is selected (step 061IWS1716A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 has a variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS17093A, 061IWS1712A, S1713A, S1715A, S1716A, and a variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3 should be used (step 061IWS1717A).

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 061IWS1717A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 061IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 061IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 061IWS1707A).

By executing the above processing, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the variation pattern table for the first special symbol is executed. B is selected and the variation display of the long variation is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a state other than the high probability / low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation display of the variation time is executed. Further, in the case of the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern table E for the first special symbol is selected, and the variation display dedicated to the relief time reduction is executed.

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 11-9 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not been transmitted yet, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 061IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 061IWS1123A), controls to send the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1123A). Step 061IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

If the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is terminated as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y of step 061IWS1125A) or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y of step 061IWS1126A), the CPU 103 is the third to the effect control CPU 120. 1 Control is performed to send a compulsory symbol confirmation designation command (step 061IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag or the first small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag or the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS1125A to S1126A and S1129A, in this feature unit 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In such a case, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped so that a situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs at the same time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 061IWS1129A. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol.

In this example, when the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the stop symbol of the variation display that shortens the relief time, the control for transmitting the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not performed. Further, even when the stop symbol of the variation display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not performed (steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B, which will be described later). See S1129B). That is, in this example, even if the relief time is shortened by executing the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the one Do not forcibly stop the variable display of the special symbol of.

In this example, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped regardless of the display result. However, it is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit, or when it is a big hit. In addition, in the case of a jackpot type (for example, 6R jackpot B) having a high degree of advantage, the variation display of the first special symbol may not be forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol variation process may be terminated as it is. .. In this case, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126) based on the fact that the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the small hit game. Move to. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 061IWS1120A, the processing of steps 061IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 061IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a large hit with a high advantage, is being executed, the first is performed during the small hit game. The update of the fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit is performed. Even if there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 061IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
11-10 and 11-11 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 061IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013A).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 061IWS5617A to S5621A and S5617B to S5621B, the time saving state (100th, 200th, or 800th; see FIG. 11-1) is started. By ending the low probability / high base state and shifting to the normal state (low probability / low base state) and executing the processes of steps 061IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B, the predetermined times (100th time, 200th time) The right-handed display 26 is turned off at the end of the variation display of the 800th time or the 800th time (see FIG. 11-1).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 061IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag indicating that the big hit is started (step 061IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2018A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. It may be configured to start lighting the display 26.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 061IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 061IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step 061IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

In step 061IWS2027A, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2027A).

If the first small hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020A), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time (step 061IWS2030A). It should be noted that whether or not the case is determined to be out of time can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 061IWS72A.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031A). Then, when the high base flag is set (that is, in the low probability / high base state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS2036A.

When the high base flag is not set (in this example, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the time reduction does not occur, so in the normal state (low probability / low base state)), the CPU 103 performs the time reduction. The high base flag is set based on the occurrence of the loss (step 061IWS2032A). Further, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the high base number counter (step 061IWS2033A).

In this example, when a time reduction deviation occurs in the normal state (low probability / low base state) due to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described later), the time reduction state (low probability / high) of 100 times of time reduction occurs. When the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled and the time reduction occurs, the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is continued and the time reduction count (that is, the value of the high base count counter) is changed. Not updated.

In this example, the number of time reductions is not updated when the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) including the relief time reduction by the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described later). It is configured. With such a configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to secure the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player (for example, to suppress the investment amount of the player).

In this example, the number of time reductions (that is, the value of the high base number counter) is not updated when the time reduction occurs in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state). Not limited to this, for example, when the time reduction occurs (or in the time reduction state) in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) via the jackpot or the time reduction via the time reduction state (low probability / high base state). When the remaining number of times is less than 100 times due to the time reduction loss), the time reduction number (that is, the value of the high base number counter) is updated and controlled to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) of 100 times. May be done.

In step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described later), a value corresponding to a plurality of types of time reduction times may be configured to be set in the high base number counter. For example, if the time reduction is missed the first time, "100" is set in the high base count counter, and if the time reduction is lost the second time, "200" is set in the high base count counter. You may.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described later), a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined by the lottery process is used as a high base number counter. It may be configured to be set. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 90% and 200 times with a probability of 10%. When the number of time reductions is determined by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2034A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36A.

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS2034A to S2035A (and steps 061IWS2034B to S2035B described later), in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when the time reduction occurs.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2036A).

In this example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is not set to "800" (that is, the remaining number of times until the relief time is not reset) is not set when the time reduction is lost, but the configuration is limited to such a configuration. Instead, set the value of the relief time reduction counter to "800" (that is, reset the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction) even when the time reduction occurs, such as when a big hit occurs or a relief time reduction occurs. May be good.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-11, in this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, and when the time reduction is lost, the player is on the right side of the game area. It is configured to be able to execute a right-handed notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, the gate notification that prompts the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may.

In addition, right-handed notification and gate notification are not executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, and right-handed notification and gate notification are executed when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening in that state. (In this case, since it is in the gate waiting state, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the change display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and it becomes the first hold memory). You may.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / low base state) (that is, when there is a possibility that the right-handed operation is performed), the recognition degree May be configured to give a left-handed notification to the player to urge the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area by means of a low-value mode (for example, low-volume sound output or small screen display). .. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (or the special winning opening provided on the right side of the gaming area) is detected in the normal state (low probability / low base state) (that is, the right-handed operation is intended). If it is presumed that this is done in a certain manner), the left-handed notification may be performed in a mode with a high degree of recognition (for example, a loud sound output or a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in an manner in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls on the right side of the game area such as the passing gate 41 or the second start winning opening reaches a certain number. Further, the passing gate 41 provides a left-handed notification when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), and is provided on the right side of the second start winning opening (or the game area). When a specific number (for example, one) or more of a specific number (for example, one) or more, which is less than a predetermined number, is detected in the special winning opening), the left-handed notification may be performed.

In the feature unit 116IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passing gate 41 or the second start winning opening (or the game area) is displayed. When the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening provided on the right side is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
11-12 and 11-14 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol normal processing in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 061IWS50B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 061IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 061IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 061IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 061IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 061IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS5601B). If the probability change flag is set, that is, if it is a probability change state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B.

When the probability change flag is not set, that is, in the low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data to reduce the relief time. Control is performed to transmit the number 1 designated command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5607B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" in the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the total number of variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the high base state. (Step 061IWS5608B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief variation flag indicating that the variation display satisfies the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5609B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS5610B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5610B). 061IWS5611B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. The command 957F (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614B). Next, in the game control microcomputer 100, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, Or 800 times) (step 061IWS5615B). If the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and the relief time reduction count 2 Control is performed to send the designated command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 061IWS5618B). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 061IWS5619B). If the value of the high base count counter does not reach "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set (step 061IWS5620B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 061IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B without performing the processing after step 061IWS58B. As a result, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 061IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 061IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether or not a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step 061IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 061IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a hit determination random number is a jackpot if it matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

When it is decided to make a big hit (step 061IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS61B). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 061IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 061IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

If the big hit is not made in step 061IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 061IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 061IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS65B). Step 061IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 061IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 061IWS68B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B. As for the small hit type, a plurality of types may be provided so that the opening pattern (that is, the ease of winning) of the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning opening) is different, or only one may be provided. .. When there is only one small hit type, the processing of steps 061IWS67B to S68B may be omitted.

Further, when the small hit is not made in step 061IWS65B, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS69B). If the probability change flag is set, that is, if it is a probability change state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In this example, when the processing of step 061IWS69B is executed, in the case of a probabilistic change state (high probability state), the time reduction deviation determination processing of step 061IWS70B is not performed, and the processing is performed as it is without time reduction. It is determined.

If the probability variation flag is not set, that is, in a low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving is lost, and a random number for determining the time saving. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (step 061IWS70B). In this case, it is decided that the time reduction will be lost with a probability of about 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 061IWS71B). In this case, for example, if it is decided to use the 6R jackpot A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "1", and if it is determined to be the 6R jackpot B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "3". If it is decided to use 6R jackpot C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "5", and if it is decided to use 6R jackpot D, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "7". If it is decided to make a small hit, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be out of time, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "2". If it is decided and it is decided that it is out of order (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as "-". Further, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72B).

Then, in step 061IWS89B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89B).

(Second fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 11-15 is a flowchart showing the second variation pattern setting process in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the second variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the relief variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091B).

When the relief fluctuation flag is set, that is, when the relief fluctuation time is satisfied, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092B) to determine the fluctuation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the variation pattern table C for the second special symbol for when the relief time reduction is established shown in FIG. 11-4 (C) is selected (step 061IWS17093B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717B.

If the relief variation flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710B). If the probability change flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711B). If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the high probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 is used as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 11-4 (A). The second special symbol variation pattern table A for the high probability / low base state shown in is selected (step 061IWS1712B). When the probability variation flag is not set (N in step 061IWS1710B) or when the high base flag is set (Y in step 061IWS1711B), the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the second special symbol variation pattern table B for times other than the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (B) is selected (step 061IWS1713B).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1712B and S1713B and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in 11-4 is to be used (step 061IWS1717B).

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704B).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the second special symbol is determined in step 061IWS1717B, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 061IWS1705B), and the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 061IWS1706B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process (step 061IWS1707B).

By executing the above processing, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol is executed. A is selected and the normal fluctuation display of the fluctuation time is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a state other than the high probability / low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the variation display of the long variation is executed. Further, in the case of the variation display of the second special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern table C for the second special symbol is selected, and the variation display dedicated to the time when the relief time reduction is established is executed.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and it is neither a big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor a small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). ..

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not been transmitted yet, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 061IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 061IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1123B). Step 061IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 061IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is terminated as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 061IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 061IWS11256). The CPU 103 controls to transmit the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 061IWS1130B).

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B and S1129B, in this feature unit 116IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In such a case, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped so that a situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs at the same time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 061IWS1129B. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol.

In this example, if the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped regardless of the display result. However, it is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit and a high advantage is a big hit. In the case of the type (for example, 6R jackpot C), the variation display of the second special symbol may not be forcibly stopped, and the second special symbol variation process may be terminated as it is. In this case, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126) based on the fact that the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and the small hit game. Move to. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 061IWS1120B, the processing of steps 061IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 061IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probable variable jackpot, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a miss or a small hit is performed. Even if there is, the second special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 061IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

In this example, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the player plays a game in order to make the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening win a game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol. In order to launch the game ball (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the area, in principle, the game ball wins a prize at the second start winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the second special symbol Although the variation display is not performed, the player intentionally displays the variation of the second special symbol, which has a higher advantage than the variation display of the first special symbol even if the player mistakenly launches the ball (or even if a long variation is executed). (Aiming) The second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. That is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed in the variable display not intended by the player, or the player may intentionally aim at the second start winning opening.

Therefore, in this example, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed. It is configured so that the out-of-order symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the one special symbol. For example, in a normal state (low probability / low base state), even if a player unintentionally wins a prize in the second start winning opening and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is executed. If the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of is forcibly stopped at the missed symbol. In addition, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the player intentionally performs a launch operation (right-handed) aiming at winning the second start winning opening, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation (for example, the fluctuation time is 10 minutes), the fluctuation efficiency is extremely poor. Then, during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed from the symbol. It will be stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot symbol from being derived and displayed in the unintended variable display of the special symbol, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional capture.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
11-17 and 11-18 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 061IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 061IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag (step 061IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 061IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2018B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of step 061IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a big hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 061IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 061IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step 061IWS2026B). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2027B).

If the second small hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time (step 061IWS2030B).

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031B). Then, when the high base flag is set (that is, in the low probability / high base state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS2036B.

When the high base flag is not set (that is, in the normal state (low probability / low base state)), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of the time saving deviation (step). 061IWS2032B). Further, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the high base number counter (step 061IWS2033B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2034B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36B.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2036B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2037B).

(External output signal)
FIG. 11-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output externally from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this example, in step S23, a process of outputting a signal as shown in FIGS. 11-19 to an external device such as a hall management computer is performed. As shown in FIGS. 11-19, in this example, as external output signals, the jackpot 1 signal, the jackpot 2 signal, the jackpot 3 signal, the jackpot 4 signal, the fluctuation stop signal, the security signal, the door opening signal, the prize ball signal, and An out-ball signal is output. Of these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is externally output during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is externally output during the jackpot game and the high base state. Further, the jackpot 3 signals are signals that are externally output during the symbol determination period of the time saving deviation. Further, the jackpot 4 signals are signals that are externally output at the start of the variation display that shortens the relief time. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol fixing period. The security signal is a signal that is output externally when an error is detected. The door opening signal is a signal output externally when the door opening is detected. The prize ball signal is a signal that is output externally when 10 prize balls are issued. The out-ball signal is a signal that is output externally when 10 out-balls are detected. In an external device such as a hall management computer, the number of big hits can be measured by one big hit signal, the number of consecutive villas can be measured by one big hit signal and two big hit signals, and the high base control via the time saving loss by three big hit signals. It is possible to measure the number of times, and it is possible to measure the number of high-base control via the relief time reduction by 4 big hit signals.

In this example, in addition to the case of shifting to the high base state at the end of the big hit game, the time saving loss symbol may be derived and displayed because the time saving loss symbol may be shifted to the high base state even when it is derived and displayed. If so, the external output of the jackpot 3 signal is started at the end of the symbol determination period. In addition, even if the relief time is shortened, the state may shift to the high base state. Therefore, when the variation display that shortens the relief time is executed, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal starts at the start of the variation display. Will be done. For example, in the case of shifting to the high base state triggered by the derivation display of the time-saving out-of-time symbol, the signal is output from a dedicated terminal different from the terminal that outputs the jackpot signal 2, and the time-saving is shortened. It may be possible to externally identify that the time saving state has been started when the outlier symbol is derived and displayed. Also, for example, the jackpot 2 signal is externally output during the jackpot game and during the high probability / high base state, and the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are at the start of the low probability / high base state (or low probability / high base). It may be output to the outside during the state) so that the high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state can be distinguished externally.

In this example, when the relief time is shortened, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started in response to the start of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened, and the variation occurs at the start of the symbol determination period in response to the end of the variation display. A stop signal is output externally. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal that can be specified to be controlled to a high base state based on the shortened relief time to the outside at an appropriate timing. Further, when the jackpot 4 signal and the fluctuation stop signal are output, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omission outside. Further, the number of times the relief time is shortened can be specified externally by outputting the big hit 4 signal. In this way, in an external device such as a hall management computer, it is possible to specify the trigger, timing, and number of times controlled to a high base state. Therefore, for example, the relief time reduction arrival rate and the number of relief times in actual operation have been reached. It is possible to analyze the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming store, such as what kind of customer base the player is.

In this example, when the variable display that shortens the relief time is started, the high base flag is set and the state shifts to the time saving state (low probability / high base state). For example, the relief time is shortened. When the variable display that becomes The external output of the jackpot 4 signal may be started when the high base flag is set and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is entered.

The big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output even during the big hit game. Further, in this example, a case where different external output signals (3 big hit signals and 4 big hit signals) are output for the case where the time reduction is missed and the case where the relief time is shortened is shown, but the external output signal for both purposes is shown. May be configured to output.

Further, the big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output at the timing after the fluctuation stop signal during the symbol determination period is output.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the missing symbol, and a big hit 3 signal may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. The fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period, and the jackpot 4 signal may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, when the fluctuation stop signal and the big hit 3 signal or the big hit 4 signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being dropped externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output even in the high base state via the time saving deviation. Further, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously output even in the high base state via the relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably discriminate the type of time reduction even in the high base state.

(Transition of game state)
Next, the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described. FIG. 11-20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state transitions in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the first embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variation time, whereas the variation display of the second special symbol is long. It is executed with fluctuation. Further, since the base state is low, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened is low. Therefore, in order to make the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the left side of the game area and launches the game ball (left). Hit). Therefore, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the starting prize is mainly generated in the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 6R big hit A or a 6R big hit B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / after the end of the jackpot game. It shifts to the low base state (first probability variation state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when 6R jackpot A occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs or a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). ), The low probability / high base state is maintained until the end of the variable display (see steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, even if the pattern is out of order in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / high base state is obtained when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. (See steps 061IWS2032A, S2032B). Furthermore, even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit game, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit). It is controlled to a low probability / high base state (see steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B).

When shifting to the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the normal variation time, while the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the long variation. To. Further, since the base state is low, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened is low. Therefore, in order to make the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the second special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball (right). Hit). Therefore, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the starting prize is mainly generated in the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning opening, and the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a high probability / low base state, a 6R big hit C or a 6R big hit D mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot C occurs in a high probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high again after the jackpot game ends. / The low base state (first probability variation state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2253 to S2260). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R jackpot D occurs in a high probability / low base state, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state) after the end of the jackpot game, and has a high probability until the next jackpot occurs. / The high base state (second probability change state) is maintained (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2274).

When shifting to the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long fluctuation. To. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently opened. Therefore, in order to make the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball ( Right-handed). Therefore, in the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), the start winning is mainly generated in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state, a 6R big hit A or a 6R big hit B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a high probability / high base state, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / after the end of the jackpot game. It shifts to the low base state (first probability variation state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R jackpot A occurs in a high probability / high base state, the game shifts to a low probability / high base state after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs or a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example). ), The low probability / high base state is maintained until the end of the variable display (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286, S2288).

When shifting to the low probability / high base state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long fluctuation. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently opened. Therefore, in order to make the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball ( Right-handed). Therefore, in the low probability / high base state, the start winning is mainly generated in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / high base state, a 6R big hit A or a 6R big hit B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability / high base state, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / after the end of the jackpot game. It shifts to the low base state (first probability variation state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Further, when a 6R jackpot A occurs in a low probability / high base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state again after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs or a predetermined number of times (200 in this example). The low probability / high base state is maintained until the variation display of (times) is completed (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286 and S2288).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the low probability / high base state, when the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit game, the next big hit does not occur and the number of fluctuations is 800 times. (When) is reached, the time is controlled again to a low probability / high base state of 800 times (see steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5607B to S5608B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the low probability / high base state, when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed a predetermined number of times in total, the low probability / high base state is executed. And shift to the low probability / low base state (normal state).

Specifically, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the time saving deviation, when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total, it is low. It ends the probability / high base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A, S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the jackpot generated in the low base state, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total. , Ends the low probability / high base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288, S5617A to S5620A, S5617B to S5620B). In addition, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the jackpot generated in the high base state, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 200 times in total. , Ends the low probability / high base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2287, S5617A to S5620A, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the relief time reduction, the low probability / high when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed 800 times in total. It ends the base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, S5617B to S5620B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), the 6R jackpot C is obtained and the high probability / low base state (first probability change state) is controlled again. However, since it becomes a 6R jackpot D and is controlled to a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), even if a jackpot occurs, it will be in the probability variation state again with a 100% probability. Therefore, in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), it can be said that the occurrence of at least two more big hits is guaranteed during the probability change state (two loops). On the other hand, in the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), if the 6R jackpot B is reached, the probability change state is controlled to the high probability / low base state and the probability change state continues, but if the 6R jackpot A is reached, the probability is low. It shifts to the probability / high base state and the probability change state ends. Therefore, in the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), it can be said that only one big hit is guaranteed to occur during the probability change state (one loop).

In this example, the case where 6R big hits A to D, which are all 6 round big hits, is provided as the big hit type, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, the case where the 6R jackpot A is controlled to the low probability / high base state is shown, but even if the same low probability / high base state is controlled, the number of rounds is shown. 4R jackpot A, which is a 4-round jackpot, or 10R jackpot A, which is a 10-round jackpot, may be provided. Similarly, for example, even when controlled to the same high probability / high base state, a 4R jackpot D for a 4-round jackpot or a 10R jackpot D for a 10-round jackpot may be provided. Often, various aspects are conceivable.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19, in this example, a low probability / low base state (normal state), a low probability / high base state, and a high probability / high base state (first state). (2 Probability change state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long fluctuation. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (or is more likely to be executed) in a shorter fluctuation time than the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, in this example, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / high base state, and the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), the variation display of the first special symbol is the second special. It is a state in which the ratio of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the symbol is high (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as the first shortened state). In this example, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / high base state, and the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), which are the first shortened states, the first special symbol is used. The ratio of the fluctuation display having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is 100%, but the configuration is not limited to such a ratio. For example, in the first shortened state, the ratio of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is lower than 100%, but at least the second shortened state described later. It may be configured to be higher than.

Further, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed with a long variation, while the variation display of the second special symbol is a normal variation. Runs in time. In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (or is more likely to be executed) in a shorter fluctuation time than the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the ratio of the variation display of the second special symbol to the variation display of the shorter fluctuation time than the variation display of the first special symbol is high ( Hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as a second shortened state). In this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), which is the second shortened state, the variation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation display of the first special symbol. The ratio is 100%, but the configuration is not limited to such a ratio. For example, in the second shortened state, the ratio of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is lower than 100%, but at least than the first shortened state. It may be configured to be high.

In this example, in the first shortened state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is mainly executed in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and in the second shortened state, the second special symbol is mainly displayed. In response to the variation display, the image display device 5 executes the variation display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, in this example, even if the relief time is shortened by executing the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , The variable display of one of the special symbols is not forcibly stopped. In such a configuration, for example, in a normal state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variation, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the relief time reduction is established, and the relief time reduction ( When controlled to a high base state), the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is continued without being forcibly stopped. Here, as control for shortening the relief time (high base state), control for increasing the probability of hitting a normal symbol, control for shortening the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening). In addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). When the control related to the special symbol (controlling to the second shortened state with a high ratio) is performed, the fluctuation time is shortened until the variation display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, the variation time is 10 minutes) is completed. The variation display of the second special symbol that has been performed (that is, the variation efficiency has been improved) cannot be executed, and the benefit of the relief time reduction cannot be obtained. In such a state, even if the relief time is controlled to be shortened, the progress of the game is significantly delayed and the interest is reduced.

Therefore, in this example, when the relief time reduction is established, as the control of the relief time reduction (high base state), in addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the control for shortening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is performed (that is, the first special symbol is controlled). Control related to the special symbol, that is, the first shortened state (in this example, the low probability / high base state) is controlled in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has a higher ratio of the fluctuation display having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Is configured to be done. With such a configuration, when the relief time reduction is established, it is controlled to the first shortened state (low probability / high base state), so even if the fluctuation display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol being executed is continued. , The variation display of the first special symbol whose variation time is shortened (that is, the variation efficiency is improved) can be executed, and the benefit of the relief time reduction can be obtained. In addition, the game can be smoothly advanced when the relief time is controlled to be short, and the interest can be improved.

The fluctuation display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol being executed is continued even after the transition to the relief time reduction (high base state) of the first shortened state, but the fluctuation time is shortened. When a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of, the player is forcibly stopped at the missed symbol (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 061IWS1125B and S1129B).

(Example of game state control)
Next, an example of controlling the gaming state will be described. FIG. 11-21 is a time chart for explaining a control example of the gaming state in the first embodiment.

Of FIGS. 11-21, in FIG. 11-21 (A), in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variation display of the second special symbol, which is out of time, is started, and the second special symbol is displayed. An example of controlling the gaming state when the variation display (missing (no time reduction)) of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started during the execution of the variation display is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started (T1 timing), the time reduction state (low probability / low base state) is changed to the time reduction state (low). Control to shift to the probability / high base state) is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the misaligned symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol in which the relief time is shortened (T2 timing), but at this time, the second special symbol being executed is displayed. The out-of-order symbol is not forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established after the relief time reduction is established and the state is shifted to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) via the relief time reduction. The time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started before the fluctuation display (T3 timing), but at this time, the time reduction number is not updated due to the time reduction deviation (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). ). That is, the time saving state due to the relief time saving, which has a higher number of times of working hours than the time saving loss and has a high advantage, is maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol for which the relief time reduction is established is off (no time reduction), but the variation of the first special symbol for which the relief time reduction is established. Even if the display result of the display is out of time, the control of the game state does not change. Specifically, when the variation display (time reduction loss) of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started (T1 timing), the time reduction state (low probability / high) is changed from the normal state (low probability / low base state). Control to shift to the base state) is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established (T1 timing), but at this time, the time reduction number is not updated due to the time reduction deviation (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). That is, the time saving state due to the relief time saving, which has a higher number of times of working hours than the time saving loss and has a high advantage, is maintained.

Of FIGS. 11-21, FIG. 11-21 (B) shows a control example of the gaming state when the time saving state due to the relief time saving ends at the start of the variation display which is the time saving deviation.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time reduction, the update process of the high base number counter is executed at the start of the fluctuation display that is out of the time reduction, and the value is 0. At (t1 timing), control is performed to end the relief time reduction and shift to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5620A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), when the time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol (t2 timing), the time reduction state due to the time reduction deviation from the normal state (low probability / high base state). ) Is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A).

(Variable display start setting process)
11-22 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 100IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 100IWS802, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates 6R jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has three symbols as stop symbols, which are even-numbered symbols. The combination of (usually a big hit symbol) is determined. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates 6R jackpot B to D, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols (probability variation jackpot symbol). ) Is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols (small hit symbol) of "135" as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols with two left and right symbols is determined. Further, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of decorative symbols of the out of place symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. When a plurality of time-saving missed types are provided, a combination of decorative symbols of the missed symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) may be determined according to the time-saving loss type.

However, in this example, even if the time reduction occurs in the high base state, it is practically invalid. Therefore, when the received display result specification command indicates "time reduction" in the high base state. However, it is not a combination of decorative symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols), but a combination of decorative symbols in the case of "off". In the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, even if the time reduction deviation occurs in the high base state, the special symbol corresponding to the time reduction deviation is displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) that reminds us of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. Also, among the jackpot symbols, the stop symbol (combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right are all the same odd-numbered symbols) reminiscent of the probability variation jackpot is called the probability variation jackpot symbol. Also, among the jackpot symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right are all the same even-numbered symbols) that reminds us of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution setting of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts and an effect image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed when the count number becomes "0". In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is executed. You may set the execution of.

In this example, the advance notice effect can be executed in both the case where the display result is a big hit and the case where the display result is a big hit, and the advance notice effect is performed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a big hit. It is configured to be executed at a high rate. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect.

In such a configuration, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, relief). It is configured so that the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is lower when the display result is out of alignment than the period (the period in which the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the notice effect is executed in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) but the big hit is not achieved. Can be done. As for the look-ahead notice effect, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the relief). It may be configured so that the rate of executing the look-ahead notice effect is lower when the display result is out of alignment than the period (the period during which the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10).

Further, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less), an effect suggesting that the relief time is shortened (for example, a countdown effect) can be executed. In this case, by limiting the execution of the timer effect as the advance notice effect at this time, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counters and prevent them from interfering with each other.

Further, in this example, the advance notice effect can be executed depending on the red effect mode (for example, the red effect image is displayed) and the blue effect mode (for example, the blue effect image is displayed). In the case of a big hit, the rate of executing the advance notice effect is higher in the case of the red effect than in the case of the loss. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect of the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the number of remaining times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, relief). When the display result is out of alignment, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is lower than that in the period when the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10). With such a configuration, the interest when the notice effect is executed by the red effect mode in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is not a big hit. Can be suppressed. As for the look-ahead notice effect, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the relief). When the display result is out of alignment, the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect in a mode with high expectation may be lower than the period (the period in which the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10).

If multiple types of advance notice effects (and look-ahead advance notice effects) with different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, only the types of advance notice effects (and look-ahead advance notice effects) with high jackpot expectations will be saved in a short time. In this example, the execution may be restricted during a predetermined period (in this example, a period in which the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). For example, when the jackpot expectation is classified into five stages, the execution may be restricted only to the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead advance notice effect) of the type in which the jackpot expectation is the fourth stage or higher. Further, for example, when the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead advance notice effect) suggesting that the time reduction is out of order is configured to be executable, the predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the remaining time until the relief time reduction) is enabled. In the period (the number of times is 10 or less), the execution of the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead advance notice effect) suggesting that the time is shortened may be restricted.

Further, for example, even if the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, if a variable display that is a big hit or a time reduction is executed, the execution of the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead advance notice effect) is not restricted. May be good.

Further, in the time saving state due to the relief time saving, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect or the advance notice effect may be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). It may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution rate of, or it may reduce (or not execute) the execution rate of the type of advance notice effect having a high expectation. Is a value larger than the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction, that is, it is a hold memory stored before reaching the fluctuation of the relief time reduction, and the line is controlled after being controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. It may be configured to limit (prohibit) the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation. Thereby, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that straddles before and after the control of the relief time reduction is restricted. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect in the production. Even if the number of reserved memories is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, the time is shortened (for example, via a jackpot). In the case of the time saving state or the time saving state via the time saving deviation), it may be possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect for the reserved storage corresponding to the fluctuation performed after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0 is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 0. It can be judged.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time reduction rush effect that notifies that the time reduction state is controlled by the relief time reduction (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player at an appropriate timing that the relief time is controlled to be controlled to the time reduction state by the time reduction rush effect, and it is possible to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rushing masquerading effect that notifies that the display result will be a big hit after executing an effect having the same mode as the time-saving rushing effect (. Step 100 IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, once the player recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be given a surprise. You can improve your interest.

In this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the time reduction rushing pretending effect is executed using the dedicated fluctuation pattern (second fluctuation pattern #M). Not limited to such an aspect, for example, a full rotation effect (that is, a big hit is confirmed) that fluctuates while the three decorative symbols are aligned, which is not executed except when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, is executed. You may do it. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a surprising and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the big hit as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time is specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is out of order when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, a dedicated variation pattern for the relief time reduction deviation is used. The fluctuation pattern for deviation as usual may be used, or the fluctuation pattern for specifying the reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used. With this configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be shared between when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached and before it is reached, and the data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the next variable display is started, the image display device 5 switches to the background image according to the time saving state (see steps 061IWS56A and S56B), so that the change in the background image is relieved. It is possible to notify that the time reduction is controlled by the time reduction.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, the effect control CPU 120 is used until the relief time is shortened. A process table may be selected that includes a fanning effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, an effect that suggests the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened). Further, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the effect control CPU 120 has a countdown effect (for example, the relief time is shortened) according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. Select a process table that includes an effect effect (for example, an effect in which the effect image changes according to the remaining number of changes until the relief time is shortened). You may do it.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative pattern in the variable mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 108IWS815).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode up to the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving, will be described. FIG. 11-23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode up to the transition to the time saving state in the first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 11-23, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-23, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), when the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time is stopped and then the variation display that shortens the relief time is started, As shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is started. .. At this time, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, when the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), an image display (for example, for example) notifying that the blackout state is eliminated and the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started is started. The display of "chance mode entry" shown in FIG. 11-23 (C) and the output of the effect sound are executed.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, since the time reduction rush effect is executed when the relief time reduction is started, the notification that the time reduction state is controlled based on the establishment of the relief time reduction is executed at an appropriate timing. It can be done and the interest can be improved.

Further, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, when the variation display by the variation pattern (for example, the first variation pattern #M) dedicated to the establishment of the relief time reduction is executed, the time reduction rush effect is executed, so that the relief is performed. It is possible to clearly notify the player that the time reduction state is controlled based on the establishment of the time reduction by the time reduction rush effect.

Further, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is appropriately displayed when the time saving rush effect is executed (that is, when the control of the time saving state by the relief time saving is started). Right-handed notification can be executed.

When the time saving state including the relief time saving ends and the state shifts to the normal state, the left-handed instruction display instructing the left-handed person may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the time-saving rushing effect, notifications that are generally performed during the first ending period, such as warnings for forgetting to remove the prepaid card and warnings for preventing entanglement, may be given, or the logo of the gaming machine maker. May be displayed. In this case, at the time of notification and logo display in the time-saving rushing effect, the notification may be performed in the same manner as the notification in the ending period of the first hit and the logo is displayed, or may be performed in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications and logo displays may not be performed in the time saving rush effect, but may be performed in the ending period of the first big hit after shifting to the time saving state due to the relief time saving.

Further, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, when the time reduction rushing appearance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), it is common with the time reduction rushing effect. In the aspect, a blackout effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is started, and the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 that instructs right-handed is displayed. To. Then, instead of the effect shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), the blackout state is eliminated and the effect of stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol (for example, the combination of the symbols of "777") is executed. After that, it shifts to the big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time reduction, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

In addition, a bonus game is also executed in which the configuration of the feature unit 116IW is controlled to a big hit game based on a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the bonus during a small hit game. When applied to a game machine that is configured to be possible, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the relief time is a small hit, after executing the time saving rushing pretending effect, it is notified that it will be a small hit. May be good.

(Modification 1-3)
Next, the configuration of the modification 1-3 will be described. In this example, in the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established, the time reduction rush effect is configured to notify that the control of the time reduction state (relief time reduction) is started, but the start of the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established. Since the control of the time reduction state (relief time reduction) is sometimes started, the time reduction rush effect may be executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established.

In this case, for example, in the first special symbol normal processing and the second special symbol normal processing, when the value of the relief time reduction counter after updating is "1", immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is established. If the variation flag immediately before relief is set to indicate that it is a variation display and the variation flag immediately before relief is set in the first variation pattern setting process and the second variation pattern setting process, immediately before the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is established. It is determined to be a dedicated variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern corresponding to the first variation pattern # M and the first variation pattern # N) used only for the variation display of. Then, in the variable display start setting process, when the remaining number of times of the relief time reduction is 1, the process table including the time reduction rush effect is selected. By such a process, it is possible to execute the time saving rush effect in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established.

FIG. 11-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode up to the transition to the time saving state in the modified example 1-3 of the first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 11-24, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the modification 1-3 shown in FIGS. 11-24, the time reduction rush effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), after the variation display two times before the variation display that shortens the relief time is stopped, the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. It will be started. However, at this point in time, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is not displayed because the time saving state has not been entered.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (C), an image display (for example, for example) notifying that the blackout state is eliminated and the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started is started. The display of "chance mode entry" shown in FIG. 11-24 (C) and the output of the effect sound are executed. Even at this point, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is not displayed because the time saving state has not been entered.

After that, when the variation display for reducing the relief time is started, the control of the time reduction state is started, so that the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-24 (D).

In the configuration of the modification 1-3 shown in FIGS. 11-24, the time saving rush effect is executed immediately before the relief time reduction is started, so that the player prepares for the right-handed operation in preparation for the start of the relief time reduction. Can be done. Also in such a point, it is possible to execute the notification that the time reduction is controlled based on the establishment of the relief time reduction at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, when the time reduction rush effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern used in other variation displays in the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established (that is, only when the relief time reduction is established). The variation display is performed using the variation pattern). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. For the variation display (variation display immediately before the variation display where the relief time reduction is established) that executes the time reduction rush effect, the variation pattern used in other variation displays (that is, the variation pattern that is not exclusively for the relief time reduction establishment) is used. The variable display may be executed.

Further, in the configuration of the modification 1-3 shown in FIG. 11-24, the time saving rush effect is executed immediately before the relief time reduction is started, but the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is started to display the variation in which the relief time reduction is established. Since it is displayed at the time (that is, when the control of the time saving state by the relief time saving is started), the right-handed notification can be appropriately executed.

In the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, when the display result is a big hit, it may be possible to execute the time reduction rushing pretending effect. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time reduction, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

Further, when the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is executed, or when the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is executed, the configuration that enables the time reduction rush effect and the time reduction rush appearance effect can be executed. , Not limited to the gaming machine having the configuration shown in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, for example, a high probability / low base state (small hit RUSH) in which small hits frequently occur as shown in the second embodiment. It can also be applied to gaming machines having other configurations, such as gaming machines provided with.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described. In this embodiment, the detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and the portion different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

The gaming state in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state). KT state: Normal state), low probability and 1st KT state (low probability / 1st KT state), high probability and 1st KT state (high probability / 1st KT state) There are cases where it is controlled to a high probability and a case where it is controlled to a second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and even if small hits occur. There are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a high base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state among the KT states, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is likely to win the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In the second embodiment, in the variable display of the first special symbol, when the display result is other than the big hit and the time reduction, the ratio of the small hit is higher than that of the small hit (or the loss (no time reduction)). ). That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result is either a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction loss, and the display result is not a loss (no time reduction) (or a small hit rather than a loss (no time reduction)). The ratio is high). However, in the non-KT state (normal state), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit is short, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is made to win a game ball. It is structured so that it is extremely difficult (or virtually impossible to win).

(Transition of gaming state in the second embodiment)
The transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described. FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state transitions in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. First, in this feature unit 116IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, whereas the second special symbol is executed. Since the fluctuation display of is executed with a long fluctuation, the player performs a firing operation (left-handed) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game is completed. It shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / high base state (high probability / high probability /) after the end of the jackpot game. The first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed.

Further, also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the time saving state via the time saving loss and the relief time saving (in this example, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state)). ) Is controlled. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-1, even if the pattern is out of order in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / is in the case where the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. It is controlled to a high base state (low probability / first KT state) (for example, it corresponds to a portion that executes the process of steps 061IWS2032A, S2032B in the first embodiment). Furthermore, even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit game, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit). It is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) (for example, it corresponds to a portion that executes the process of steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, and the first special symbol is executed. The relief time reduction counter can be updated at the timing at which the variation display of the second special symbol is started and the timing at which the variation display of the second special symbol is started (for example, in steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment). Corresponds to the part that executes processing).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in the second embodiment of the feature portion 116IW, the first special While the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed with a long fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, so that the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball. Do (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probable big hit, a 6R probable big hit, or a 2R probable big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total, so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed without the next big hit after the 6R normal big hit occurs and the low probability / high base state is reached, as shown in FIG. 12-1. It shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment as well as in the first embodiment, when the relief time is shortened in the low probability / high base state (after the RAM clear processing or after the RAM clear processing). After the big hit game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the occurrence of the next big hit), it is controlled again to the low probability / high base state (first KT state) of 800 times of time reduction (for example). Corresponds to the portion that executes the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A and S5607B to S5608B in the first embodiment). The number of time reductions in the second embodiment is the remaining number of totals of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the low probability / high base state (first KT state). Corresponds to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment as well as in the first embodiment, in the low probability / high base state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. When the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times in total, the low probability / high base state is terminated and the transition is made to the low probability / low base state (normal state).

For example, when the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled via the time saving deviation, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total. Then, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is terminated and the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state) is performed (for example, steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A in the first embodiment). Corresponds to the part that executes the processes of S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, and S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled via the relief time reduction, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 800 times in total. Then, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is terminated and the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state) is performed (for example, steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A in the first embodiment). Corresponds to the portion that executes the processes of S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, and S5617B to S5620B).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it is configured to be controlled to a low probability / high base state with a time reduction of 50 times, but the first embodiment Similarly, the advantage of the time saving state controlled after the big hit game may be different depending on the game state when the big hit occurs. For example, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a normal state (low base state), it is controlled to a low probability / high base state with 100 time reductions, and if a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a high base state, it is controlled. , The time reduction may be controlled to a low probability / high base state of 200 times. In this case, as in the first embodiment, when the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established is a big hit, it is assumed that the big hit has occurred in the high base state, and the low probability that the number of time reductions is 200 times after the end of the big hit game. / It may be controlled to a high base state (for example, the execution of the jackpot determination module of steps 061IWS59A and S59B in the first embodiment is performed, and the relief time reduction counters of steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B are updated. Corresponds to the part to be executed after the processing and the processing for setting the high base flag). With such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 2R Since the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot is 50%, once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state.

In addition, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). become. Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

Further, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variation time. On the other hand, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variation. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (or is more likely to be executed) in a shorter fluctuation time than the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the ratio of the variation display of the first special symbol to the variation display of the shorter fluctuation time than the variation display of the second special symbol is high. This is the first shortened state. In the second embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state) in which the first shortened state is obtained, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol has a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. The display ratio may be configured to be, for example, 100%, or may be configured to be lower than 100%, but at least higher than the second shortened state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) and the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT). In the state) and the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed with a long fluctuation, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed with a normal fluctuation time. Will be done. In other words, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (or is more likely to be executed) in a shorter variation time than the variation display of the first special symbol. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / low base state (second KT). The state) is the second shortened state in which the ratio of the variation display of the second special symbol to the variation display of the shorter variation time than the variation display of the first special symbol is high. In the second embodiment, the second shortened state is a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and a high probability /. In the low base state (second KT state), the ratio of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is configured to be, for example, 100%. It may be configured to be lower than 100%, but at least higher than the first shortened state.

In the second embodiment, when the relief time reduction is established in the normal state, the relief time reduction control includes a control for increasing the probability of hitting a normal figure, a control for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and a variable winning ball device 6B (second). In addition to the control related to the normal symbol, which is to lengthen the opening time of the start winning opening), the control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is larger than the variation display of the first special symbol). The control related to the special symbol is performed, that is, the control is performed in the second shortened state in which the ratio of the fluctuation display of the short fluctuation time is high). That is, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) (for example, it corresponds to a portion for executing the process of steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B in the first embodiment).

However, also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol Even if the relief time is shortened by executing the variation display, the variation display of one of the special symbols is not forcibly stopped. In such a configuration, for example, in a normal state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variation, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the relief time reduction is established, and the relief time reduction ( When controlled to a high base state), the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is continued without being forcibly stopped, and the variation display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, the variation time is 10 minutes). It is conceivable that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time has been shortened (that is, the fluctuation efficiency has been improved) cannot be executed until the end of the procedure, and the benefit of the shortened relief time cannot be obtained. Then, in such a state, even if the relief time is controlled to be shortened, the progress of the game is significantly delayed and the interest is reduced.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as described above, in the variable display of the first special symbol, when the display result is other than the big hit and the time reduction, it becomes a small hit (or a small hit rather than the loss (no time reduction)). The ratio is high). That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result is either a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction loss, and the display result is not a loss (no time reduction) (or a small hit rather than a loss (no time reduction)). The ratio is high). Also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display, the missed symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the special symbols (for example, step 061IWS1126A in the first embodiment). Corresponds to the part that executes the processing of S1129A, S1126B, S1129B).

By combining these configurations, in the second embodiment, when the relief time is shortened by executing the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display (long variation) of the second special symbol. As the control of the relief time reduction (high base state), in addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is larger than the variation display of the first special symbol. The control related to the special symbol is performed, that is, the second shortened state (in this example, the control is performed to the low probability / high base state (first KT state)) in which the ratio of the fluctuation display of the short fluctuation time is high. At this time, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is a small hit unless it is a big hit or a time reduction deviation. Then, based on the fact that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display (long variation) of the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped at the missed symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in which the fluctuation time is shortened (that is, the fluctuation efficiency is improved) without waiting for the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation (for example, 10 minutes) to expire. You can benefit from shorter relief times. In addition, the game can be smoothly advanced when the relief time is controlled to be short, and the interest can be improved.

(First special symbol normal processing in variant 2)
12-2 to 12-5 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal processing in the second modification.

In the second modification, the processing of steps 061IWS50A to S56A is the same as those processing shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, in the second modification, since the process of step 061IWS5601A shown in the first embodiment is not executed, the relief time reduction counter update process is executed even in the probabilistic change state (high probability state). Will be done. That is, not only in the non-probability state (low probability state), but also in the probability change state (high probability state), when the fluctuation display is executed, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened uniformly decreases. It is configured in. Therefore, in the second modification, the probability variation flag may be set when the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction becomes “0”.

If the probability change flag is set when the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0" (Y in step 061IWS56061A), that is, if the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state, step 061IWS5701A is set. Transition.

Further, in the second modification, "100" is set in the high base count counter after the probability variation jackpot, and the high base count counter is decremented by 1 by the processing of steps 061IWS5717A to S5719A every time the fluctuation display is executed. Here, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes "0", the probability change flag is set, that is, the probability change even if the probability change state after the big hit game by the probability change big hit reaches 100 fluctuations. If it has not fallen, the process of resetting the high base flag (step 061IWS5620A) is not executed. In this case, the high probability state and the high base state are maintained until the probabilistic fall occurs.

on the other hand, When the value of the high base count counter after subtraction becomes "0" If the probabilistic flag is not set, That is, When the probability change state after the big hit game by the probability change big hit is less than 100 fluctuations and the probability change falls and only the probability change flag is reset (step 061IWS5705A, which will be described later). When the processing of S5711A is executed), Or if it was controlled to a low probability / high base state after a normal jackpot, Reset the high base flag (step 061IWS5620A). By the processing of step 061IWS56191A In variant 2, In the probable change state after the big hit game by the probable big hit If the fluctuation is less than 100 and the fall is probable, The probabilistic state (high probability state) ends immediately, The time saving state (high base state) is continued until 100 fluctuations are reached.

In the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5611A, S5614A to S5616A, S5617A to S5619A, and S5620A to S5621A are the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment. In the second modification, when step 061IWS5621A is completed, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5702A.

In step 061IWS5701A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief time reduction flag indicating that the relief time reduction has been established in the probabilistic state (step 061IWS5701A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS5702A), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

When the probability change flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5702A), the game control microcomputer 100 has a fall determination random number (a random number for jackpot determination or a random number for jackpot type determination) stored in the random number buffer area. A random number dedicated to the fall determination, which is different, is read out, and a fall lottery process is performed based on the random number for the fall determination (061IWS5703A). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the fall determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the probability variation fall lottery. I do. When the game control microcomputer 100 matches the fall determination value, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the probability change state is terminated. In the second modification, in the process of step 061IWS5703A, it is determined that the probability change state is terminated with a probability of, for example, 1/800.

If the probable change does not fall (does not end the probable change state) (N at 061IWS5704A), the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. When it is determined to end the probabilistic state (Y in step 061IWS5704A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the fluctuation is less than 100 after the big hit game (step 061IWS5705A). For example, by providing a counter capable of counting the number of fluctuations in the probability change state after the big hit game and checking the counter in step 061IWS5705A, it is possible to determine whether the fluctuation is less than 100 after the big hit game.

When the fluctuation is less than 100 after the big hit game (Y in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (step 061IWS5711A) and sets the fan reach A flag indicating that the fan reach A is executed. Set (step 061IWS5713A). After that, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

By the process of step 061IWS5711A, in the modification 2, if the probability change state after the big hit game by the probability change big hit is less than 100 fluctuations and the probability change falls, only the probability change flag is reset. Further, by the process of step 061IWS5713A, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution becomes a big hit or the probable change state ends, the fan reach A for notifying that the probable change fall is executed is executed. To.

If it is not less than 100 fluctuations after the big hit game (N in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the relief time reduction flag is set (step 061IWS5706A), and if it is not set, The probabilistic change flag and the high base flag are reset, and the probabilistic change state and the time saving state are ended (step 061IWS5712A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fan reach A flag indicating that the fan reach A is executed (061IWS5713A).

In this example, it is configured to execute the same fan reach A in the case where the probabilistic fall occurs after 100 fluctuations after the probabilistic jackpot game and the case where the probabilistic fall occurs after 100 fluctuations. For example, in the case of a probabilistic fall with less than 100 fluctuations after the probabilistic big hit game, the probabilistic fall may be notified and then the time saving state may be notified. It is possible to prevent the player from being greatly discouraged due to a probable fall in a short period of time.

When the relief time reduction flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5706A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief time reduction flag (step 061IWS5707A) and sets "800" in the high base count counter (step 061IWS5708A). .. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (061IWS5709A). After that, the fan reach B flag indicating that the fan reach B is executed is set (061IWS5710A), and the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the relief time reduction is established after the probable change fall, it is controlled from the time when the relief time reduction is established to the time reduction state (high base state) due to the relief time reduction, and if the relief time reduction is established before the probability change fall, the probability change fall occurs. If the configuration is controlled to the normal state from a certain point in time, the benefits that can be received depending on the timing of establishment of the relief time reduction will differ greatly, and there is a risk that the relief will be insufficient. Therefore, in the second modification, if the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state by the processing of steps 061IWS5706A to S5708A, the time reduction state is controlled by the relief time reduction when the probability change falls. There is. Therefore, the count of 800 times of time reduction due to the relief time reduction is started not when the relief time reduction is established, but after the probable change falls and the time reduction state is entered. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately receive relief by shortening the relief time.

Further, by the process of step 061IWS5707A, the relief time reduction flag is reset when the relief time reduction flag is controlled to the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction when the probable change falls. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the relief time reduction has been established in the probable change state.

Information indicating the state of the relief time reduction flag is stored in, for example, the RAM 102. Then, when the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time saving flag and the probability change flag are reset. That is, if the RAM clear process is executed when the rescue time reduction is established in the probability change state, the game state becomes the normal state (low probability / low base state) in which the relief time reduction flag is not set. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the relief time reduction has been established in the probable change state.

In the RAM clear processing, the probability change flag is reset, but the relief time reduction flag is maintained, and the probability change flag is not set at the start of fluctuation, but the relief time reduction flag is set. , The relief time may be controlled to a short time (low probability / high base state). That is, if the RAM clear process is executed when the relief time reduction is established and the RAM clear processing is executed, the game state becomes the normal state (low probability / low base state), but when the variation display is started, the relief time is reduced. It may be controlled.

Further, by the processing of step 061IWS5710A, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution becomes a big hit or the probable change fall occurs and the probable change state ends, the probable change fall is once notified, and then the relief time is shortened. A fan reach B is executed to notify that the time is controlled to a short time state (high base state).

As shown in FIG. 12-5, in the modification 2, when the jackpot is determined by the execution of the jackpot determination module, the rescue time reduction flag is reset if the rescue time reduction flag is set (step 061IWS631A). By the process of step 061IWS631A, the information that the relief time reduction is established in the probable change state can be appropriately managed. In addition, it is possible to prevent excessive relief from being performed.

Further, in the second modification, when the jackpot is determined by the execution of the jackpot determination module and the probability variation flag is set (Y in step 061IWS632A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fan reach C. Set the fan reach C flag to indicate execution (061IWS633A).

By the processing of steps 061IWS632A to S633A, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution becomes a big hit or the probable change fall and the probable change state ends, the fan reach C for notifying that the big hit is executed is executed. ..

In the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS57A to S63A and S64A to S89A are the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process of the second modification, it is determined whether or not any of the fan reach A to C is set, and if it is set, the variation pattern for executing the corresponding fan reach is determined. do. Other processes are the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment.

In the second modification, in the second special symbol normal process and the second variation pattern setting process, the same processes as the first special symbol normal process and the first variation pattern setting process are executed. Therefore, in the second modification, it is possible to execute the probabilistic fall lottery and the fan reach in both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the first fluctuation pattern setting process and the second fluctuation pattern setting process, when any of the fan reach A to C is set and the number of fluctuations in the probable change state after the big hit game exceeds 100 fluctuations, the fan is fanned. You may want to perform reach. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12-6, until the number of fluctuations in the probabilistic state after the big hit game reaches 100 fluctuations, a common effect (for example, common effect) regardless of whether or not the probabilistic fall occurs. The background image is displayed) may be executed. That is, the player may not be able to recognize whether or not the fall has occurred up to the 100th fluctuation. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-6, the probability change fall determination effect for notifying whether the probability change has occurred or the probability change is continued at the 100th fluctuation may be executed.

For example, when the probabilistic fall has already occurred, the probabilistic fall determination effect of the aspect of the pattern A for notifying that the probabilistic fall has occurred is executed. Further, when the probabilistic fall has already occurred but the relief time is controlled, the probabilistic change of the mode B of notifying that the relief time is controlled after notifying that the probabilistic fall has occurred. The fall determination effect is executed.
Further, in the case of a big hit at the 100th variation, the probabilistic fall determination effect of the aspect of the pattern C for notifying that the big hit is obtained is executed. Further, when the probabilistic state is continued, the probabilistic fall determination effect of the aspect of the pattern D for notifying that the probabilistic state is continuing is executed.

With the configuration as shown in FIG. 12-6, it is possible to give a feeling of tension to the player in the period after the 100th change in the probable change state and improve the interest.

In the second modification, when the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state, it is configured to notify that the relief time is shortened after being notified that the probability change fall has occurred. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, when the relief time is shortened in the probable change state, it may not be notified at all even if the probable change falls. That is, even if the probable change falls, the notification to that effect is not given or the effect does not change, and the probable change may occur without the player noticing.

(Production example in variant 2)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the fanning reach in the modification 2 will be described. FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the fanning Lee in the modification 2. In addition, in FIG. 12-7, the fanning reach A is in the order of (1), (2), and (3-1), and the fanning reach B is in the order of (1), (2), (3-2), and (4). The effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3-3).

In the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when the left and right decorative symbols are aligned, the ally character 014IW002 and the enemy character 014IW003a are in the reach state as shown in FIG. 12-7 (2). The fan reach to perform the battle is started.

Then, in the case of the fan reach A, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-1), the probabilistic fall image 014IW004a is displayed, which informs that the ally character 014IW002 is defeated in the battle and becomes a probable fall. After that, it shifts to the normal state (low probability / low base state).

In the case of fanned reach B, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-2), the probabilistic fall image 014IW004a that informs that the ally character 014IW002 is defeated in the battle and becomes a probable fall is temporarily displayed. As shown in FIG. 12-7 (4), the character display of "chance mode entry" and the relief time reduction image 014IW004c for notifying that the relief time is controlled are displayed. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 12-7 (4), and for example, the time saving rush effect shown in FIG. 11-23 may be executed. After that, it shifts to the time saving state (low probability / high base state).

In the case of fanning reach C, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-3), a jackpot image 014IW004b is displayed to notify that the ally character 014IW002 wins the battle and becomes a jackpot. After that, it shifts to the big hit game state.

In the second modification, when the relief time reduction is established in the probable change state, the relief time reduction establishment notification is executed to notify that fact. For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-8 (1) and 12-8, the image display device 5 has a "chi" icon 014IW003d indicating that when the relief time reduction is established at the start of the fluctuation, the rescue time is controlled to the chance mode (relief time reduction). It is displayed in a part of. In the relief time reduction notification as shown in FIG. 12-8, for example, when it is determined that the relief time reduction has been established on the main board 11 side, an effect control command indicating that effect is transmitted to the effect control board 12. When the effect control command is received on the effect control board 12, it can be realized by controlling the display of the "chi" icon 014IW003d on a part of the image display device 5. With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the time is controlled to be shortened after the end of the probabilistic state, which can give the player a sense of security and improve the interest.

Note that the relief time reduction establishment notification as shown in FIG. 12-8 is performed not only in the probabilistic state but also when the relief time reduction is established in the normal state or when the relief time reduction is controlled to the time reduction state (or). It may be done by lottery).

(Example of controlling the gaming state in Modification 2)
Next, a control example of the gaming state in the second modification will be described. FIG. 12-9 is a time chart for explaining a control example of the gaming state in the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 12-9 (A), if the relief time reduction is not established in the probability change state by the time of the probability change fall, the probability change flag and the high base flag are reached when the probability change fall occurs (T1 timing). Is reset, and the gaming state shifts from the high probability / high base state to the low probability / low base state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-9 (B), when the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state until the probability change falls, for example, the relief time reduction is established at the t1 timing in FIG. 12-9 (B). If so, the relief time reduction flag is set at the t1 timing. Then, when the probability change falls (t2 timing), the probability change flag and the relief time reduction flag are reset, and the high base flag is maintained. That is, the gaming state shifts from the high probability / high base state to the low probability / high base state.

The configuration shown in the second modification is applicable to both the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. When applied to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, a fall lottery is executed in a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), and if a winner is won, a normal state (low probability / low base) is executed. It may be made to shift to the state). Further, when applied to the configuration of the second embodiment, for example, a fall lottery is executed when the high probability / high base state (first KT state) is reached, and if the player wins, the normal state (low probability / low). You may move to the base state).

It should be noted that both the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Not limited to such a configuration, a configuration in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the order of starting winning, or one of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. The configuration shown in the modification 2 can be applied to the configuration.

Further, the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above have been shown to be applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variation display result, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a character game that controls a big hit game based on a game ball winning (V prize) in a specific area (V prize area) in the character during a small hit game. A configuration for controlling the feature portion 116IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification may be applied.

Further, in the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value set in the relief time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear processing is executed or the jackpot occurs, or the value set in the relief time reduction counter at random may be set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above, information that can specify the number of occurrences of the relief time reduction may be retained. For example, the high base flag set in the second relief time reduction that has been transferred again may be different from the high base flag set in the first relief time reduction.

In the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above, different effects are executed depending on the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief (for example, different background display). Is displayed, or it is determined to have a different fluctuation pattern (variation time)).

Further, in the feature unit 116IW and each modification shown above, in controlling the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the probabilistic control is performed until the next big hit occurs (or until the probable change falls). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in controlling the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, the so-called ST in which the upper limit number of times of the special figure game in which the probability change control is performed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol) is set is set. A configuration for controlling the feature unit 116IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification may be applied to the machine.

Specifically, as a so-called ST machine, the jackpot probability is about 1/100, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation state is controlled at a rate of 100%, and the probability variation control is performed. , 8 times) will be described in the case of applying the configuration for controlling the feature unit 116IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification to the gaming machine having the configuration in which (8 times) is set. In the gaming machine of the ST machine, a plurality of types of jackpots (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, etc.) are provided as display results of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol. When a big hit occurs, it is assumed that the big hit (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) has the highest degree of advantage at a predetermined ratio (for example, 5%). In addition, when the jackpot has the highest degree of advantage, it is controlled to the probability change state (high probability / high base state) after the end of the jackpot game state, and the probability change control is performed 8 times as the upper limit of the special figure game. Shall be set. Then, if a big hit does not occur in the eight special figure games in which the probability variation control is performed, the upper limit number of times in the special figure game in which the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is controlled and the high base control is performed is set. It is assumed that 249 times are set. That is, after the end of the big hit game state, if the next big hit does not occur, it is controlled to the probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes, and then the time reduction state with 249 time reductions (low probability). / High base state) shall be controlled.

Even if the above-mentioned ST machine game machine finishes the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 250 times) in the non-probability change state (low probability state) after the power is turned on to the game machine or after the big hit occurs, the next big hit still occurs. If it does not occur, it is possible to apply a configuration controlled to a time saving state (low probability / high base state) assuming that the relief time saving is established.

When such a configuration is applied, when the jackpot has the highest degree of advantage, it is first controlled to the probability variation state (high probability / high base state) with the probability variation number of 8 times after the end of the jackpot gaming state. At this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is reset (for example, set to "250") due to the occurrence of a big hit. Then, since it is in the probability change state (high probability state), the value of the relief time reduction counter is not updated.

When the probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes is completed without a big hit, the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 249 time reductions is controlled. At this time, since it is a non-probability change state (low probability state), the value of the relief time reduction counter is set every time the special figure game (that is, the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol) is executed. Updated (eg, subtracted by 1).

When the time saving state (low probability / high base state) of 249 times of time saving is completed without the big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state). However, at this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "1". Therefore, when the next special symbol game (variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the relief time reduction is established and the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled. It will be. Here, if there is a hold memory stored in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) of 249 times of time reduction, a special figure game (variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) based on the hold memory. By executing the variable display), the relief time reduction is established and the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the transition to the low base state (normal state), and it is possible to improve the interest.

When the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) ends and the relief time reduction is once controlled to the low base state (normal state), the background image corresponding to the high base state is continuously displayed. You may try to do it. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved storages stored at the end of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time saving is established. If it is determined that the image is large, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. Hereinafter, the normal state controlled after the end of the time reduction state of 249 times of time reduction and before the relief time reduction is established (that is, the reserved memory stored in the time reduction state for a short period of time (for example, the reserved memory stored in the time reduction state) is digested. The normal state) in which the relief time is shortened during the period until it is done) is also called a special normal state to distinguish it from other normal states.

Further, for example, when the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) ends and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is controlled by the relief time reduction. Alternatively, a mode transition effect indicating that the control of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) by the relief time saving may be started may be executed. In this case, after the end of the time saving state (low probability / high base state), the fluctuation display in the low base state (normal state) before the occurrence of the relief time reduction (for example, the fluctuation display immediately after the end of the time reduction state, or the relief time reduction) The mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display immediately before the establishment of the above, or the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display in which the relief time is shortened.

Further, for example, in the above-mentioned ST machine gaming machine, if a jackpot with a low degree of advantage (for example, a 5R probability variation jackpot) is obtained among a plurality of types of jackpots, the next jackpot will be awarded after the jackpot gaming state ends. If it does not occur, it is controlled to a probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes, and then to a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 32 time reductions. That is, in the case of a big hit with a low degree of advantage, even if the time saving state (low probability / high base state) after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) ends, it is in a short period (for example, in the time saving state). It is assumed that the relief time reduction is not established within the period until the stored reserved memory is digested.

In this case, when the number of time reductions controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is 32 (that is, the relief time reduction is not established within a short period of time). Is to execute left-handed notification (for example, display of left-handed instruction display instructing left-handed in the image display device 5) corresponding to the normal state (low probability / low base state) after the end of the final fluctuation in the time-saving state. Then, when the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time), the same left-handed notification may not be executed after the end of the final fluctuation in the time reduction state. That is, the left-handed notification (for example, the display of the left-handed instruction display instructing the left-handed on the image display device 5) may not be executed at the time of transition to the special normal state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player has once transitioned to the low base state (normal state) when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time after the end of the time reduction state. You can improve your interest.

In addition, when the number of time reductions controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is 32 (that is, the relief time reduction is not established within a short period of time). And when the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time), for example, a background specification command, a jackpot start designation command, a jackpot end designation command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 side, etc. By different types of effect control commands, the effect control board 12 distinguishes between those time-saving states, and the effect control (for example, the corresponding background image, character image, story image, etc.) that matches each time-saving state is displayed. , BGM output, etc.) may be performed. The method of distinguishing the time reduction state on the effect control board 12 side is not limited to such a method, and for example, the jackpot type and the number of time reductions after the jackpot game may be specified by the received display result designation command.

When the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time), a left-handed notification (for example, an image display device) is given on the effect control board 12 side after the final fluctuation in the time reduction state is completed. Even if the configuration is such that the left-handed instruction display for instructing left-handedness is not executed in 5, the main board 11 side once shifts to the normal state (that is, left-handed from the right-handed state). The process corresponding to the switching to the state to be performed (for example, turning off the right-handed display 26, stopping the output of the right-handed test signal output as a test signal, changing the firing position designation signal, etc.) is executed. During the transition to the normal state (that is, the special normal state), the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, two jackpot signals) may be temporarily stopped on the main board 11 side. , The external output may be continued. In addition, while continuing the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, 2 jackpot signals), the output of the launch position designation signal output as the test signal is changed (or the output of the right-handed test signal is stopped). ) May be done.

Further, for example, the effect to be executed may be different between the time reduction state (or the time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 249 times) and the normal state (or the normal state other than the special normal state). For example, an effect that suggests that the relief time reduction is established or the number of times until the relief time is established (for example, a countdown effect) can be executed in the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state), while the remaining time reduction is achieved. It may not be executed in the time saving state where the number of times is indicated (or the time saving state where the number of times of time saving is 249 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the above effects can be obtained is not limited to the configuration of the time reduction number of the time reduction state controlled after the probability change state used in the above description and the configuration of the fluctuation number (non-probability change state) in which the relief time reduction is established. .. For example, the number of fluctuations in which the relief time reduction is established (non-probability change state) is larger than the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, and the start winning opening that makes it easier to enter in the time reduction state (for example, the second start). It may be configured to be smaller than (or the same as) the sum of the upper limit storage number (for example, 4) of the special figure game based on the entry into the winning opening). With such a configuration, after the end of the big hit game state, even if it shifts to the low base state (normal state) through the probabilistic change state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state (low probability / high base state). , Since the relief time can be established without generating a new start prize in the low base state (normal state), the player is aware that the player has transitioned to the low base state (normal state) before the relief time is established. It is possible to prevent it from being caused, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, for example, if the number of fluctuations (non-probability change state) in which the relief time reduction is established is smaller (or the same) than the time reduction number in the time reduction state, the time reduction is controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state). Before the state (low probability / high base state) ends, the relief time reduction can be established (that is, the reduction time can be updated by the establishment of the relief time reduction).

In the above-mentioned ST machine, the probability changes after the end of the big hit gaming state, depending on whether a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol or a big hit due to the variable display of the second special symbol. It seems that the number of time reductions controlled through the state (high probability / high base state) is different (or the ratio of the number of advantageous time reductions among multiple types of time reductions is different). It may be configured as. In this case, for example, when a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, a time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled via a probability change state (high probability / high base state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. ) Is 32 times (or 32 times out of 249 times is high), and when a big hit occurs due to the variation display of the second special symbol, after the end of the big hit game state , The number of time reductions controlled through the probabilistic state (high probability / high base state) is 249 times (or the number of time reductions is 32 times and 249 times out of 249 times). The ratio is high).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs (or the number of rounds of a plurality of types) depending on whether the jackpot due to the variable display of the first special symbol occurs or the jackpot due to the variable display of the second special symbol occurs. It may be configured so that the ratio of the number of advantageous rounds is different). For example, when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of rounds in the big hit game state is 5 rounds (or 5 rounds, and the ratio of 5 rounds out of 10 rounds is high), and the 2nd special symbol When a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state may be 10 rounds (or 5 rounds, or 10 out of 10 rounds is high). With such a configuration, the advantage can be different between the game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, which improves the interest. Can be made to.

Further, also in the above-mentioned ST machine gaming machine, the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time saving are also performed. ) And, different variation pattern tables may be used. For example, in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time reduction, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state). It is also possible to use a variation pattern table in which the rate determined by the variation pattern is high (and, for example, the rate determined by the variation pattern in which reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) is executed at the time of deviation is low). .. With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed. In addition, for example, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the rate of deviation in reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) is low, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the feature unit 116IW and the gaming machine of each modified example shown above, for example, as a jackpot type, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is continued until the next jackpot occurs. Probability variation jackpot, non-probability variation jackpot A controlled by a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 100 time reductions, and non-probability control by a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 249 time reductions. Probability change jackpot B is provided, and if the next jackpot does not occur even after 250 fluctuation displays are completed in the non-probability change state after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the jackpot occurs, the relief time is shortened. It may be configured to do so. That is, it is controlled to the time reduction state until just before the relief time reduction is established (specifically, the number of time reductions in the time reduction state and the start winning opening (for example, the second start winning opening) that is easy to enter in the time reduction state). A jackpot type may be provided in which the sum with the upper limit storage number (for example, 4) of the special figure game based on the entry is larger (or the same) than the number of fluctuations (non-probability change state) in which the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, a gaming state in which the time saving state after the big hit game is shifted to the time saving state by the relief time saving (actually, the normal state (that is, the special normal state) is temporarily controlled before the relief time saving is established). The transition will be performed, and the interest can be improved.

As described above, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 116-1-1) to (means 116-6).

(Means 116-1-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, a big hit) is executed. It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display of the symbol), and the numerical information (for example, the relief time reduction counter) can be updated. Means (eg, the portion where the game control computer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A, S5603B) and a special state (eg, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (eg, low probability / low base state). ) Is provided with a controllable special state control means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), and the update means is the first identification. Numerical information is updated at the timing when the variable display of information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction count counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. As a result, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed. At that time, a notification effect execution means (for example, a time-saving rush effect shown in FIGS. 11-23) that notifies that the special state is controlled based on the satisfaction of the special condition can be executed. A portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS806B) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 116-1-2) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, a big hit) is executed. It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display of the symbol), and the numerical information (for example, the relief time reduction counter) can be updated. Means (eg, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A, S5603B) and a special state (eg, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). ) Is provided with a controllable special state control means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), and the update means is the first identification. Numerical information is updated at the timing when the variable display of information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction count counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. As a result, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and immediately before the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. When the variable display is being executed, a notification effect (for example, a time-saving rush effect shown in FIGS. 11-24) that notifies that the special state is controlled based on the satisfaction of the special condition can be executed. Further provided with means of execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 116-2) In the means 116-1-1, a special variable display pattern (for example, a first fluctuation pattern # M (relief time shortening rush loss) and a second fluctuation pattern # L (relief time reduction rush loss)) is included. A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) is provided, and special conditions are satisfied for the variable display pattern determining means. The special variable display pattern can be determined (for example, the part where the game control computer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A and S17093B), and the special variable display pattern is not determined before the special conditions are satisfied. The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A and S17093B, and the effect control. (Part where the computer 120 executes steps 108IWS805 and S806B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition by the notification effect.

(Means 116-3) In means 116-1-2, variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B). The variable display pattern determining means determines the variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, so that the variable display pattern can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the configuration of the modification shown in FIGS. 11-24). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 116-4) In any of the means 116-1-1 to the means 116-3, the special state control means becomes an advantageous state in either a special state or a non-special state (for example, a low base state). Depending on whether it is controlled, it is possible to control to a special state having different advantages after the end of the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287. During the normal state. When a 6R jackpot A occurs in the (low base state) and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving, and the 6R jackpot is controlled during the time saving state (high base state). When A occurs and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state of 200 times of time saving. See FIG. 11-1), and the variable display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. If is a specific display result, the advantage of the special state to be controlled after the end of the advantageous state is determined, assuming that the special state is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines step 061IWS59A, The portion where the jackpot determination module of S59B is executed after the relief time reduction counter update process and the high base flag setting process of steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B). According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 116-5) In any of the means 116-1-1 to the means 116-4, the game medium is used for the first path (for example, the path by left-handed) and the second path (for example, the path by right-handed). A launch promotion notification means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched toward either the game area that can be separated and the first path or the second path. The right-handed instruction display 100IW108 and the part displaying the left-handed instruction display) are provided, and the launch promotion notification means should launch the game medium toward the second path when the notification effect is executed. The launch promotion notification can be executed (for example, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is displayed when the time saving rush effect is executed. See FIGS. 11-23 (B) and 11-23 (C)). According to such a configuration, the launch promotion notification can be appropriately executed.

(Means 116-6) In any of the means 116-1-1 to the means 116-5, the special condition is controlled based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied in response to the start of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to output a signal that can specify that (for example, 4 jackpot signals), and output a signal that can specify that the variable display has been executed in response to the end of the variable display (for example, a variable stop signal). It is provided with a possible signal output means (see, for example, FIGS. 11-19). According to such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal that can be specified to be controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition to the outside at an appropriate timing.

Further, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 117-1) to (means 117-5).

(Means 117-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that For example, in a special state (for example, a high base state) in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the step 061IWS5603A, S5603B) and a special state (for example, a high base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, the low probability / low base state). Special state control that can be controlled to increase the probability of hitting a normal figure, control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening)). The means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) and the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are performed in parallel. (For example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S25A and S25B) and the variable display in which the variable display of the first identification information is shorter than the variable display of the second identification information. The low probability in the first embodiment that the first shortened state (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter fluctuation time than the variable display of the second special symbol) having a high rate of variable display of the period. / Low base state (normal state), low probability / high base state, and high probability / high base state (second probability variation state). See FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19) and the second. The second shortened state (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol is larger than the variable display of the first special symbol) in which the variable display of the identification information is shorter than the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display period is high. High probability / low base state (first probability variation state) in the first embodiment, which is executed with a short fluctuation time. See FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19). The updating means includes a shortened state control means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, S2206). Numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). ), In the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means has a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". ), It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the variable display executing means is the first. While the variable display of one of the 1 identification information and the 2nd identification information is being executed, the identification information of the other is variable based on the fact that a special condition is satisfied by the execution of the variable display of the other identification information. The display result of the display is not derived and displayed (for example, see FIG. 11-21 (A)), and the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information. Based on this, it is possible to derive and display a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1125B and S1129B). The shortened state control means can be controlled to the first shortened state when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has step 061IWS5607A, The part that executes S5607B. When the relief time reduction is established, the variation display of the first special symbol shifts to a low probability / high base state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variation time than the variation display of the second special symbol. See Figure 11-20). According to such a configuration, since the first shortened state is controlled after the special condition is satisfied, the game can be smoothly advanced and the interest can be improved.

(Means 117-2) In the means 117-1, the variable display executing means displays a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a symbol that is out of time) can be derived and displayed, and the special state control means can be controlled to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 steps. 061IWS2032A, S2032B execution part), when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to control to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, for game control). The part where the microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B (see FIG. 11-21 (A)), the advantage of the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result. The degree is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the condition that the special condition is satisfied (for example, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the number of time savings is 800 times, whereas in the time saving state via the time saving time saving, the time saving state is 800 times. The number of time reductions is 100 times. See FIG. 11-1). According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the relief degree of the player is increased. Can be done.

(Means 117-3) In the means 117-1 or the means 117-2, the special state control means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and the special display result is obtained. If a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed during the execution of the variable display of the identification information, the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to control the special state based on the above (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B), and even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. The special display result is not controlled to the special state of the advantage based on the derived display (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A and S2030B to S2031B). According to such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is secured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 117-4) In any one of the means 117-1 to the means 117-3, the variable display executing means has a specific display result and a predetermined display result as display results of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. A special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the display result can be derived and displayed, and the other identification information is being executed during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of, the predetermined display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has step 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B). , The part that executes S1129B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display result from being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional capture. ..

(Means 117-5) In any of the means 117-1 to the means 117-4, the updating means has a timing at which the variable display of the first identification information is started and a timing at which the variable display of the second identification information is started. The numerical information can be updated with (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

Further, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 118-1) to (means 118-5).

(Means 118-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that For example, in the first embodiment, the portion in which steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed) and the special state (for example, in the high base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). Special state control that can be controlled to increase the probability of hitting a normal figure, control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening)). The means (for example, the portion that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 in the first embodiment) and the variable display of the first identification information are shorter than the variable display of the second identification information. In the second embodiment, in which the first shortened state (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol) in which the ratio of the variable display of the variable display period is high is high. Low probability / low base state (normal state). See Fig. 12-1) and the second, where the variable display of the second identification information is a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information. The low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) in the second embodiment in which the shortened state (for example, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). ), High probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and high probability / low base state (second KT state). See FIG. 12-1). (Corresponding to a portion for executing steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, S2206) in the embodiment of the above, and the updating means is executed with variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the portion where steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed in the first embodiment), and the special state control means is updated. Numerical information updated by means However, when the special condition is satisfied by becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, the special state is set. It is controllable (for example, a portion that executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B in the first embodiment), and the variable display executing means is a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information. As a display result, a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result can be derived and displayed, and during execution of variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the identification information can be displayed. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, it is possible to derive and display a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information (for example). , Step 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, S1129B in step 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1129B), the shortened state control means is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition, the second shortened state. (For example, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) in the second embodiment). According to such a configuration, while the variable display of one of the identification information is being executed, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Since the display result is derived and displayed, and is controlled to the second shortened state after the special condition is satisfied, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest can be improved.

(Means 118-2) In the means 118-1, the variable display executing means has a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a symbol that is out of time) can be derived and displayed, and the special state control means can be controlled to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the step in the first embodiment). When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied (corresponding to the part where 061IWS2032A and S2032B are executed), the special state can be controlled based on the condition of the special condition (for example,). Steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment), the advantage of the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result is It is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is 800 times, whereas the time reduction state via the time reduction is 100 times. Times. See Figure 12-1). According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the relief degree of the player is increased. Can be done.

(Means 118-3) In the means 118-1 or the means 118-2, the special state control means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and the special display result is obtained. If a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed during the execution of the variable display of the identification information, the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to control the special state based on the above (for example, corresponding to the portion where steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B are executed in the first embodiment), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. However, the special display result is not controlled to the special state of the advantage based on the derived display (for example, it corresponds to the portion where steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A and S2030B to S2031B are executed in the first embodiment). According to such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is secured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 118-4) In any one of the means 118-1 to the means 118-3, the variable display executing means has a specific display result and a predetermined display result as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. A special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the display result can be derived and displayed, and the other identification information is being executed during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of, the predetermined display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display of the identification information (for example, steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B in the first embodiment). , Corresponds to the part that executes S1129B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display result from being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional capture. ..

(Means 118-5) In any of the means 118-1 to the means 118-4, the updating means has a timing at which the variable display of the first identification information is started and a timing at which the variable display of the second identification information is started. (For example, it corresponds to the portion where steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed in the first embodiment). According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

Further, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 119-1) to (means 119-6).

(Means 119-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that For example, in the first embodiment, a portion in which steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed) and a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). A controllable special state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 in the first embodiment) and a specific state that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the normal state. A specific state control means that can be controlled (for example, a high-probability state) (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS2206 in the first embodiment) and an end that determines to end the specific state in the specific state by lottery. Execution of the normal state control means (for example, step 061IWS5704A, S5712A in the modification 2) that can be controlled to the normal state based on the determination by the determination means (for example, the portion that executes step 061IWS5703A in the modification 2) and the end determination means. And the notification effect that can notify whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is derived and displayed in relation to the control of the specific state (for example, the fan reach A to C shown in FIGS. 12-7). (For example, a portion that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, S633A, the processing of determining the fluctuation pattern according to the states of the fanning reach flags A to C, and the like in the modification 2). , The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, in the first embodiment, step 061IWS5603A, In the special state control means (the part that executes S5603B), the numerical information updated by the update means has a specific value (for example, a relief time reduction counter) corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. By setting the value to "0"), it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied. (For example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, the specific state is terminated by the end determination means after the special condition is satisfied. A portion that is controllable to a special state after it has been determined (eg, performing steps 061IWS56061A, S5701A, S5704A, S5701A-S5709A in variant 2). (See FIG. 12-9), the notification effect execution means is controlled to the special state when the special condition is satisfied in the specific state (for example, FIGS. 12-7 (3-2), (4). It can be notified by the fan reach B) shown in. According to such a configuration, even when the specific state ends, it is notified by the notification effect that the special state is controlled based on the fulfillment of the special condition, so that the player feels at ease. It can be given and the interest can be improved.

(Means 119-2) In the means 119-1, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, special information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing special information (for example, a relief time reduction flag) indicating the establishment of the special condition is satisfied. ), And the special information is erased based on being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the portion where step 061IWS631A is executed in the second modification). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in a specific state.

(Means 119-3) In means 119-1 or means 119-2, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, special information storage (for example, a relief time saving flag) indicating the establishment of the special condition can be stored. The means (eg, RAM 102) is provided, and the special information is erased based on being controlled to the special state after the specific state ends (for example, the portion where step 061IWS5707A is executed in the second modification). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in a specific state.

(Means 119-4) In means 119-1 to means 119-3, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, special information storage (for example, a relief time saving flag) indicating the establishment of the special condition can be stored. A means (for example, RAM 102) is provided, and the specific state control means can end the control of the specific state by executing the initialization process (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8). , The special information is deleted by executing the initialization process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in a specific state.

(Means 119-5) From means 119-1 to means 119-4, a special condition establishment notification effect for notifying that a special condition is satisfied in a specific state (for example, a chance mode as shown in FIG. 12-8 (2)). A special condition establishment notification effect executing means capable of executing (a "chi" icon 014IW003d indicating that the control is controlled by (relief time reduction) is displayed on a part of the image display device 5) is provided. According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the special state is controlled after the end of the specific state, which can give the player a sense of security and improve the interest.

(Means 119-6) In means 119-1 to 119-5, when the special state control means finishes the specific state by the time the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the specific state. In addition, it is possible to control the special state until the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed (for example, the portion where steps 061IWS5705A, S5711A, S5717A to S5720A are executed in the modification 2), and the notification effect executing means sets the predetermined number of times. When the variable display is executed beyond that, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is displayed (for example, the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, S633A in the second modification). Or, the part where the process of determining the fluctuation pattern according to the states of the fan reach flags A to C is controlled to the probabilistic state and then executed after the 100th fluctuation (see FIG. 12-6). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of tension to the player and improve the interest.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1A) to (means 8A) may be applied to the feature unit 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1A) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. The state control means includes an update means capable of updating information (for example, a relief time reduction counter), and the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times of execution of the variable display. By doing so, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means is numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Is updated, and the control of the special state is started based on the predetermined suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined suggestion effect (for example, the advance notice effect) when the variable display is executed and the special condition is satisfied. Further, a special notification effect executing means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a time-saving rush effect) for notifying the fact is further provided, and the predetermined suggestion effect executing means is a predetermined suggestion effect in the period before the special condition is satisfied. (For example, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect does not change between the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less and the period when the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened is 11 times or more). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest by suddenly executing the special notification effect.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification effect is the special notification effect in the display means. It is an embodiment that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display displayed before the start (for example, blackout at the start of fluctuation). According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification effect is an embodiment in which the identification information for the effect is difficult to see (for example). , Black out at the end of the fluctuation). According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

(Means 4A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect is displayed. It is an embodiment in which the background display in the means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, the background image corresponding to the time saving state due to the relief time saving is displayed). According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) In any one of the means 1A to the means 4A, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition is provided (for example, an explanation regarding a relief time reduction (for example, a relief time reduction function). And display the telop including the explanation of the production in a short relief time)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to means 5A, a portion in which a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. ), The variable display pattern determining means determines the variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and the special notification effect executing means is variable that the special condition is satisfied. After the non-specific display result (for example, the out-of-order symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the display, the special notification effect can be executed (for example, in the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction establishment is established. Is not used. And after the outlier symbol is derived and displayed, it is notified that the relief time reduction has been established). According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, which is a special condition. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied, and the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a numerical value updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped. It is possible to execute a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and hold information stored by the hold storage means, and an initialization process for initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Numerical information and hold storage updated by the initialization means (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) and the storage contents of the backup storage means when the power supply is started. It is provided with a recovery means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) capable of executing a recovery process for recovering the reserved information stored in the means. According to such a configuration, a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the special number of times is stored before the power supply is stopped while optimizing the control by the initialization process. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is performed.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, a state of a high base flag) that can be specified to be controlled to a special state, and a special state. Execution count storage means that can store execution count information (for example, the value of the time reduction count counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display is executed, and special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even if the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the above and an initialization means (for example, a game control micro) capable of executing an initialization process for initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A portion where the computer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means is when the backup storage means holds the special state information, the execution count information, and the numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the initialization process, the special state information and the execution count information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the state of the high base flag and the value of the time reduction counter are initialized, while the value is initialized. The value of the relief time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before power failure is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 5B) may be applied to the feature unit 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1B) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including an update means capable of updating information and a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. (For example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process), and the state control means corresponds to a special number of times the numerical information updated by the update means is executed as the variable display. By becoming a specific value, it is possible to control the special state when a special condition is satisfied, and the updating means is a case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and a case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated with, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine the specific variable display pattern regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not. Yes (for example, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) in both the case of big hit and the case of out of order), and the display result of variable display becomes a specific display result. In addition, the rate of determining a specific variable display pattern is higher than that of a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern of reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) is determined at a high rate in the case of a big hit), and a special condition. In the predetermined period before the establishment of, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than the period before the predetermined period (for example, the relief time is shortened). Immediately before becoming, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern of reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) at the time of disconnection is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) In means 1B, a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect effect suggesting that a relief time is satisfied, a telop display while waiting for a customer) can be executed. As for the suggestion effect execution means, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is higher in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. According to such a configuration, the player can be expected to establish the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or means 2B, a telop display including an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation regarding a relief time reduction (for example, an explanation of a relief time reduction function or an effect in a relief time reduction)). ) Is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 3B. The notice effect executing means can execute the notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result. Is higher in the case where the specific display result is obtained than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). The rate of executing the advance notice effect is lower in the period) than in the period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the advance notice effect is executed in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 5B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 4B. The notice effect executing means is provided with means, and the specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") is predetermined regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not. When the notice effect can be executed according to the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue") and the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect according to the specific mode is higher than the predetermined mode. When the variable display display result is not the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is less than the period before the predetermined period. In addition, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the advance notice effect is executed in a specific mode in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C) may be applied to the feature unit 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1C) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. A variable display pattern determining means (for example) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including an update means capable of updating information and a special variable display pattern (for example, first variation pattern # M (relief time shortening rush loss)). , The part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process), and the state control means is a specific value in which the numerical information updated by the update means corresponds to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means depends on the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated, and the variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and does not determine the special variable display pattern before the special condition is satisfied, but is specially variable. Further provided is a specific notification effect execution means capable of executing a specific notification effect (for example, a time saving rush effect) for notifying that the variable display is controlled by the special state when the variable display by the display pattern is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the specific notification effect executing means executes the specific notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display that is possible and the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is performed after performing the effect in the same manner as the specific notification effect. It is provided with a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a time-saving rushing masquerade effect) for notifying that is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, once the player recognizes the establishment of the special condition, it is notified that the player is controlled in an advantageous state, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. Can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the variable display is not executed before the special condition is satisfied. A predetermined notification effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, full rotation effect) for notifying that the specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the embodiment is provided. According to such a configuration, the player can be given a surprising and special feeling, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 4C) In the means 1C or the means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode common to that before the special condition is satisfied. A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, even when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the jackpot is the same as when the value is not 0. It is realized by being determined by the fluctuation pattern). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to means 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the variable display display result when the special condition is satisfied is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. A notification effect (for example, shortening the relief time) for notifying that the control of the special state is started in the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, which is longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is provided with a notification effect execution means capable of executing a mode transition effect) for notifying that the control of the time saving state is started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) At the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied in any of the means 1C to the means 5C, a specific signal corresponding to the start of the display period (for example, a fluctuation stop signal). Is output, and after the specific signal is output, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, 4 jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state is provided. According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent signal omission from occurring externally.

(Means 7C) In the means 6C, the signal output means extends the period until the next variation is started, which is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. A special signal is output at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process). According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent signal omission from occurring externally.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to means 6C, a first passage region (for example, a first start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific route (for example, a left-handed route) can pass. ), A second passage area (for example, a second start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second as a variable display of identification information. 1 Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of the first identification information based on the satisfaction of the start condition and variable display of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of the second start condition, and a special route. A special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward (for example, a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which the player is expected to hit right, or a right hit. The first starting condition is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium through the first passing region, and the second starting condition is the first. 2 It is established based on the passage of the game medium through the passing area, and the special output means is a special process (for example, the next variation) executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. The special output can be executed at the start of the next variable deferral process to extend the period until the start of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 5D) may be applied to the feature unit 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1D) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. It is provided with an updating means capable of updating information and a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process). The state control means can control the numerical information updated by the update means to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, and the update means can be used. , The numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means is special when a special condition is satisfied. A variable display pattern (for example, the first variation pattern # A) that can be determined even before the condition is satisfied is determined, and a non-specific display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. A special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, display of a background image corresponding to the relief time reduction) for notifying that the control of the special state is started after the display is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied. In addition, the variable display pattern can be standardized when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In the means 1D, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A). A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can store information about variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met, and hold storage. A look-ahead notice effect that targets variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means (for example, an effect of stopping and displaying a special decorative pattern (chance eye), or a hold change effect that changes the color or shape of the hold display. , A zone effect that displays a special background, etc.) is provided, and the look-ahead notice execution means is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied. While it is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect that targets variable display when a special condition is satisfied, the execution of a look-ahead notice effect that targets variable display after the variable display that satisfies a special condition is restricted ( For example, execution of a look-ahead notice effect for which the hold memory stored before reaching the change in the relief time reduction and the hold memory corresponding to the change performed after being controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is targeted for advance notice. (Prohibit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or the means 2D, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect can be executed. Is an embodiment in which the background display in the display means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, the background image corresponding to the time saving state due to the relief time saving is displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to means 3D, suggestion effects related to the establishment of special conditions (for example, countdown effects and effect effects suggesting that relief time is shortened, telop display while waiting for customers, etc.) are performed. A feasible suggestion effect execution means is provided, and the suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 5D) In any of the means 1D to the means 4D, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation of a rescue time saving function or a relief time shortening effect). Includes telop display). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1E) to (means 4E) may be applied to the feature unit 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1E-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state), and is based on a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and variable display is executed. A variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including an update means capable of updating numerical information and a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. The display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process) is provided, and the state control means is based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the special condition is satisfied because the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, which can be controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state. It can be controlled to a special state, and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means. Is a shortened variable display when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The rate of determining the pattern is high (for example, the rate of determining the variation pattern with the shortened fluctuation time is higher in the time-saving state via the rescue time reduction than in the time-saving state via the jackpot). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display being executed by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. Will be shortened, so it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state), and is based on a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and variable display is executed. A variable display pattern determination that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including an update means capable of updating numerical information and a specific variable display pattern (for example, the first variable display pattern # C) corresponding to the execution of the reach effect. The state control means includes means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process), and the state control means is in an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to, and the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, so that the special state is set when the special condition is satisfied. It is controllable, the updating means updates the numerical information in the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means is special. The special state controlled when the condition is satisfied is determined to be the specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, the time saving state via the rescue time saving is determined to be a fluctuation pattern that reaches (or the reach with particularly high expectation) when the display result is out of order than the time saving state via the jackpot. The percentage is low). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number of times, the ratio of the display result of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern to the non-specific display result becomes low, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In the means 1E, a background display means capable of displaying different background displays in the display means depending on the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. (For example, the background image is different between the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief time saving). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or the means 2E, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A). And a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can store information about variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. , A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) for a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means is provided. The means is a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied, a ratio of executing a look-ahead notice effect, and any of a plurality of types of look-ahead notice. The ratio of whether to execute the effect is different (for example, the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect and the pre-reading advance notice effect of a plurality of types are executed depending on the time-saving state via the rescue time reduction and the time-saving state via the jackpot. It is different from the ratio of doing). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of the look-ahead notice effect are determined between the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. It can be different and can improve the interest.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to the means 3E, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied, and the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer or a second hold storage number buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a variable corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. Pre-reading notice effect that targets the display (for example, effect that stops and displays a special decorative pattern (chance eye), hold change effect that changes the color and shape of the hold display, zone effect that performs a special background display, etc.) The pre-reading notice executing means is provided with a look-ahead notice executing means, and the look-ahead notice executing means gives a notice of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied. While the target look-ahead notice effect can be executed, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is restricted (for example, before the change in the relief time reduction is reached). It is a stored hold memory, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect for the hold memory corresponding to the fluctuation performed after being controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is restricted (prohibited). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process and to avoid contradiction in the production contents.

It is possible to appropriately combine the configuration shown by the feature unit 120IW with the configuration shown by the feature unit 090IW, the feature unit 113IW, and the feature unit 116IW. For example, when the configuration shown by the feature unit 090IW is applied to the configuration shown by the feature unit 120IW, the value of the small hit count counter is subtracted by 1 when a small hit is obtained with a V prize during the time saving state. Then, while the time saving state is terminated, if a small hit without V prize is obtained during the time saving state, the value of the small hit count counter may not be subtracted.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also advantageous based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A state control means (for example, FIG. 8) that is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. As shown in -17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) and variable. A state control is provided with an update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) in which numerical information can be updated based on the execution of display. The means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, game control. The portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the computer 100 for game control, the portion for executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17), the updating means is the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the above is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Part to execute),
Moreover,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 96 to 102. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 96 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 99 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 101 (a37) to 102 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. A gaming machine in which a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 59 and 96) can be mentioned.
According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done. Further, according to such a configuration, the group effect can be more preferably executed.

That is, since the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, for example, the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information Since it is easier for the numerical information to reach the special number of times and the player is more likely to be rescued than when the numerical information is updated only when one of the variable displays of is executed, it is possible to increase the motivation for playing. In addition, in the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. After the second situation in which a part of the character displayed in is displayed, the character is newly displayed and the displayed character is displayed in the second display period longer than the first display period. Since the ending state continues, it is possible to surely inform the player that it is a group production by eliminating the situation where only a single character is displayed, and the start and continuation of the group production are preferably executed. You can improve the fun of group production. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not easily reduce the interest of the game when installed in the gaming field and can improve the player's motivation to play.

Further, the execution frequency of the group effect may be changed according to the value updated by the update means. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to both the number of fluctuations and the group production.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest, a player is in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. A controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. A gaming machine in which a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 58 and 95) can be mentioned. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another example of the form.

(Example of other forms)

[Configuration of pachinko game machines, etc.]
13 and 14 are front views of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 13 and 14 show the layout of the main members of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of the gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is performed by variably displaying a special symbol. The "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

Two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the other special symbol is also referred to as "second special symbol" or "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas. Update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumemu-chan, who appears in the production performed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Yumemu-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko machine 1. Further, on the lower right game board 2 of the image display device 5, a character named Jam who appears in the production executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Yumemu-chan is the main character, it is the most important of all the characters, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters including Jam-chan. In addition, Jam is the most important character other than Yumemu-chan, who is the main character, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters other than Yumemu-chan. In addition, a character with a higher priority than other characters, such as Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, is a character that appears first in the scene where a character is selected, a character that is placed in the most prominent position, or a character that is fully selected. It may be the character located at the highest rank among them.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 20). The variable-sweep wing device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the second start winning opening is used. It becomes a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as a closed state in which the second start winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open). When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 13, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 20), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (see FIG. 20). Hereinafter, it is usually referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A includes a gaming board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 15) located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A large winning opening door is provided in the space between the pachinko machines, and this large winning opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open and close the normal large winning opening with a gaming ball. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 20), the game ball corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) is paid out to the player as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the normal large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 20), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter referred to as V large). Form a winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the route to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for the game ball to enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V-large winning opening is detected by the V-winning switch 24 (see FIG. 20) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V-winning area) provided inside the V-large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to the probable change state. That is, in the present embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols is performed. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. The movable body 32 is configured such that the member with the letters "POWERFUL" is located on the front side of the member with the letters "2". As a result, the characters "POWERFUL2" are formed. "POWERFUL2" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an animation or the name of a singer). In addition, the characters attached to the movable body 32 are the names of the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the character with the next highest priority after the main character (for example, "dream" indicating the main character Yume-chan. You may show a dream "). In the present embodiment, the model name (powerful 2) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In the present embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 1 and a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. .. Specifically, in the movable body 32, among the members with the letters "POWERFUL" and the members with the letters "2", only the members with the letters "POWERFUL" are shown in FIG. By falling from the position shown in FIG. 14, the image is stopped at a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or pressed) by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 20).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 20).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a special LED board 9020 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the special figure LED board 9020, the type of the special symbol (first special figure) in the first special figure game and the special symbol in the second special figure game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (a) described later, in the special figure LED board 9020, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 9022 of the special figure 2.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved storages, the right-handed display, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are combined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (b) described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9053. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 9054 of the special figure 2.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a board provided above the game board 2. The lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the V large winning opening are opened to win the V prize. A V lamp 9G that notifies that a round of possible jackpot gaming states is in progress and a V prize has occurred, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, and a stick controller 31A. The stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, the frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the frame right provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. It is equipped with a lamp 9R. The V lamp may notify that a big hit has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member with the letter "POWERFUL" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, the accessory lamp 9A1 is behind the "P" and "O" portions, and the accessory lamp 9A2 is. The accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamps 9A4 are arranged on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the member with the letters "POWERFUL", so that the "POWERFUL" is lit (light-emitting).

The panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "dream dream" indicating the main character Yumemu-chan) is drawn in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are the main characters. Is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 on which is drawn. As a result, the left side lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) behind the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn lights up (lights up). ing.

As shown in FIG. 14, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. On the upper side of the game board 2, the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, respectively, divided into three areas, left, middle, and right. Has been done. The portion of the game board 2 provided with the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the on-board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 is formed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light, whereby the on-board lamps are formed. When the 9C1 to 9C13 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the upper portion of the game board 2, the upper portion of the game board 2 is lit (light-emitting) in white or red.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 marked with "V". As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) behind the part of the game board 2 marked with "V", so that the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V" lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device 6B, and by lighting (light emitting), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B is lit (light emitting).

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and by lighting (light emitting), the stick controller 31A is lit (light emitting). The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and by lighting (light emitting), the push button 31B is lit (light emitting).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 16) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The left side of the frame 3 is lit (light-emitting). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 16) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The right side of the frame 3 is lit (light-emitting). The frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. In addition, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chew lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K, the frame left lamp 9L, And the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 15 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 20).

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 20) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the gaming board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has twelve lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 in a counterclockwise direction from above to below the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L emits light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has 11 lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12 clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R emits light near the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the special LED substrate 9020 and the fourth symbol unit 9050. As shown in FIG. 17A, the special figure LED board 9020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 showing a variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable display unit showing a variable display of the second special figure. 9022, a special figure 1 storage display unit 9023 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 storage display unit 9024 showing a second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. , The normal figure storage display unit 9025 showing the number of normal figure reserved storage, the normal figure display unit 9026 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, the right-handed display unit 9030 for urging the player to hit right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. A probability variation display unit 9028 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, a time reduction display unit 9029 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, and a round display unit 9027 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit are provided. Each display unit may notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special figures or ordinary symbols, the result, the current gaming state, the number of pending numbers, etc. by lighting or blinking by a lighting means such as an LED. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

Further, the special figure LED board 9020 can urge the player to strike right by turning on / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display unit 9030. In the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, when the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 9030 lights up (lights up) and does not urge the player to hit right. That is, when urging the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 9030 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting designation command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 9030, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , The right-handed display / off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 9030 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 9030 only during the big hit round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 9030.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. It is to operate the hitting ball operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path that passes through the left region of the gaming area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is present ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big winning opening) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path toward the second start winning opening and the large winning opening (normal large winning opening, V large winning opening). Flow into.

In the present embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 9030 urges the player to make a right-handed hit. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second start winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls is paid out. The right of the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls is paid out by entering a game ball into a normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probabilistic jackpot, but the player can make a right-handed hit while the display prompting the right-handed is displayed. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probable change state. For this reason, the player may have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. It should be noted that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 17B, the fourth symbol unit 9050 has a special figure 1 storage display unit 9051 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a second special figure game corresponding to the second special figure game. 2 Special figure 2 storage display unit 9052 showing the number of reserved storage, special figure 1 variable display unit 9053 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. A special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 and a right-handed display unit 9055 that urges the player to hit the right-hand side are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special diagram 1 variable display unit 9053. Also called. Further, the fact that the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 is also referred to as the variation display (variable display) of the second special symbol. Refer to.

Further, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (lights up) and hits right. When not prompting the player, that is, when prompting the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 9055 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 9055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and the symbol changes due to the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After confirmation, the right-handed display unit 9055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / off designation command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 9055 only during the big hit round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 9055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 18 is a view looking through between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized. ..

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays an image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern or a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is used. Etc.) are variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, the first hold storage display area 5D in which the first hold storage number can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and the second hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays A displayable second hold storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the special symbol and the fourth symbol 5J indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are displayed. At the left end of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol 5M having a size smaller than that of each decorative symbol is displayed. The small symbols are displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols are arranged vertically. Further, the small symbol 5M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 19, a decorative symbol is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 5M has a size smaller than the decorative symbol at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5. Have been placed. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the shape of the screen of the image display device 5 is a quadrangle or a substantially quadrangle, but as described above, the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. It is fixed so as to cover it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19B, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part (particularly the end) of the screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the gaming board 2. It has become.

[Board configuration]
FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining various substrates and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 connected to the power supply switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electric components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later) and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special figure LED board 9020 and the like, solenoid drive signals). Consists of including.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), a count switch 23, a V winning switch 24) for detecting a game ball. A detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on, etc.) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, or the solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) assigns an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 9050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the control CPU 120.

[Outline of the progress of the game]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special drawing game by the special drawing 1 variable display unit 21 of the special drawing LED board 9020 is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special drawing game by the special drawing 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special drawing LED board 9020 is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, which will be described later). The actual design differs depending on the type of big hit.) When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to) is used, it becomes a "big hit". It should be noted that the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020. Is also referred to as a "specific display result". Further, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol. ) Corresponds to the combination of lighting modes, it becomes a "small hit". Further, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a special symbol (loss) different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol. When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the symbol) is used, it becomes "missing". It should be noted that, in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020, a special symbol (loss) different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol is used. The lighting mode corresponding to the symbol) is also referred to as a “loss display result”.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state. In addition, it is not always necessary to provide a small hit as a hit type.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is either the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until early timing. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type that can hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state for some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, and the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be turned off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach, super reach with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach, and strongest reach with higher jackpot reliability than super reach. Also, in Super Reach, it is divided into the first half of Super Reach and the second half of Super Reach. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the normal reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived with the strongest reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach. In the following, "super reach" is also referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is also referred to as "first half of SP", and "second half of super reach" is also referred to as "second half of SP".

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the "big hit" (the above-mentioned specific display result), it is predetermined as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol that is a combination of big hits is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "small hit", a predetermined small hit combination is obtained as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol (for example, "1 3 5") is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "small hit"). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "big hit" of some big hit types (a big hit type in a big hit game state similar to the small hit game state), and when it becomes a "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "loss" (the above-mentioned loss display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, but the variable display of the decorative symbol. As a display result of, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "non-reach loss") of the non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

[Various tables related to big hits]
Various tables related to big hits will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

(Hit type)
FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a hit type. As shown in FIG. 21, in the hit type table, for each type (type) of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth.

The normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

The normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of three rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 1, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 6 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 6, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 7 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 7 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 7, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpots 8 and 9, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(Each random number)
FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 22, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random 1 is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random 1 is, for example, incremented and updated by 1 from 1 and incremented and updated up to its upper limit of 65536, and then incremented and updated from 1 again. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the jackpot type) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and random 4 are random counters (for determining the post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns. Post-variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation in the special symbol. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss. For example, it is updated one by one, added and updated from 1, and added and updated up to the upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Will be updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to a hit. For example, it is added and updated from 1 to 1 and is added and updated up to its upper limit of 239, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the pre-variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a pre-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns. The pre-variation refers to the variation of the first half of the variation of the special symbol. Random 5 is, for example, incremented and updated by 1 from 1 and incremented and updated up to the upper limit of 251 and then incremented and updated from 1 again. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 6 is, for example, incremented and updated from 1 to 1, incremented and updated up to the upper limit of 201, and then incremented and updated from 1 again.

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) whether or not the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. Then, which of the plurality of types of jackpots is to be selected is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 2.

First, the posterior variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random number for determining the posterior variation pattern (random 3 and 4), and the anterior variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the anterior variation pattern (random 5). Will be done. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

(Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 23 (a), and in the probability change jackpot determination table, the lower column of FIG. 23 (a). The jackpot judgment value is set for the number of judgment values described in. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time, and the jackpot judgment value peculiar to the probability change is added to the normal time. A larger number of jackpot determination values than the jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the probabilistic state, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 23A shows the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit or the probability (ratio) of becoming a loss.

23 (b) and 23 (c) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 23B is a first special figure big hit type determination table used for determining a big hit type when it is determined to be a big hit by the first special symbol. FIG. 23 (c) is a second special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type when the big hit is determined by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure big hit type determination table of FIG. 23 (b), the numerical values are compared with the random 2 values for the big hit type determination, and correspond to the normal big hits 1 and 2 and the probable variable big hits 1 to 4, respectively. Judgment values are set for the number of determined judgment values. For example, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned 100 random 2s. 25 of the random 2 values are assigned, the probability variation jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 5 random 2 out of 100 random 2 and the probability variation jackpot 2 is 37 of the 100 random 2 Random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 4 is 4 random 2 out of 100 random 2s. The value of is assigned.

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 23 (c), the determination values are set by the number of determination values corresponding to each of the probabilistic jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the values of random 2. Has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), for the second special figure, the probability variation jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s out of 100 random 2, and the probability variation jackpot 6 is assigned 100 random 2s. 5 random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 8 is 70 out of 100 random 2s. The value of each random 2 is assigned, and the probability variation jackpot 9 is assigned the value of 10 random 2 out of 100 random 2.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 2 values match as the jackpot type, and the random 2 values match as the jackpot symbol. Determine the big hit design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

[Direction control command]
FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 which is the control board on the main side transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 24 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (pre-variation pattern) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The pre-variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the first half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of pre-variation patterns, there is a pre-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the pre-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

The command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the posterior variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the post-variation pattern number). The rear variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the post-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variation jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variation jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 3 is determined. The command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variation jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined. The command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variation jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 5 is determined. The command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variation jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 6 is determined. The command 8C10 (H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variation jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 7 is determined. The command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variation jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 8 is determined. The command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variation jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 9 is determined. Each of the loss designation command, the normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and the probability variation jackpot 1 to 9 designation command, or these are collectively referred to as an 8C system command.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special figure is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special figure is started. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command for designating the initialization (designating to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the recovery of the power failure (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command for designating the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probabilistic state specification command for designating the background of the probabilistic state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probabilistic state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95-series command or a background specification command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 1. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 2. The command A003 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 1. The command A004 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 4 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 2. The command A005 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 5 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 3. The command A006 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 6 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 4. The command A007 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 7 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 5. The command A008 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 8 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 6. The command A009 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 9 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 7. The command A010 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 10 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 8. The command A011 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 11 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closure of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big winning opening is also called an A2 system command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 1. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 2. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 1. The command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 2. The command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 3. The command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 4. The command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 5. The command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 6. The command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 7. The command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 8. The command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command for designating that a V prize has occurred. The probability change determination device passage designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

The command B100 (H) is a first start winning prize designation command for designating that there was a first start winning prize. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the jackpot determination, the jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and a determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type are in the range of the determination value at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to send the data to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value for designating a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

[Variation pattern]
The contents of the fluctuation pattern, determination of the fluctuation pattern, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 31.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set by the game control microcomputer 100 on the main side. Each variation pattern is managed by the main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a pre-variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the pre-variation, and a post-variation pattern corresponding to the post-variation. It is designed to include. The pre-variation pattern corresponds to the pre-variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. 24, and the post-variation pattern corresponds to the post-variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. 24. Corresponds to.

(Pre-variation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pre-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of pre-variation patterns to which the pre-variation numbers are assigned, the pre-variation number 1 is a pre-variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Is. The pre-variation number 2 is a pre-variation pattern command (8001 (H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002 (H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 3 seconds).

The pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory ×) (a reach in which the movable body 32 does not operate in the reach mode). The pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory ○) (reach in which the movable body 32 operates in the reach mode). The pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (reach that becomes a reach mode and develops into a final reach).

The pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ×) is executed after one pseudo-variation. Pseudo-variation means that the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted from the start of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative symbol until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Variable display (variable display). The effect of repeating such pseudo-variations is also called pseudo-ream. By executing the pseudo-ream, the variable display based on one hold memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The variable display that is temporarily stopped and then restarted is also referred to as "re-variable display". The pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (role ○) is executed after one pseudo-variation. The pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008 (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo-variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ×) is executed after performing the pseudo-variation twice. The pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (role ○) is executed after performing the pseudo-variation twice. The pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo-variation twice.

A variation time is specified for each of the pre-variation patterns, and an animation (moving image) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting the moving image. For example, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1246. Further, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1861.

(Post-variation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining an example of the post-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of posterior variation patterns to which the posterior variation numbers are assigned, the posterior variation number 1 is a posterior variation pattern command (8400 (H)) for designating a 13-second variation. The post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401 (H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. The post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402 (H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. The post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403 (H)) that specifies that the pseudo-continuous gassing is executed. Pseudo-ren Gase is an effect that pretends to execute pseudo-ren and does not execute pseudo-ren in the end.

The post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into SP reach). The post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). The post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the latter half of SP (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the latter half of SP reach). The post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

The post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (variation of a decorative symbol that becomes a reach mode and becomes a hit mode). The post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409 (H)) that specifies the first half (hit) of the SP (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach and becomes the hit mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A (H)) that specifies the latter half of the SP (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B (H)) that specifies the final reach (hit) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes the hit mode in the final reach).

(Judgment of post-variation pattern)
The post-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters in the jackpot determination depending on whether it is determined to be a jackpot or a loss. FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. As shown in FIG. 27, when the big hit determination is determined to be a loss, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 3 described with reference to FIG. 22. Further, when the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved storages after digestion, and the determined post-variation number is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), when the number of reserved storages after digestion is 0, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined as the post-variation pattern. A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 1, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 2, one of the post-variation numbers 2, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 3, one of the post-variation numbers 3, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

In this way, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion, and further, the post-variation number is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion. Therefore, the type of fluctuation pattern changes according to the number of remaining reserved memories, which makes it possible to give variety to the game and improve the fun of the game.

FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. As shown in FIG. 28, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 4 described with reference to FIG. 22. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different numbers of determination values according to the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), when it is determined to be one of the normal jackpot 1, 2 and the probabilistic jackpot 1, 2, 5 to 8, any of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12. The posterior variation pattern is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When it is determined to be one of the probabilistic jackpots 3 and 9, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. .. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

In this way, since the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of variation pattern changes according to the type of jackpot, thereby giving diversity to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 at the time of loss, whereas it is a big hit. Since the time is about 1 / 1.1, which is higher than that, when the SP reach or the final reach is developed, the player can be expected to have a big hit.

(Judgment of pre-variation pattern)
FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining a pre-variation pattern determination table. The pre-variation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined. Further, the pre-variation number determined is also different depending on the type of the post-variation pattern determined earlier.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 1 is determined, the posterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29B, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 2 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29 (c), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 3 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29 (d), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 4 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 29 (e), when it is determined to be the posterior variation pattern of any of the posterior variation numbers 5 and 9, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns of the anterior variation numbers 4 and 7. As shown in FIG. 29 (f), when the posterior variation pattern of any of the posterior variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of any of the anterior variation numbers 4, 7 and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29 (g), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 7 is determined, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns of the anterior variation numbers 5, 8 and 11.

As shown in FIG. 29 (h), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 11 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 5, 8 and 11. As shown in FIG. 29 (i), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 8 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9, and 12. As shown in FIG. 29 (j), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 12 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9, and 12.

(Total variation pattern)
FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29, the variation pattern is one of the main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 30.

FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total variation pattern on the sub side. Further, on the sub side as well, the fluctuation patterns of the sub fluctuation numbers 1 to 26 are defined so as to correspond to each of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 1 to 26.

[Each notice production]
FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table in each notice effect. In the present embodiment, a notice effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol may be executed. The notice effect is also an effect that suggests or foretells the occurrence of a big hit, and is also an effect that makes the player expect a big hit. The advance notice effect includes a group advance notice effect (also referred to as a group advance notice or a group effect) and an SP first half title advance notice effect (also referred to as an SP first half title advance notice).

The group notice effect is an effect of displaying an image in which a plurality of objects progress as a group. Multiple objects include any moving object, such as a character such as a person, fish or animal, or a machine such as an airplane or car. The object such as a character may be of one type or may be of a plurality of types. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of group notice effects are provided. Specifically, a 6-person group notice in which 6 characters dressed as maids progress in a group, a Baku Chu group notice in which a mouse character with a body of a bomb named Baku Chu progresses in a group, A Boingo group notice can be executed in which a character named Boingo progresses as a group.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the group notice effect is executed by the group notice lottery when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8, 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach is determined. Or, the type of group notice effect to be performed is determined.

FIG. 32 (a) shows a lottery table for executing a group notice lottery in stage A. In the present embodiment, even if variable display is performed based on the same fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of stages having different production modes (background image, BGM, sound effect, appearing character, etc.) are provided. .. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the stage A is a stage in which a character named Yumemu-chan, which is included in the six characters dressed as maids, is directed.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 15%, and 6 of them have a probability of 13%. It will be decided as a group notice, and there is a 2% chance that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice. In addition, when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the hit is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 85%, and among them, the group notice effect is determined with a probability of 55%, and 30%. It is decided to announce the Boingo group with the probability of.

Here, considering that the probability of losing is about 319/320 and the probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 6 to 8 is about 1/102, the variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss The probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 15%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of loss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of becoming a big hit is about 1/320 and the probability of being determined by the posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 is about 1 / 1.1, the variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hitting. The probability of being determined by the posterior variation pattern is about 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 85%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of hitting is about 0.27%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the group notice is executed is about 64%. The reliability (expectation) of the group notice is not limited to 64%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

FIG. 32 (b) shows a lottery table for executing a group notice lottery in stage B. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the stage B is a stage in which a character called Baku Chu is performed.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 10%, and the explosion is performed with a probability of 8%. It will be decided as a Chu group notice, and there is a 2% chance that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice. In addition, when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the hit is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 90%, and among them, the group notice effect is determined with a probability of 60%, and 30 It is decided to be a Boingo group notice with a probability of%.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined to be the post-variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 10%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of loss is about 0.10%. On the other hand, the probability that the variation pattern after the variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined at the time of hit is about 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 90%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of hitting is about 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the group notice is executed is about 74%. The reliability (expectation) of the group notice is not limited to 74%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

The SP first half title notice is an effect suggesting that when the SP reach is developed, it will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the character image showing the title of the first half of the SP reach. In the present embodiment, the display of the character image of the SP first half title is executed in both the stage A and the stage B, but the advance notice effect for changing the display mode of the character image of the SP first half title is the case of the stage B. Is only executed. Even in the case of stage A, a notice effect for changing the display mode of the character image of the title in the first half of the SP may be executed.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the SP first half title notice is executed in the SP first half title notice lottery when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach is determined. , And the type of SP first half title notice to be executed is determined.

As shown in FIG. 32 (c), when the posterior variation number 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the SP first half title notice is executed with a probability of 20%, and the posterior variation number corresponding to the hit. If the post-variation pattern of 10 to 12 is determined, there is an 80% probability that the SP first half title notice will be executed.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined to be the post-variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, since the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed is about 20%, the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed at the time of loss is about 0.20%. On the other hand, the probability that the variation pattern after the variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined at the time of hit is about 1/320. In this case, since the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed is about 80%, the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed at the time of hitting is about 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the SP first half title notice is executed is about 56%. The reliability (expectation) of the title notice in the first half of the SP is not limited to 56%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

In this way, the reliability (expectation of big hit) in the group notice is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability in the SP first half title notice (in the case of big hit). Expectation) is 56%, and the group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice. Therefore, when the group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the SP first half title notice is executed, and the player is executed the group notice rather than the SP first half title notice. I have come to expect.

In addition, the boingo group notice in stage A is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of hit, so when the boingo group notice is executed, it is executed. , Almost likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the 6-person group notice in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of hit, so even if the 6-person group notice is executed, it is lost. The probability of being is greater than the Boingo group notice. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed, and the player is executed the Boingo group notice rather than the 6-person group notice. I have come to expect.

Similarly, the boingo group notice in stage B is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of hit, so when the boingo group notice is executed. Is likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Baku Chu group notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of hit, so the Baku Chu group notice is executed. The possibility of losing is greater than the Baku Chu Mondai notice. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the Baku Chu group notice is executed, and the player executes the Boingo group notice rather than the Baku Chu group notice. I have come to expect that.

Furthermore, the 6-person group notice in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of hit. On the other hand, the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of loss, and is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of hit. For this reason, the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B is executed at a higher rate than the 6-person group notice in stage A at the time of a big hit. As a result, when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A, and the player has 6 more than the 6-person group notice. We are now expecting the crowd announcement to be carried out.

The reliability of the group notice in stage A and the reliability of the group notice in stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, both the group notice in stage A and the group notice in stage B need to be more reliable than the SP first half title notice, and the boingo group notice is higher than the 6-person group notice and the Baku Chu group notice. It suffices if the reliability is high.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 makes necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the gaming control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the recovery process (step S4) and then the setting confirmation process (step S5). The CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the game is stopped, which is different from the lost symbol. It suffices to control so that the display corresponding to is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. After that, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like. Turn off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the gaming stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, a pressing operation of the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. The setting change process of step S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. .. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted. (Step S10). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 34 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, the CPU 103 starts the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined information output process. Data such as information (information indicating the number of start winnings and the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state has been reached) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal diagram game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal map game is performed by driving the normal map display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal maps is displayed by turning on the normal map storage display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 34. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 34 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 2 variable display unit 22 and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 2 variable display unit 22 stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the rate at which the gaming ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Starting prize judgment process)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 35. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (Step S51). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52). It is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B (step). S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing any of the processes of step S53 and step S56, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step S58). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 uses the random number value random 1 for jackpot determination and the jackpot type determination among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number value random 2 and the random number value random 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random values random 1 to random 4 is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit (not shown), while the start port buffer value is "2". At a certain time, numerical data indicating random value random 1 to random 4 is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit (not shown).

For the numerical data indicating the random value random 1 for determining the jackpot and the random value random 2 for determining the jackpot type, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result is "". It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". Random random values 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step S59, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for sending the first start winning prize designation command is made to. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is seconded. 2 Make settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start prize designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 34 after the special symbol process process is completed. To.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the hold storage (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start opening buffer, initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 37, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (of the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information (step S1001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step S1002). If a predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area is "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step S1004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating "second" (that is, the data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (first). 1 Set the data indicating "first" in the flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step S1005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer or the data indicating "second" is set. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if even one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage becomes the second. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command of the side indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step S1009). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 22) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability changing state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, when the number of jackpot judgment values is probable, the jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical values in the lower column of FIG. 23A) are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values is probable. A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value in the upper column of FIG. 23A is set) is provided, which is set to be less than the jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic big hit determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in a state or a time-saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 23 (a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation as to whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the condition that the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) and the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier of the conditions is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of the stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1015 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 23 (b) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 23 (c) are used. Select one of the judgment tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 23 (b). Further, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 23 (c) when the special symbol pointer indicates "second". Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the jackpot type extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and stores the random number for determining the jackpot type in the reserved storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determining table. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 38, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the post-variation pattern based on random 3 and 4 according to the number of reserved storages and the presence / absence of a big hit (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 according to the number of reserved storages, and after the selection, the post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 3 are used later. Determine the variation pattern. Further, in the case of a big hit, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 28 according to the type of the big hit, and determines the post-variation pattern based on the selected post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the pre-variation pattern based on the random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the pre-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29 according to the post-variation pattern determined in S1102, and pre-variates based on the selected pre-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 5. Determine the pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (pre-variation pattern and post-variation pattern) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol change processing)
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the stop process (step S113) is updated (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 40, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 22. Control for derivation display is performed (step S1301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the change of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 is terminated. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROМ101, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and between rounds are performed for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal big hit of 3R, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning opening in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot of 5R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and the V large winning opening is opened at the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a probability variation jackpot of 10R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th R and the V large winning opening is opened at the 9th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. .. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the image display device 5 that a big hit has occurred), which is the big hit display time, is set in the big winning opening control timer (step S1307). After that, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set is set (step S1309). .. If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has ended, and the time reduction flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the reduced working hours state, the gaming state shifts from the reduced working hours state to the non-reduced working hours state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step S1311 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating that the probability change state is set is set (step S1313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability change flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the reduced working hours state to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (step S1315), and in step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1316), and the processing is terminated.

(Pre-processing for opening big hits)
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 41, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step S1404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during the opening of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 42, in the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step S1503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change determination flag is set (step S1506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability change determination flag is set (step S1508), the probability change determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 83 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 43, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, a value corresponding to (time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step S1603), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604). End the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the open number counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening (step S1605), and a round is sent to the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round in which the V-large winning opening is opened (also referred to as the V-opening round), that is, the next round is the V-opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the normal opening of the large winning opening (step S1608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), the solenoid 83 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 44, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the big hit flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning region is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the probability change determination flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step S1707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S1710), and 150 is set in the time saving number counter (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set is set in step S1705 (step S1705), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter. (Step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game state is the probability change, the time saving, or the normal game state by the probability change state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

(Main processing of production control)
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 45 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. The effect control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. As shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the result of the variable display is determined to be lost (step S7101). If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be lost, it confirms whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S7103).

When the effect control CPU 120 determines that a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 120 uses the loss symbol determination data table to determine the display result of the loss that does not reach as the final stop of the effect symbol (step). S7105), the process proceeds to step S7106.

When it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), a stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (step S7104), and step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, when it is not decided to make a loss in the process of step S7101 (when it is decided to make a big hit), the effect control CPU 101 configures a combination of big hit symbols according to the type of big hit. The stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for performing the process for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, the group notice setting process), the process proceeds to step S7107.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, the symbol variation control is performed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command and various effect control (effect operation) patterns specified by the effect control pattern of the effect determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the pattern table, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the effect symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol. Data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the fluctuation display operation, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream effect, and the effect display operation in the advance notice effect are stored as multiple types of symbol variation control patterns. Has been done.

Further, each symbol variation control pattern is used for displaying variation of the effect symbol such as the effect control process timer setting value, the effect control process timer determination value, the effect display control data, the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the end code. It includes control data for controlling various effect operations according to the situation, and the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like are set in time series.

Next, the process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process of step S7109, the effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, etc.) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data). Then, the control of the speakers 8L, 8R) as the effect component is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, the image display device 5 outputs a command to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (step S7111), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Group notice setting process)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice setting process. The group notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern command capable of executing the group advance notice has been received (step S7061). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 issues a variation pattern command including a posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss, and a variation pattern including a posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hitting. Determine if a command has been received. The variation pattern including the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation numbers 6 to 8 is the variation pattern of the main variation numbers 8 to 15, and the variation pattern including the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 is the main variation number 18. It is a fluctuation pattern of ~ 26.

When the effect control CPU 120 has not received the variation pattern command capable of executing the group notice (N in step S7061), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command capable of executing the group notice (Y in step S7061), the effect control CPU 120 converts the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 22, since the pre-variation time is 41500 msec, the number of frames is about 1246, and since the post-variation time is 91900 msec, the number of frames is about 3000. Further, for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 26, since the pre-variation time is 62000 msec, the number of frames is about 1861, and since the post-variation time is 142,800 msec, the number of frames is about 4288. ..

The effect control CPU 120 executes a group notice lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses the group notice lottery table shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b) to determine whether or not to execute the group notice based on the post-variation number, and to execute the group notice. Determine the type of.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group has won the advance notice lottery. If the effect control CPU 120 is not won in the group notice lottery (N in step S7064), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the group advance notice lottery (Y in step S7064), the effect control pattern for executing the group advance notice according to the stage is extracted (step S7065), and the process ends.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 985th frame among the 1246 frames in the previous fluctuation. The pattern is set. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22, and in the case of the stage B, the effect control pattern is set so as to execute the group notice from the 1385th frame out of the 3000 frames in the post-variation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 1600th frame among the 1861 frames in the previous fluctuation. The pattern is set. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 26 and in the case of the stage B, the effect control pattern is set so as to execute the group notice from the 2000th frame among the 4288 frames in the post-variation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group notice is executed in the pre-variation, whereas in the case of stage B, the group notice is executed in the post-variation. There is.

(Group notice execution processing)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice execution process. The group advance notice execution process is a process included in the variable display during effect process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the number of frames corresponding to the effect control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the main variation number 26 is set, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the 6149th frame, which is the total number of frames.

When the effect control pattern for executing the group advance notice is not set (N in step S7202), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control pattern for executing the group notice is set (Y in step S7202), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the frame of the group notice execution timing has been reached (S7203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 and in the case of the stage A.

When the effect control CPU 120 has not reached the frame of the execution timing of the group notice (N in step S7203), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 reaches the frame of the execution timing of the group notice (Y in step S7203), the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices to execute the group notice (step S7204). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to turn on, blink, or turn off the game effect lamp 9 based on the group notice lighting table shown in FIGS. 64 to 70, which will be described later, and controls the speakers 8R and 8L. Controls to output sound. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of the progress of the game]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first hits the left side to launch the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the area on the left side of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 4. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that urges the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow directed to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handedness are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 9030 of the special figure LED board 9020 and the right-handed display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 also prompt right-handed by lighting a lighting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the big hit game state, the big winning openings are opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a normal big hit of 3R and 10 times in the case of a probable big hit of 10R). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced working hours state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V prize is generated during the big hit round, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled in the time saving state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special map fluctuation time (period in which the special map is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal map is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened is increased, so that the frequency at which the game ball enters the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize in the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As described above, there are 5 to 9 probabilistic jackpots as the types of jackpots in the second special figure game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055 has continued from the time of the first hit.

During the round of the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced time state and the probable change state (high probability high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probable change state or time saving state after the big hit round is finished, and the player will be in the probable change state or time saving after the big hit round per continuous chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probable change state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055 is also completed. As a result, the player will launch the game ball toward the first flow path through the left area of the game area by hitting the left again.

[Design of group notice production]
Next, the design of the group notice effect in the development stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice work process. As shown in FIG. 50, the work process of the group notice consists of a summary document creation process (step S901), an animation production process (step S902), this video production process (step S903), and an authoring process in the order of the work. (Step S904), sound creation process (step S905), lottery incorporating process (step S906), video incorporating process (step S907), sound incorporating process (step S908), and lamp data. The production step (step S909) and the lamp incorporating step (step S910) are included.

In the process of creating the summary document in step S901, a summary document for newly designing the group notice is created in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the animation production process of step S902, the storyboard of the animation used in the group notice is created, the characters and backgrounds used in the animation are designed, the V-conte is created as a script for creating the animation, and the CG for the animation is created. Production and actual animation production are performed.

In the main video production process of step S903, the video data used in the group notice is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group notice is created in this video production process, but the reproduction time of the created video data is longer than the execution time of the group notice actually executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Created longer. As a result, even if the execution time of the group notice becomes long due to the design change, the video data created in this video production process can be used as it is without being changed. Further, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played back at a predetermined timing for each production. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22, the group notice animation is incorporated in this video so that the group notice of the stage A is executed from the 985th frame, and the group notice of the stage B is the 1385th frame. The animation of the group notice is incorporated in this video so that the group notice is executed from. Further, in the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26, the group notice animation is incorporated in this video so that the group notice of the stage A is executed from the 1600th frame, and the group notice of the stage B is the 2000th frame. The animation of the group notice is incorporated in this video so that the group notice is executed from.

In the authoring step of step S904, software (program) for video reproduction executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created using the video data created in the video production step.

In the sound creation step of step S905, data of various sounds such as BGM (background sound) and sound effects used in the group notice are created in accordance with the video of the group notice.

In the process of incorporating the lottery in step S906, data about various lottery related to the group notice such as the group notice lottery is created. In the process of incorporating the lottery, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the group notice is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as software for lottery executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding step of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software executed by the group notice.

In the sound incorporating step of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creating step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound reproduction executed by the group notice.

In the lamp data creation step of step S908, various lighting data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing in the lighting means (light emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in the group notice are created.

In the process of incorporating the lamp in step S910, various data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of lamps and LEDs created in the lamp data creation process are used as software for lamp reproduction executed in pachinko game 1. It is incorporated in the game machine 1.

Through the work in each of these steps, lottery, video, sound data, and the like related to the group notice effect are created and incorporated as software so as to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(This video production)
The present video production process of the group notice will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. 51 to 54 are diagrams for explaining an example of this video production process.

As shown in FIG. 51, first, in STEP 1, a character image used in the group notice is prepared. For example, in the group notice, the main character Yumemu-chan is used, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to show the mode in which Yumemu-chan runs. It should be noted that such a character image is created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP2, using the moving image creation tool, a moving image in which the character steps on the four character images g1 to g4 is created. For example, when the video creation tool is started, the timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or a plurality of layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. Each layer is arranged in numerical order such as layers 1, 2, 3 ... from the top, and the more the layers are arranged on the top (that is, the younger the number), the more the image is on the back side on the screen of the image display device 5. It is designed to be located. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to the values desired by the user.

In STEP2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a predetermined layer column. For example, in the example shown in (a), the character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to the layer 1 to form the moving image data A1 to A4. According to the moving image data A1 to A4, it is a stepping motion of a pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4.

If the set of the moving image data A1 to A4 for stepping created as described above is repeatedly arranged on the timeline, the moving image for the character to step on is repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the moving image data A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles. Then, this stepping video data is output. In this way, the stepping motion is created for the other characters by the same work.

As shown in FIG. 52, in STEP3, a moving image in which the character progresses is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X-axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the width of the XY-axis along the vertical direction on the screen is set to 640. In both the X-axis and the Y-axis, the value corresponding to the center position is 0. Therefore, the screen size is −400 ≦ X ≦ 400 and −320 ≦ Y ≦ 320.

By using the setting screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set the width at which the video data moves. For example, in the example shown in (b), one cycle of the stepping moving image data A1 to A4 of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is set to 500, and the pattern is linearly moved on the X axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500. Is set to.

As shown in FIG. 53, in STEP 4, a moving image in which a plurality of characters progress is created. For example, in the example shown in (a), moving image data in which the character Jam-chan used for the group notice moves linearly on the X-axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500 is created by the same creation procedure.

As described above, when moving image data that linearly moves on the X axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500 is created for a plurality of characters, the moving image data of each character is placed on different layers as shown in (b). Deploy. Also, if the time axis is shifted between the characters, the timing of appearance can be shifted. Further, if the position of the Y-axis is shifted between the characters, the position on the Y-axis where the character appears can be shifted. The Z axis is an axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen, and by inputting a value, the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen are input. It is possible to design the effect of the group notice (Boingo group notice of the present embodiment) so that the character moves between the side and the side.

As shown in FIG. 54, in STEP 5, a moving image of the group notice is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), by arranging the moving image data of six types of characters such as characters A to F on the timeline of the layer, the moving image of the group notice is completed.

Further, if the length of the moving image data on the timeline is changed, the animation itself changes the speed at which the character moves while maintaining the moving image in which the moving image of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles. Can be done. For example, the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 10 is the moving image data in which the moving image of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles, like the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 9. , The length on the timeline in the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline in the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 9. As a result, the character C arranged on the layer 10 advances on the screen at a faster speed than the character C arranged on the layer 9 while maintaining the same animation as the character C arranged on the layer 9. ..

In the 6-person group notice, a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen. For example, also in the example shown in FIG. 54A, moving image data of a plurality of characters are not arranged on the timeline at the same timing and at the same length.

Further, as shown in (b), if the moving image data of sand smoke is arranged on the layer 1 located on the backmost side, the moving image of sand smoke can be combined with the moving image in which a plurality of characters progress.

As described above, it is possible to create moving image data of a group notice in which a plurality of characters progress. In the actual creation of the video data of the group notice, it is assumed that the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the game board 2 covers the screen. The video data of the group notice is created with the area corresponding to the position covered with a mask. Further, the group notice moving image data is created up to the area corresponding to the large size so that the screen can be applied to a size larger than a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches) (for example, 20 inches).

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an overall picture of the 6-person group notice. As shown in FIG. 55, in the 6-person group notice included in the group notice effect, an image in which 6 characters such as maid A to maid F progress as a group is displayed. The group notice effect is not limited to the six characters, but the appearance of a plurality of each character makes it possible to display the largest number of characters among the effects that can be performed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Maid A to Maid F all wear the same or substantially the same maid clothes, it is difficult to distinguish the type of character other than recognizing by face. In the present embodiment, the design of the apron worn by each character is different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the difference at first glance. Maid A is Yume-chan, who is the main character, and Maid B is Jam-chan, who is the next highest priority character of Yume-chan, who is the main character.

In the 6-person group notice, the character image may fit in the display area of the image display device 5, or a part of the character image (for example, face or foot) does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. In some cases. For example, of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 6 maids A (Yumemu-chan) will appear, but 5 of them have visible faces. That is, the face of one of the six maids A appears does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maid B (Jam-chan) will appear, of which 4 are maid B whose faces are visible. That is, the face of one of the five maids B appears does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids C will appear, of which 3 maids C can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid C do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids D will appear, of which 3 maids D can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid D do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids E will appear, of which 3 maids E can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid E do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids F will appear, of which 3 maids F can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid F do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, the plurality of characters displayed in the group notice effect are the character in which the whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen and the character in which a part of the whole body (for example, the face) does not fit in the display area of the screen. This includes a character in which other parts of the whole body (for example, a part other than the face) are displayed within the display area of the screen.

In addition, the plurality of characters displayed in the group notice production are characters of low importance in the contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as maids C to F, and maid A (Yumemu-chan) and maid B (jam-chan). Including characters that are more important than maids C to F in the contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1, maids A and B have a whole body that does not fit in the display area of the screen as compared to maids C to F. The proportion of parts other than the face that fit in the display area of the screen and are displayed is low. That is, the maid A and the maid B are designed to have a higher proportion of maids appearing while showing their faces than the maids C to F.

(Auxiliary display)
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining an auxiliary display used in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 56, in the group notice effect, an auxiliary display is performed to emphasize that the character is progressing. In the present embodiment, an image of sand smoke is displayed as an auxiliary display. Displaying an image of sand smoke near the character, more effectively following the progressing character, can make the player feel as if the character's progress is causing sand smoke, and so on. It is possible to emphasize the mode in which the character runs through. As shown in FIG. 54 (b) described above, the image of sand smoke, which is an auxiliary display, is arranged on the layer 1 located on the backmost side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56, the image of sand smoke is located on the back side of any of the appearing characters.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56, the layer on which the image of maid E is placed is on the front side of the layer on which the image of maid C is placed, so that the image of maid E is from the image of maid C. Is also displayed on the front side. On the other hand, the image of the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is located on the back side of both the image of the maid E and the image of the maid C.

In this way, when the display of the maid E and the display of the maid C overlap, the display of the maid E has priority over the display of the other maid C, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is used. When the display of the maid C overlaps with the display of the maid C, the display of the maid C has priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E.

(Motion blur processing)
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the motion blur process used in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 57, in the group notice effect, motion blur processing is applied to the progressing character. Motion blur processing is a process for displaying an afterimage of an object (for example, a character). By performing motion blur processing on the display of a progressing character, an afterimage of the character is displayed after the progressing character. It will be displayed. This makes it possible to create a dynamic group notice effect. Further, when the image obtained by the motion blur processing for one character overlaps with the image obtained by the motion blur processing for another character, the motion blur processing for the one character is performed so as not to impair the visibility of the other character. The image is transparent.

(Aspect of contour when characters overlap)
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining an aspect of contours when characters overlap in a group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 58, in the group notice effect, one character may overtake another character. At that time, when the display of the character to be overtaken and the display of the other character overlap, the outline of the character to be overtaken is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), it is shown that the maid B located on the front side of the maid A overtakes the maid A, but in this case, the contour of the maid B is larger than the contour of the maid A. It is thicker and Maid B is highlighted more than Maid A. Further, it is shown that the maid A located on the front side of the maid F overtakes the maid F. In this case, the contour of the maid A is thicker than the contour of the maid F, and the maid A It is displayed with more emphasis than Maid F.

Further, in the example shown in (b), it is shown that the maid B located on the front side of the maid A overtakes the maid A, but in this case, the contour of the maid B is larger than the contour of the maid A. It is thicker and Maid B is highlighted more than Maid A. Further, it is shown that the maid A located on the front side of the maid D overtakes the maid D. In this case, the contour of the maid A is thicker than the contour of the maid D, and the maid A It is displayed with more emphasis than Maid D.

When one character overtakes another character, it is not limited to thickening the outline of one character, but the size of one character may be increased or the brightness of one character may be higher than the brightness of another character. It may be displayed with one character emphasized more than the other characters by increasing the height or making the contrast of one character clearer than the contrast of the other characters.

(Display on the screen of the image display device)
FIG. 59 is a view looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during the execution of the group notice effect. As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 described above, since the gaming board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. Of the edges, the portion covered by the game board 2 is invisible. However, as shown in FIG. 59, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized.

Here, in FIG. 59, as shown in (a), the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, is not yet displayed in the 6-person group notice, but a part of the maid A (this example). Then, from the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, as shown in (b), the entire maid A displayed first is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is the first. The second, which is displayed more than the situation, and the whole of the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not displayed yet, while a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) is displayed. It has been shown that the situation will be. Further, the first displayed character (maid A) and the second displayed character (maid B) have different Y-axis position coordinates along the vertical direction on the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs when the image display device 5 is visually recognized with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the game board 2 and the image display are displayed. This occurs regardless of whether the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking through the device 5. That is, FIG. 59 is a case where the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 19B, the game board 2 is an image display device. Even if the edge of the screen of 5 is covered, the whole maid A (Yumemu-chan) who is the main character is not yet displayed in the 6-person group notice, but a part of the maid A (this example). Then, from the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, the whole of the first displayed maid A is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is displayed more than the first situation, and 2 The second situation is that while the entire maid B (Jam-chan) displayed second is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

(Overview of Baku Chu Mondai Notice)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the whole picture of the Baku Chu Mondai notice. As shown in FIG. 60, in the Baku Chu group notice included in the group notice effect, an image in which characters such as Baku Chu progress as a group is displayed.

In the Baku Chu Mondai notice, the character image may fit in the display area of the image display device 5, or a part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) may not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and may protrude. In some cases.

As described above, in the Baku Chu Mondai notice, the moving image data of the Baku Chu Mondai notice is created by arranging the image of the animation in which one kind of character moves on the screen. The moving image data in the Baku Chu Mondai notice is also created based on the work process shown in FIGS. 50 to 54 by the same method as the moving image data in the 6-person group notice.

(Volume change and brightness data table in group notice production)
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a luminance data table in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 61, the group notice production (6 person group notice, Baku Chu notice, Boingo group notice) includes the first display period (1000 msec), the second display period (1310 msec), and the third display period (830 msec). It is divided into.

The first display period is a period from the first start of the character display in the group notice effect to the first end of the character display. More specifically, the first display period is a period from the first appearance of any character in the group notice effect to the first disappearance of any character. For example, if one character first appears in the group notice effect and the one character progresses at the top as it is, the period until the one character disappears is the first display period. Alternatively, if one character first appears in the group notice effect and the one character is overtaken by another character, the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen is the first display period. .. In the present embodiment, in the first display period, the display of the second displayed character ends before the display of the first displayed character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, the first character is overtaken by the second appearing character, and the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which the state in which the display of the new character starts and ends continues. More specifically, in the second display period, after any character disappears first in the group notice effect, a state in which new characters appear one after another continues, and the last character appears. It is the period until it appears. The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period. Further, in the second display period, the number of characters appearing is larger than in each of the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period in which the display of the character ends without starting the display of the new character. More specifically, the third display period is the period from the appearance of the last character in the group notice effect to the disappearance of all the characters. The character that disappears last is not limited to the character that appears last, and may be a character that is omitted by the character that appears last. The third display period is longer than the first display period.

Regarding the change in volume in the group notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the effect sound of the effect sound is started in the first display period. The volume is raised to a specific volume, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 60, with respect to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, the volume is the minimum (for example, mute or the lowest volume) at the beginning of the first display period, and then gradually increases gradually. It reaches the specified value and is maintained at the specified value (for example, set volume or maximum volume) thereafter. Even in the second display period, the volume remains at the specified value. After that, in the third display period, the volume is maintained at a specified value, and then gradually decreases to the minimum.

It should be noted that the stepwise increase in volume from the minimum to the specified value in the first display period is referred to as volume fade-in. Further, the process in which the volume gradually decreases from the specified value to the minimum in the third display period is referred to as volume fade-out. In the present embodiment, the fade-in time from the output of the effect sound in the first display period to the increase in the volume of the effect sound from the minimum to the specified value decreases the volume of the effect sound in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from the beginning to the minimum volume of the effect sound.

The luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means. The plurality of lighting means are frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric. Includes game effect lamps such as Chu Lamp 9H, Stick Controller Lamp 9J, and Trigger Button Lamp 9K. The luminance data table includes a first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period, a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period. .. That is, in the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 is turned on, blinks, or turned off based on the brightness data included in the first brightness data table, and is included in the second brightness data table in the second display period. The predetermined game effect lamp 9 is turned on, blinked, or turned off based on the brightness data, and in the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 is turned on, blinked, or turned off based on the brightness data included in the third brightness data table. Or turn off.

(Timing of 6-person notice at stage A)
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of the 6-person group notice in stage A. As described above, in stage A, the 6-person group notice is executed from the 1600th frame during the pre-variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 62, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9 which is lost in the first half of SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). The 6-person group notice starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of loss in the first half of SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a loss display result ( In the 2984 frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the latter half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 20 that hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 20 that is hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In 4662 frames), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half (2331th frame) of the total variation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames) (2331th frame). The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 23 that is hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In the 4861 frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half (about 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). (The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that hits in the final reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26, which is a hit in the final reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the final reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period (6149) from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result. In the frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half of the total variation time (6149 frames) (about 3074th frame) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). (The second half).

In the present embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-variation time is set longer, so that the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the predetermined period until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result, the first display period of the 6-person notice is not configured to start in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. .. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of SP reach or the final reach, from the start of variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a lost display result. In a predetermined period, the first display period of the 6-person group notice may be started in the first half of the predetermined period.

FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the occurrence timing of the Baku Chu Mondai notice in the stage B. As described above, in stage B, the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9 which is lost in the first half of SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). The Baku Chu Mondai notice starts from the 66600msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of loss in the first half of SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a loss display result ( In the 2984 frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the latter half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 20 that hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 20 that is hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th ram) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In 4662 frames), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (2331th frame) of the total variation time (4662 frame) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frame). (The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 23 that is hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In the 4861 frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (2000th frame) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed is close to half (about 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). Timing (second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that hits in the latter half of the final reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 26 which is a hit in the final reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the final reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period (6149) from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result. In the frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (2000th frame) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed is close to half (about 3074th frame) of the total variation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). Timing (second half).

In the present embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-variation time is set longer, so that the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the predetermined period until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result, the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. No. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or in the final reach, from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the lost display result. In a predetermined period, the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice within the predetermined period may be configured to start.

[Brightness data]
With reference to FIGS. 64 to 88, the luminance data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 controls various lighting means in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. These luminance data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the lighting (light emitting) portion of the game effect lamp according to the display in the group notice based on the luminance data stored in the luminance data table. In the present embodiment, the lit place literally means a lit place, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the lit place is referred to as a lit place, and other lamps. The place where the lamp that is not lit (that is, the lamp that is off) is located is not called the lit place. In another example, the lighting location refers to a portion that is lit with high brightness, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lamp that is lit with high brightness is located is lit. The place where the lamp lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the lit place is located may not be called the lit place.

More specifically, the data (also referred to as an element) for turning on or off the lamp is defined by the brightness data table, and in such a brightness data table, the data storage area referred to by a specific lamp is used. If 0 data (for example, "000" data corresponding to RGB) is stored, the specific lamp is turned off. Further, when the data storage area referred to by the specific lamp does not exist in the luminance data table, or the luminance data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp is turned off. On the other hand, there is a luminance data table referenced by a specific lamp, and one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB are stored in the data storage area referenced by the specific lamp. If is stored, the specific lamp is lit. For example, when a specific effect such as a big hit notice effect is executed at the time of an effect corresponding to a normal background, the specific lamp is referred to in the specific effect. Even if the data of a specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table, if the data of a specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table referred to in the effect corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp is lit. Will be done.

(Parent table in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the group warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 64, in the parent table in the group warning brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the group notice effect is defined.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 3140 msec so as to match the group notice effect.

(Child table in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 65, in the child table in the group advance notice brightness data table, the time of the group notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the first display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 97 to 98 and 153 to 155, which will be described later), among the periods in which the group notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is about W1 and the accessory lamp 9A is about. A grandchild table of Y1, L1 for the left lamp 9B, U1 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the first display period correspond to the first luminance data table shown in FIG. 61.

In the second display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 99, 100, 156, and 157, which will be described later), the frame lamp is W2, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y2. A grandchild table of L2 for the left panel lamp 9B, U2 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A2 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second luminance data table shown in FIG.

In the third display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 101, 102, 158, and 159, which will be described later), the frame lamp is W3, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y3. A grandchild table of L3 for the left panel lamp 9B, U3 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A3 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third luminance data table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65, regarding the luminance data table referred to in the group notice effect, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, and the combination in any of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period. Six types of luminance data tables are provided: an object lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp.

The V lamp 9G is located at a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect (for example, near the appearance of the character in the group notice effect), but since it is not used in the group notice effect, its grandchild table Is not prepared. Since the V lamp 9G is a lamp that notifies that a round of a jackpot game state in which a V prize can be generated is in progress or that a V prize has occurred, or a lamp that notifies that a jackpot has occurred, in the group notice production. If it lights up, it will be misunderstood that the player is winning a V or winning a big hit, and in order to avoid such inconvenience, the V lamp 9G is used in the group notice production. Not. The V lamp 9G may be provided at another position such as the vicinity of the left lamp 9B on the board as a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect, but even in this case, the group notice effect is also provided. It may not be used in.

Further, the stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B are located at positions related to the direction in which the character advances in the group advance notice effect (for example, the character advances in the group advance notice effect). However, since it is not used in the group notice production, its grandchildren's table is not prepared. The stick controller lamp 9J is lit to encourage an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A in an operation effect (effect shown in FIG. 134 (c91) described later), and the trigger button lamp 9K is a PUSH effect (FIG. 95 (described later)). Since the lamp is lit to encourage the operation of pressing the push button 31B in the effect shown in a19), the player can operate the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B if the lamp is lit in the group notice effect. This is because the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group notice production in order to avoid such inconvenience. The stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K may be provided at other positions such as near the left panel lamp 9B as positions related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect. However, it may not be used in the group notice production.

The features of the grandchild tables W1 to W3 used for the grandchild table in the group notice production are summarized below. Specifically, the number of high-luminance lighting points is larger in W2 than in W1. Regarding the switching interval, W1 controls lighting at equal intervals at 100 msec, while W2 controls lighting at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and for W3, 10 msec with respect to the frame left lamp 9L. While lighting control is performed at short intervals, lighting control is performed at long intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp 9R.

Regarding the lighting pattern, the brightness data is specified so that W1 is lit with high brightness while moving the lighting location according to the traveling direction of the group notice, while W2 is lit with high brightness over a plurality of locations. Luminance data is specified so that the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the traveling direction of the group notice for W3. There is. Regarding the first luminance data, the luminance data is specified so that all the lamps are turned off or turned on at low luminance in W1, whereas the W2 and W3 are made to emit light at high luminance at the predetermined lighting points. Luminance data is specified. On the other hand, regarding the final luminance data, the luminance data is specified so that the W3 turns off all the lamps or turns on the lamps with low luminance for both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R.

Regarding the luminance data loop, the luminance data is specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in W1 and W3, whereas the luminance data is specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in W2. W1 and W3 are specified for the 10-minute luminance data for defect countermeasures, whereas W2 is not specified.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group warning luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec. Further, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified. Further, in W1, the first luminance data, which is a combination of the data for turning off each lamp included in the frame lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance, and the first luminance data for each hour. The combination of the data for turning off each lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance is composed of the second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also specified for each of the other hours.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "R" for all the lamps included in the frame lamp, and "G" and "G" and " "0" indicating that the light is turned off is specified in "B". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a22) and 153 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low brightness. It will be like. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on. In the present embodiment, in order to make the effect effective by lighting each lamp mainly in red, "1" indicating low brightness is defined in "R", and "G" and "B" are specified. "0" is specified to indicate that the lamp is off, but for example, when each lamp is mainly lit in green, "1" is specified to indicate low brightness in "G", and "R" and "B" are specified. It suffices if "0" indicating extinguishing is specified in, and when each lamp lights mainly in blue, "1" indicating low brightness is specified in "B" and extinguished in "R" and "G". It suffices if "0" indicating is specified.

Further, in W1, as indicated by the dotted arrow, the lamps that are lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 to the frame left lamp are at equal intervals of 100 msec from T1-2 to T1-10. Luminance data is specified to move with. Here, the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 corresponds to the part where the character appears in the group notice, and the brightness data is displayed so that the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character advances. It is stipulated. The left frame lamp is initially turned off or turned on at low brightness, and gradually increases as the location of the lamp that lights at high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. Luminance data is specified so that the lamp lights up with luminance. On the other hand, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8, which were initially lit with high brightness, are turned off or turned on with low brightness as the portion of the lamp that is lit with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. Luminance data is specified in. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98 and 153 to 155, which will be described later, the frame lamp is also from the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character appears from the right end of the screen and progresses in the group notice. The position where it lights up with high brightness changes toward the left side.

Further, in W1, the data including data for turning on one frame lamp with high brightness and turning off another frame lamp adjacent to the one frame lamp is included, and the brightness is such that the portion of the lamp that is turned on in stages moves. The data is specified. As a result, in W1, the location of the lamp that lights up with high brightness can be moved according to the direction in which the character travels.

Further, in W1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the frame lamps are sparsely high in brightness according to the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamps when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

Here, if the data for this 10 minutes is not provided, the lamp lighting control is performed again from T1-1 when the lighting control is performed using W1 and the lamp does not shift to W2 due to some abnormality. Even though the character of the group notice has already appeared and is progressing, as shown by the dotted arrow, it is high again from the vicinity of the frame right lamp 9R5-9R8 from T1-2 to T1-10. The part of the lamp that lights up with brightness will move, giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, in the present embodiment, since the data for 10 minutes is provided in T1-11, even if the lighting control is performed using W1 and the lighting is not transferred to W2 due to some abnormality, the data is set in 10 minutes. Since the frame lamp can be turned on in a light emitting mode suitable for the grandchild table W2, it is possible to prevent a feeling of strangeness. Then, if the abnormality is resolved in these 10 minutes, the player can continue the game without any particular discomfort.

In W1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

Further, the luminance data for 10 minutes for defect countermeasures specified in W1 is the luminance data in which adjacent frame lamps are regularly lit in order so that the lighting location deviates from the state of the previous T1-10. be.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is stored for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. It is stipulated. Further, in W2, the first luminance data, which is a combination of the data for turning off each lamp included in the frame lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance, and the first luminance data for each hour. The combination of the data for turning off each lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance is composed of the second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also specified for each of the other hours.

In W2, one frame lamp is lit with high brightness, and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamp contains brightness data and is sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness. Luminance data is specified so that For example, in W2, high-luminance data (for example, “A”) is sparsely defined so as to be lit with high brightness over a plurality of locations. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99, 100, 156, and 157, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the frame lamp is set according to the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. Will be sparsely lit with high brightness. Further, W2 is designed to light more frame lamps with higher brightness than W1.

Since the W2 is not provided with the luminance data for defect countermeasures unlike the W1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10. Here, even if the lighting control of the lamp is performed again from T2-1 when the lighting control is performed using W2 and the lamp does not shift to W3 due to some abnormality, the frame lamp is sparsely high. Since the mode of lighting with brightness is merely repeated, the player does not feel any discomfort.

Further, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all of the data referred to for each time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10, but the time for creating each data. Also, it takes time to confirm that the created data is correct, which is very inefficient. On the other hand, as in W2 of the present embodiment, by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10 to perform lighting control, only one set of data that is repeatedly referred to can be created. The time efficiency can be improved. The reason why the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using one set of data in the second display period in the group notice effect is that the second display period in the group notice effect is larger than the first display period and the third display period. Since the second display period is long and the second display period is a time zone in which the screen is filled with a plurality of characters and the plurality of characters proceed as a group, the lighting corresponding to such an effect is lit. This is because it is sufficient to repeat the same lighting as the embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 66 (c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is transmitted to the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. It is stipulated. After that, RGB data is specified over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec for the frame left lamp, and continues over T3-7 to T3-38 at long intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp. RGB data is specified.

Further, in W3, as shown by the dotted arrow, the lamps that were lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 gradually turn off or are gradually turned off from T3-2 to T3-30. Increase the number of lamps that are turned off or turned on at low brightness so that they turn on at brightness. Further, for T3-7 to T3-38, in the case of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, the luminance data is specified at intervals of 80 msec, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the character advances in the group notice. For ~ 9L12, the luminance data is specified so that the luminance is turned off or the luminance is changed from high luminance to low luminance at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 101, 102, 158, and 159, which will be described later, the frame lamp also changes from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned off or the position where the light is turned on at low brightness is changed.

Further, in W3, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low luminance at the time of transition to T3-30. Further, in W3, similarly to W1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when the next production is performed.

In W3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the group warning luminance data table. As described above, the accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the luminance data table shown in FIG. 67, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are sequentially "corresponded to". It is expressed as "RRRR". Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. It should be noted that the monochromatic LED has less filters that block light than the full-color LED, so that the spectrum is strongly emitted. Therefore, the monochromatic LED has a smaller luminance data corresponding to the higher luminance than the full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In Y1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a22) and 153 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in Y1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the accessory lamp 9A is set according to the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that the lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In Y1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In Y2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99, 100, 156, and 157, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the characters are arranged in a group in the group notice effect. The lamp 9A will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in Y2 as in Y1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 67 (c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in Y3, similarly to Y1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the accessory lamp 9A is lit at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next production is started.

In Y3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for left lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a left lamp in the group warning luminance data table. As described above, the panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the luminance data table shown in FIG. 68, the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are sequentially "corresponded to". It is expressed as "WWWWWW". Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the left panel lamp 9B, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In L1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a22) and 153 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in L1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the panel left lamp 9B is set according to the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the panel left lamp 9B when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that the lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In L1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the left panel lamp 9B over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In L2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99, 100, 156, and 157, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the left side of the board is adjusted to the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. The lamp 9B will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in L2 as in L1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in L3, similarly to L1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the panel left lamp 9B is lit with low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the panel left lamp 9B when the next production is performed.

In L3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for on-board lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the group warning luminance data table. As described above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 has a plurality of colors (in this example, red (in this example). It is an LED (3 colors of R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number of "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. As described above, the high-luminance value used in the multi-color LED is larger than the high-luminance value used in the monochromatic LED. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the on-board lamp 9C, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 69 (a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In U1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a22) and 153 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in U1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the on-board lamp 9C is set according to the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when the next second display period is entered. The brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In U1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 69 (b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the on-board lamp 9C over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In U2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99, 100, 156, and 157, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the characters are grouped on the board in the group notice effect. The lamp 9C will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the U2 is not provided with the luminance data for troubleshooting as in the U1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 69 (c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in U3, similarly to U1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when the next production is started.

In U3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

In any of U1, U2, and U3, only the data of "0" is specified for the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 which are monochromatic. That is, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are not used in the group notice effect.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the group warning luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is from "0" to "0". Brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number of "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. As described above, the high-luminance value used in the multi-color LED is larger than the high-luminance value used in the monochromatic LED. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the V attacker lamp 9F, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 70A, in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In A1, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is specified for all lamps in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a22) and 153 (b43) described later, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are turned off at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect. Or it comes to light at low brightness. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in A1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, each lamp has sparsely high brightness according to the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of each lamp when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

In A1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Has been done.

In A2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99, 100, 156, and 157, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the attacker lamps match the appearance of the characters forming a group in the group notice effect. The 9E, the electric Chu lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in the A2 as in the A1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 70 (c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in A3, as in A1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F when shifting to the next production. The brightness data is specified so that the lamp 9F is turned off or turned on at low brightness.

In A3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Parent table in reach line luminance data table)
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 71, in the parent table in the reach line brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the reach line effect is defined.

Unlike the group notice effect, the reach line effect is an effect that announces that the display result of the variable display by the special figure or the decorative pattern will be the display result that the jackpot symbol stops, and it is a game that the reach is reached. It is a production that suggests (or informs) the person. In the reach line effect, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 94 and 141 to 144, which will be described later, a light streak (also referred to as a reach line) appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 together with a flash of light. , The reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (in the left-right direction) so as to connect the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table in the reach line luminance data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 1500 msec so as to match the reach line effect.

(Child table in reach line data table)
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 72, in the child table in the reach line luminance data table, the time of the reach line effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (luminance data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the period during which the reach line effect is executed, the period during which the flash occurs (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 91 (a8), (a9) and 141 (a8), (a9) described later) is a frame. A grandchild table of W11 for the lamp, Y11 for the accessory lamp 9A, L11 for the left panel lamp 9B, U11 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided.

Among the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which the reach line occurs (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 92 and 142 described later), the frame lamp is W12, the accessory lamp 9A is Y12, and the left panel lamp. A grandchild table of L12 is provided for each of 9B. Since the on-board lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E are not used during the period when the reach line is generated, the grandchild table is not prepared.

Among the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, the period in which the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (shown in FIGS. 93 (a13) to 94 (b17) and FIGS. 143 (a13) to 144 (b17) described later). During the production period), a grandchild table of W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the accessory lamp 9A, L13 for the left panel lamp 9B, U13 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A13 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided.

Among the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, in the period in which the reach line disappears (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 94 (a18) and 144 (b18) described later), the frame lamp is W14 and the accessory lamp 9A is Y14. , L14 for the left board lamp 9B, U14 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 72, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, the frame left in any of the period in which the flash occurs, the period in which the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward, and the period in which the reach line disappears. Six types of brightness data tables are provided: a lamp 9L, a frame right lamp 9R, an accessory lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp. On the other hand, regarding the luminance data table referred to in the reach line effect, in the luminance data table referred to during the period when the reach line is generated, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B. Four types of luminance data tables are provided.

As described above, in the reach line effect, the luminance data table is provided for the same number of lamps as the group advance notice effect or a smaller number of lamps than the group advance notice effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 73A, in the grandchild table W11, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line production is a production that suggests to the player that it has reached the reach, and is not a production that arouses the player's expectation by suggesting a big hit like the group notice production. For this reason, the reach line effect does not perform elaborate lighting control such as providing different luminance data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually as in the group notice effect. Common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together. Furthermore, since the reach line effect has a shorter execution time than the group advance notice effect, it is elaborate to provide different luminance data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and control each lamp individually as in the group advance notice effect. Rather than performing lighting control, common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together.

In W11, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 (a8) and 141 (b8) described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high luminance at the timing when the flash occurs. ..

As shown in FIG. 73B, in the grandchild table W12, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 142, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

As shown in FIG. 73 (c), in the grandchild table W13, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 143, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

As shown in FIG. 73 (d), in the grandchild table W14, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, the luminance data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 94 (a18) and 144 (b18) described later, the frame lamp is turned off as the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the grandchild table Y11, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 (a8) and 141 (b8) described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit with high luminance at the timing when the flash is generated. ing.

As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the grandchild table Y12, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 142, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 74 (c), in the grandchild power strip Y13, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T13-1 to T13-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 143, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 74 (d), in the grandchild table Y14, the luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 94 (a18) and 144 (b18) described later, the accessory lamp 9A is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a panel left lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the grandchild table L11, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 (a8) and 141 (b8) described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit with high luminance at the timing when the flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the grandchild table L12, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 142, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 75 (c), in the grandchild table L13, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 143, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 75 (d), in the grandchild table L14, the luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 94 (a18) and 144 (b18) described later, the left panel lamp 9B is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in the grandchild table U11, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 (a8) and 141 (b8) described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, among the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are used. Luminance data is specified so that the lamp lights up with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the grandchild table U13, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 143, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified as such.

As shown in FIG. 76 (d), in the grandchild table L14, the luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 94 (a18) and 144 (b18) described later, the on-board lamp 9C is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". "To" F "represents the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 77 (a), in the grandchild table A11, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 (a8) and 141 (b8) described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are bright so as to light up with high brightness. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 77 (b), in the grandchild power strip A13, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T13 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 143, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated. There is.

As shown in FIG. 77 (d), in the grandchild table A14, the brightness data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 94 (a18) and 144 (b18) described later, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Parent table in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the background warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 78, in the parent table in the background warning brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the background notice effect is defined.

The background notice effect is different from the group advance notice effect, and is an effect that announces that the display result of the variable display by the special figure or the decorative pattern will be the display result that the jackpot symbol stops, and is a specific character (for example, jam). Chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, the background of the starry sky).

In the parent table in the background notice luminance data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 5500 msec so as to match the background notice effect.

(Child table in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 79, in the child table in the background advance notice brightness data table, the time of the background notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the first 2000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W21, the accessory lamp 9A is Y21, the board left lamp 9B is L21, the board lamp 9C is U21, and the attacker lamp 9E. A grandchild table of A21 is provided respectively.

During the 100 msec period during which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W22, the accessory lamp 9A is Y22, the board left lamp 9B is L22, the board lamp 9C is U22, and the attacker lamp 9E is A22. Each grandchild table is provided.

In the final 600,000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W23, the accessory lamp 9A is Y23, the board left lamp 9B is L23, the board lamp 9C is U23, and the attacker lamp 9E is A23. Each grandchild table is provided.

As shown in FIG. 79, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the background notice effect, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, and the accessory lamp 9A are used in any of the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the last 600,000 msec. , A board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp are provided with six types of brightness data tables.

As described above, in the background advance notice effect, the luminance data table is provided for the same number of lamps as the group advance notice effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 80A, in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 80B, in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 80 (c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the grandchild table Y21, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the grandchild table Y22, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the grandchild Tave Y23, the luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a left lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the grandchild table L21, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the grandchild table L22, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the grandchild table L23, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the background warning brightness data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a), in the grandchild table U21, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), in the grandchild table U22, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 83 (c), in the grandchild table U23, the luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". "To" F "represents the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the grandchild table A21, the brightness of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F over T21-1 to T21-2 at intervals of 50 msec. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 84 (b), in the grandchild table A22, the brightness of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is increased over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 84 (c), in the grandchild table A23, each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric tutor lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is repeated at 240 msec and 230 msec over T23-1 to T23-6. Luminance data is specified for.

(Brightness data table when all lights are on)
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining an example of the brightness data table at the time of full lighting. As shown in FIGS. 85A to 85H, in the full lighting brightness data table, the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, High-brightness brightness data (the maximum value "F" in this example) is specified for each game effect lamp 9 such as the electric chew lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K. There is.

(Brightness data table during PUSH production)
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining an example of the luminance data table at the time of PUSH effect. The PUSH effect is an effect that encourages an operation of pressing the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 95 (a19) described later.

FIG. 86A shows the luminance data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, luminance data is specified for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at intervals of 20 msec. The lighting color of the stick controller lamp 9J at the time of the PUSH effect is the same color as the lighting color at which the frame lamp or the like is lit in the group notice effect (red in this example).

FIG. 86B shows the luminance data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. In T41, luminance data is specified for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The lighting color of the trigger button lamp 9K during the PUSH effect is the same color as the lighting color at which the frame lamp or the like is lit in the group notice effect (red in this example).

(Child table in the group notice luminance data table related to the modified example)
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group notice luminance data table according to the modified example. As shown in FIG. 87, in the child table in the group notice luminance data table according to the modification, the time of the group notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone. (Also called a luminance data table) is specified.

For example, in the period (2000 msec) until the middle of the first display period in the period in which the group notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W101, the accessory lamp 9A is Y101, the left panel lamp 9B is L101, and the on-board lamp. A grandchild table of U101 is provided for 9C and A101 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the first luminance data table according to the modified example.

During the period (2790 msec) during the rest of the first display period, the second display period, and the middle of the third display period (2790 msec) during the period in which the group notice effect is executed, W102 is used for the frame lamp and Y102 is used for the accessory lamp 9A. , L102 for the left board lamp 9B, U102 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the second luminance data table according to the modified example.

In the remaining period (150 msec) of the third display period of the period in which the group notice effect is executed, W103 is used for the frame lamp, Y103 is used for the accessory lamp 9A, L103 is used for the left side lamp 9B, and U103 is used for the onboard lamp 9C. , And a grandchild table of A103 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the third luminance data table according to the modified example.

As described above, in the group advance notice brightness data table according to the modification, the control of the game effect lamp 9 is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period in the first brightness data table, and during the first display period. The control of the game effect lamp 9 ends, and in the second brightness data table, the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the first display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 continues even during the second display period. Then, the control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the third display period in the third brightness data table.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group notice brightness data table related to modified example)
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group warning luminance data table according to the modified example. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is specified for each lamp over T101-1 to T101-10 at equal intervals of 20 msec, and the last time T101-11. In, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is specified for each lamp from T102-1 to T102-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. In W102, one frame lamp is lit with high brightness, and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamp contains brightness data and is sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness. Luminance data is specified so that For example, in W102, high-luminance data (for example, “A”) is sparsely defined so as to be lit with high brightness over a plurality of locations. As a result, in the group notice effect, the frame lamps are sparsely turned on with high brightness according to the appearance of the characters advancing in a group in the group notice effect. Further, W102 is designed to light more frame lamps with higher brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 88 (c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp over T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, RGB data is specified over T103-7 to T103-38 at short intervals of 2 msec for the frame left lamp, and continues over T103-7 to T103-38 at long intervals of 14 msec for the frame right lamp. RGB data is specified.

Further, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the lamps that were lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned off with low brightness. Or increase the number of lamps that light up at low brightness. Further, for T103-7 to T103-38, in the case of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, the luminance data is specified at intervals of 14 msec, whereas in the group notice, the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the character advances. For ~ 9L12, the luminance data is specified so that the luminance is turned off or the luminance is changed from high luminance to low luminance at short intervals of 2 msec. As a result, the position where the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness is changed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left end of the screen in the group notice.

Further, in W103, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low luminance at the time of transition to T103-30. Further, in W103, similarly to W101, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when the next production is performed.

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 174, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. In the present embodiment, an effect mode in which any of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 in which the pseudo fluctuation is performed twice is selected will be described. Further, in the figure, how each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks is shown by hatching.

(Direction mode in stage A)
The effect mode in the stage A will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 111.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a1), when the variable display is started based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image in which the maid A (Yumemu-chan) is flying is displayed as the character appearing in the stage A. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a mode corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the character “x2” indicating that the second variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 89 (a3). The second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a4), when the pseudo-continuous effect is further performed and the character "x3" indicating that the third variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 90 (a5). , The third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (a6), when "3" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and "3" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the variable display mode reaches. It becomes an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a7), a decorative pattern for producing a reach line is displayed, which informs that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 91 (a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 71 to 77. In the state shown in FIG. 91 (a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. During the reach line effect, the effect sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen starts to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a streak (light ray) of light connecting between the left and right decorative patterns constituting the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become the reach mode or the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a11), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 92 (a12), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen returns to the original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 92, during the reach line effect, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 93 (a14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 93 (a15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 93, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually reduced in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 94 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen further shrinks, the reach line in the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (a18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 94 (a18), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 95 (a19) when the 6-person group notice is executed, and FIG. 104 when the background notice is executed. The effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 105 (a111), and when the lamp advance notice is executed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 105 (a111).

As mentioned above, the 6-person group notice is a production that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol, and 6 characters dressed as maids are grouped. It is a production that progresses as a maid. The background notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or the decorative figure becomes a predetermined jackpot pattern, and a specific character (for example, a character such as a protagonist, a rare character, etc.) is specified. This is an effect that is displayed together with the background (for example, the background of the starry sky). The lamp notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special drawing or the decorative drawing becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the accessory lamp 9A). Is a production that lights up and blinks. In the lamp notice, any one of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, or a plurality of lamps may be turned on or blinking, or a lamp provided other than the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked. It may blink.

In stage A, a group notice (for example, a 6-person group notice or a boingo group notice) is executed after the reach line effect of the previous fluctuation. For example, when the 6-person group notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 95 (a19). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or blinking. During the PUSH effect, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to urge the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is urged to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! An effect occurs that erases the character image of "!". Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B could be effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is completed by the time the group notice effect (in this example, the 6-person group notice) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a21), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to the display of the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a22), the notice of the 6-person group starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a23), the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), appears as the first (first) character in the first display period. The state shown in FIG. 96 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 59 (a), and while the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, has not yet been displayed, the maid A has not been displayed yet. It represents the first situation in which a part (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

During the execution of the 6-person group notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 64 to 70. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light with high brightness, and then in the direction in which the character advances. At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves. In addition, the meeting where the group notice production (6 people group notice, Baku Chu notice, Boingo notice described later) was executed, images other than the image related to the group notice production (for example, the background image and the image related to the SP reach first half notice production etc. ), The brightness is reduced. The brightness of the other images lowered during the group notice production gradually returns to the original brightness in the third display period. On the other hand, for the player, the fourth symbol 5J and the small symbol 5M indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, the first reserved storage display area 5D, the second reserved storage display area 5U, the active display area 5A, and the like. The display of information on games that are of high importance regarding the outcome and advantage of the game is given a high priority so that the brightness is not lowered even if the group notice effect is executed.

During the group notice effect, the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As for the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. 61, the output of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the first display period is started. The volume of the effect sound is raised to a specific volume in the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period. When the group notice effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, but the second character appears. By then, the output of the start sound will stop.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a24), a second character appears shortly after the first character appears. The state shown in FIG. 96 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 59 (b), and while the entire maid A initially displayed has not yet been displayed, a part of the maid A is partially displayed. While the entire maid B (Jam-chan) that was displayed more than the first situation and was displayed second was not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) was displayed. It represents the second situation.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a25), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 97 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second appearing character skips the first appearing character. As shown in FIG. 97 (a27), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a28), the character continues to advance, and eventually the second appearing character running at the top (top) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 98 (a29), the second appearing character running at the top (top) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 98 (a30), the second appearing character running at the top disappears first from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a31), in the second display period, characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the frame lamps are sparsely turned on with high brightness in accordance with the appearance of the characters traveling in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 99 (a32) to 100 (a36), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a37), in the third display period, the last character appears, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen together with other characters is displayed. No new character will appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the frame lamp is also turned off or low from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned on by the brightness will be changed. As shown in FIG. 101 (a37), when the third display period is entered, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once turned on with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a38), as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen, the frame lamp starts to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (a38), since the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, a part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 101 (a39), the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases as the character disappears toward the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (a40) and 102 (a41), the number of game effect lamps 9 to be turned off increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 102 (a42), the group notice effect ends when the last character disappears.

Here, with reference to FIG. 103, a comparative example of the 6-person group notice and the 6-person group notice according to the present embodiment are compared. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 103 (a201), as in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 96 (a23), the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, is not yet displayed, but the maid A is concerned. This is the first situation in which a part of (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

After that, in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 96 (a24), the entire maid A displayed first is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and 2 While the entire maid B (Jam-chan) displayed second is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed in the second situation. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 103 (a202), the maid A continues to run without the appearance of the second maid B, and the entire maid A is displayed. Then, in the comparative example shown in FIG. 103 (a203), the second maid B finally appears after the first maid A runs on the left side of the center of the screen. In such a comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not look like a group notice effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 102, an animation in which a plurality of characters appear one after another without a gap and run through is displayed, so that the plurality of characters proceed as a group. By doing so, it is possible to create a powerful production. Further, since the number of characters overtaking other characters is smaller than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character, it is possible to prevent the group advance notice effect from becoming too complicated. The number of characters overtaking other characters may be larger than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, it is possible to show the player a lively group notice effect.

When the background notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 104 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a102), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (a103), as a background notice effect, a specific character (maid B (jam-chan) in this example) and a specific background (in this example, the background of the starry sky) and an image display device. It is displayed on the screen of 5. Further, during the effect of the background notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background notice based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 70. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background notice.

When the lamp advance notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 105 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 105 (a112), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (a113), the lamp advance notice is executed, and a predetermined lamp (for example, the accessory lamp 9A) included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on or blinks. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the lamp notice.

After the third display period of the group notice has ended as shown in FIG. 102 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 104 (a103) and the lamp notice shown in FIG. 105 (a113) have ended, FIGS. 106 to 106 to As shown in FIG. 110, the symbol feed effect is executed. In the decorative symbol in the reach mode, the symbol feed effect determines whether or not the decorative symbol being variablely displayed (in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C) is stopped, and the decorative symbol to be stopped. It is a production that encourages the player whether or not the design is a decorative design that constitutes a jackpot design. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on the predetermined luminance data table. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 106 (a43), when the symbol feed effect is started, the decorative symbol in the variable display located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) To start variable display. At this time, the symbol feed effect is started from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (that is, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot), which is the reach mode. Is a lower position away from the decorative pattern that is the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a44) to 107 (a48), the decorative symbol in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 108 (a49) to 109 (a54), the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases as the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed, and the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases, as shown in FIGS. 110 (a55) to (a57). As shown, finally, the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed higher than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 110 (a57), when the decorative symbol in the center is variably displayed over two laps, the symbol feed effect ends.

After the symbol feed effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 111 (a58) and 111 (a59), the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" which has become the reach mode by the effect effect called whiteout. The color gradually becomes white, and finally the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" which is the reach mode are completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (a59), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for post-variation that has been switched on the back side is displayed on the screen. Appears on.

(Direction mode in the first half of SP reach)
The production mode in the first half of the SP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 120.

As shown in FIGS. 112 (a61) and 112 (a62), after shifting to the post-variation, the animation of the character is displayed until the title image of the SP reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as a hero, or may be a character appearing in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 112 (a63), the title of SP reach is displayed. In this embodiment, as the SP reach effect, a maid character such as Yumemu-chan catches the Baku Chu, so the title "Catch the Baku Chu!" Is displayed. During the production of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 113 (c1), when the production of the first half of the SP reach is executed, an image in which Maid A (Yumemu-chan) stands up is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (c2), an image in which the opponent's character (enemy character), Baku Chu, is surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 113 (c3) to 114 (c5), an animation is displayed in which the maid A chases the escaping explosive chew.

As shown in FIG. 114 (c6), after the animation in which the maid A jumps on the explosion chew is displayed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 115 (c11) at the time of loss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 9). However, at the time of a big hit (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 20), the production shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 117 (c21), and the transition to the latter half of the SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23) or In the case of shifting to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the transition is made to the effect shown in FIG. 120 (c31).

When the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 115 (c11). In the production shown in FIG. 115 (c11), an image in which the maid A is depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and the decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is a lost symbol "4". "Stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (c12), due to the effect called blackout, the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are in the lost mode are changed. As shown in FIG. 115 (c13), the image gradually becomes black, and finally the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are in the lost mode are completely invisible. ..

After that, as shown in FIGS. 116 (c14) and 116 (c15), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that has been switched on the back side is gradually increased. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (c16), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 117 (c21). In the production shown in FIG. 117 (c21), an image in which the maid A catches the explosion chew and gives a peace sign is displayed, and a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. 3 "stops.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 117 (c22), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" are gradually expanded, and as shown in FIG. 117 (c23). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 118 (c24) and 118 (c25), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (c26), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

When shifting to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 120 (c31). In the production shown in FIG. 120 (c31), an image in which the maid A is depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and the decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is a lost symbol "4". "Stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (c32), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of “3”, “4”, and “3” which are in the lost mode is gradually blackened by the blackout. Up to this point, the production is the same as when the SP reach is lost in the first half of the SP reach shown in FIGS. 115 (c11) and 115 (c12). However, as shown in FIG. 120 (c33), in the case of shifting to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect of dropping the movable body 32, which did not occur when the loss occurs in the first half of the SP reach, is executed.

Then, in the case of shifting to the latter half of the SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23) after the effect of dropping the movable body 32 is executed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c41), and the final effect is achieved. In the case of shifting to reach (in the case of fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the transition is made to the effect shown in FIG. 128 (c71). In this way, the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit includes a fluctuation pattern that shifts to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach by pretending that the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach. As a result, from the player's point of view, once the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the player will shift to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach by relief, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Direction mode in the latter half of SP reach)
The production mode in the latter half of the SP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 127.

When shifting to the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 120 (c33) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c41). In the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c41), the character image, the background image, and the like are completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (c42), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by the blackout is gradually increased, the effect image of the latter half of the SP reach that has been switched on the back side appears. You will be able to see it. During the production of the latter half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 121 (c42), when the production of the latter half of the SP reach is executed, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) stand up and declare war on Baku Chu. The image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c43) to 122 (c45), an animation is displayed in which the maid A and the maid B chase after the escaping explosion chew.

As shown in FIG. 121 (c46), after the animation in which the maid A and the maid B jump on the explosion chew is displayed, the time of loss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 12) is shown in FIG. 123 (c51). When shifting to the production and at the time of a big hit (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 23), shifting to the production shown in FIG. 125 (c61) and shifting to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26). Shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 128 (c71).

When the loss is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 122 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 125 (c51). In the production shown in FIG. 125 (c51), an image in which Maid A and Maid B are depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and a lost symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the center. A certain "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (c52), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the lost mode is gradually blackened by the blackout. As shown in FIG. 123 (c53), the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are finally lost are completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 124 (c54) and 124 (c55), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that has been switched on the back side is gradually increased. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (c56), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 122 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 125 (c61). In the production shown in FIG. 125 (c61), an image in which Maid A and Maid B catch the explosion chew and give a peace sign is displayed, and a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "3" stops.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 125 (c62), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" gradually expand gradually, and as shown in FIG. 125 (c63). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 126 (c64) and 126 (c65), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (c66), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 127 (c67) to 127 (c69), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

(Direction mode in the final reach)
The production mode in the final reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 138.

When shifting to the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 122 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 128 (c71). When shifting to the final reach, the entire screen suddenly turns black as shown in FIG. 128 (c71), and a cross-shaped light effect is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 128 (c72). Will be done. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (c73), the effect of notifying the start of the final reach is executed, the face image of the main character Maid A (Yumemu-chan) is displayed on the entire screen, and "Go! Character image is displayed. The effect display of the light as shown in FIG. 128 (c72) is the effect of the blackout shown in FIG. 128 (c71) and the effect of displaying the face image of the main character shown in FIG. 128 (c73). It is intentionally inserted in between. As a result, the effect shown in FIG. 128 (c72) can inform the player that the final reach will be achieved in an easy-to-understand manner.

After that, the production during the final reach is executed. During the production of the latter half of the final reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach.

As shown in FIG. 129 (c74), an image in which the maid A gives a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 129 (c75) to 129 (c78), an image of one character is displayed at each of a plurality of timings, and an image of the entire sentence is displayed as shown in FIG. 129 (c79). By doing so, the theme of the production performed in the final reach is shown. In this example, it is shown as "all set".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 131 (c80) to 132 (c85), an animation in which the character appearing in the final reach effect is introduced is displayed at each of a plurality of timings. For example, in this example, maid F, maid E, maid D, maid C, maid B, maid A, etc. appear in order from the supporting characters, and the main character has a high priority near the final (or the latter half). A character appears. In addition, characters with high priority such as the main character may appear in order. That is, it is preferable that a high-priority character such as a hero appears at the beginning (or the first half) or near the final (or the latter half) so as to stand out more than a low-priority character such as a supporting character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (c86), when the final reach production is executed, an image is displayed in which the six characters who appeared in the notice of the six-person group stand up and declare war on Baku Chu. Will be done. After that, as shown in FIGS. 133 (c87) to 134 (c89), an animation is displayed in which six characters chase after the escaping Baku Chu.

As shown in FIG. 134 (c90), after an animation in which six characters drive the explosive chew is displayed, a trigger effect is executed as shown in FIG. 134 (c91). When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit during which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the characters "Close !!" are displayed. The image is displayed.

After the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is performed during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 134 (c91), when the stick controller 31A is lost (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 15), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. (In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26) shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 136 (c111).

When the loss is confirmed in the final reach, the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is performed during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 134 (c91), and then the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 135 (c101). In the effect shown in FIG. 135 (c101), an image in which the six characters are depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and the decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is a lost symbol. "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (c102), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the lost mode is gradually blackened by the blackout. As shown in FIG. 135 (c103), the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are finally lost are completely invisible.

After that, although not shown, if the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the normal background that has been switched on the back side will appear. Become. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 134 (c91) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 136 (c111). In the production shown in FIG. 136 (c111), an image in which six characters are catching the explosion chew is displayed, and a big hit symbol "3" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle. Stop.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 136 (c112), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" are gradually expanded, and as shown in FIG. 136 (c113). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 137 (c114) and (c115), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (c116), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 138 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

(Direction mode in stage B)
The effect mode in the stage B will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 159.

As shown in FIG. 139 (b1), when the variable display is started based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image of Baku Chu is displayed as a character appearing in stage B. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a mode corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 139 (b2), when the character "x2" indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the second variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 139 (b3). The second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 139 (b4), when the character "x3" indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is further performed and the third variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 140 (b5). The third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (b6), when "3" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and "3" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the variable display mode reaches. It becomes an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b7), a decorative pattern for a reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 141 (b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 71 to 77. The luminance data table shown in FIGS. 71 to 77 is the same as the luminance data table used in the reach line effect of the stage A. In the state shown in FIG. 141 (b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. During the reach line effect, the effect sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen starts to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a streak (light ray) of light connecting between the left and right decorative patterns constituting the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become the reach mode or the reach mode. The reach line appearing in the stage B may be the same as the reach line appearing in the stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, or the like, for example.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b11), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 142 (b12), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen returns to the original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 142, during the reach line effect, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143 (b14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143 (b15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 144 (b16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually reduced in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 144 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen further shrinks, the reach line in the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (b18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIGS. 144 (b18), the symbol feed effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 145 to 149. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on the predetermined luminance data table. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 145 (b19), when the symbol feed effect is started, the decorative symbol in the variable display located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) To start variable display. At this time, the symbol feed effect is started from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (that is, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot), which is the reach mode. Is a lower position away from the decorative pattern that is the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 145 (b20) to 146 (b24), the decorative symbol in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 147 (b25) to 148 (b30), the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases as the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed, and FIGS. 149 (b31) to (b33) show. As shown, finally, the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed higher than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 149 (b33), when the decorative symbol in the center is variably displayed over two laps, the symbol feed effect ends.

After the symbol feed effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 150 (b34) and 150 (b35), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative symbol of "3" in the reach mode is gradually whitened by the whiteout. Eventually, the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" which became the reach mode are completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 150 (b36), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for post-variation that has been switched on the back side is displayed on the screen. Appears on.

As shown in FIGS. 151 (b37) and 151 (b38), after shifting to the post-variation, the animation of the character is displayed until the title image of the SP reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as a hero, or may be a character appearing in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 151 (b39), the title of SP reach (“Catch Baku Chu!”) Is displayed. During the production of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

In stage B, a group notice (for example, a bomb chew notice or a boingo group notice) is executed during the period when the title of the first half of the SP reach of the post-variation is being displayed. For example, when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed during the period when the title of the first half of the SP reach is displayed, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 152 (b40). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or blinking. During the PUSH effect, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to urge the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is urged to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 152 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B could be effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends by the time the group notice effect (in this example, the explosion chew group notice) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 152 (b42), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to the display of the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b43), the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b44), the first (first) character appears in the first display period. In the state shown in FIG. 153 (b44), while the entire character displayed first (first) is not yet displayed, a part of the character displayed first (in this example, a part of the face). ) Is displayed, indicating the first situation.

During the execution of the Baku Chu Mondai notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 64 to 70. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 153 to 155, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light with high brightness, and then in the direction in which the character advances. At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves.

During the group notice effect, the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As for the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. 61, the output of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the first display period is started. The volume of the effect sound is raised to a specific volume in the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period. When the group notice effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, but the second character appears. By then, the output of the start sound will stop.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b45), a second character appears shortly after the first character appears. In the state shown in FIG. 153 (b45), while the entire character displayed first is not yet displayed, a part of the character displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation, and the second character is displayed. It represents the second situation in which the entire character displayed in is not yet displayed, while a part of the second displayed character (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 154 (b46) to (b48), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. The display area on the screen used in the group notice effect is larger than the display area of "Catch Baku Chu!" In the SP first half title notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 155 (b49), the character continues to advance, and eventually the first displayed character running at the top (top) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 155 (b50), the first displayed character running at the top (top) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 155 (b51), the first displayed character running at the top disappears first from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 156 (b52), in the second display period, characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the frame lamps are sparsely turned on with high brightness according to the appearance of the characters traveling in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 156 (b52) to 157 (b57), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As the characters run from the left side to the right side of the screen as a group, the characters cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display of "Catch the Baku Chu!". ..

As shown in FIG. 158 (b58), in the third display period, the last character appears, and an animation of running from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed together with other characters. No new character will appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, the frame lamp is also turned off or low from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned on by the brightness will be changed. As shown in FIG. 158 (b58), when the third display period is entered, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once turned on with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 158 (b59), the frame lamp starts to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 158 (b59), since the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, a part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 158 (b60), the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases as the character disappears toward the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 158, as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen, the title display of "Catch Baku Chu!" Reappears step by step. At this time, if the SP first half title notice lottery is won, the SP first half title notice is given by changing the display mode (for example, color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display of "Catch Baku Chu!". .. For example, as shown in FIG. 151 (b39), before the Baku Chu group notice is executed, the characters "Catch the Baku Chu!" In the title display in the first half of the SP reach are white, but FIG. 157 (b56). After that, when the character image in the group notice is displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the title is displayed, the title display becomes difficult to see or disappears. While the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group notice, the characters "Catch the Baku Chu!" In the title display change to red, and as shown in FIGS. 158 (b59) and (b60), the character in the group notice. Disappears to the left edge of the screen, and the red title display gradually appears and becomes visible.

As shown in FIGS. 159 (b61) and (b62), the number of game effect lamps 9 to be turned off increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 159 (b63), when the last character disappears, the group notice effect ends. After that, the process shifts to the production of the first half of the SP reach shown in FIG. 113 (c1).

(Boingo group notice)
The production mode of the Boingo group notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 169.

In the above-mentioned 6-person group notice and Baku Chu group notice, a plurality of characters proceed as a group from the right end to the left end of the screen. As described above, the 6-person group notice and the Baku Chu group notice were the effects of the character advancing in the X-axis direction in the XY plane shown in FIG. 52. On the other hand, in the Boingo group notice, the character (Boingo) can also move in the Z-axis direction of the screen. That is, the boingo group notice is a 3D effect in which the character progresses in the three-dimensional space of XYZ.

FIGS. 160 to 165 are diagrams for explaining an effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in the stage A. Even when the Boingo group is executed in the stage B, it is the same as the effect mode shown in FIGS. 160 to 165. Although not shown, the Boingo group notice effect also has a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period, as in the case of the 6-person group notice effect and the Baku Chu group notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 160 (d1), the boingo group notice starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

While the Boingo group notice is being executed, for example, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 64 to 70. For example, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light up with high brightness, and then the place of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. In addition, the frame lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness according to how the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through.

As shown in FIG. 160 (d2), a pre-stage image by a light effect is displayed as a pre-stage effect before a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is the group appearance point where the character group appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 160 (d3), the first character appears from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the previous image due to the light effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 161 (d4) and 161 (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually progresses toward the screen. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 161 (d6), as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible to be visually recognized by the first character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 162 (d7) to 162 (d9), the characters form a group and proceed from the depth side to the front side of the screen, so that the entire screen is covered by the characters. As shown in FIGS. 163 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and progresses from the depth side to the front side of the screen.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 164 (d13) and 164 (d14), as the last character advances from the depth side to the front side of the screen, it covers most of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (d15), the last character is enlarged and displayed from one end to the other end of the screen over a range, and the entire screen is covered by the last character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 165 (d16) and 165 (d17), the original background image is displayed as the last character disappears from the screen, and as shown in 153 (d18), when the last character disappears. The group notice production ends.

FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the details of the Boingo group notice. FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (F) correspond to FIGS. 160 (d3) to 161 (d6), 162 (d8), and (d9), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 166 (A), the first character appears from the group appearance point, and as shown in FIGS. 166 (B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group appearance point. Here, as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible to be visually recognized by the first character. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 166 (E) and 166 (F), even if the succeeding character image is placed at the position hidden by the first character, it cannot be visually recognized, so that the succeeding character image must be placed. May be good.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, a comparative example of the Boingo group notice and the Boingo group notice according to the present embodiment are compared. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 167, a character (boingo) appears at a specific position (group appearance point) on the screen, but the previous image due to the light effect as shown in FIG. 160 (d2) is not displayed. Therefore, in order to eliminate the discomfort that the character suddenly appears large, it is necessary to create an animation so that the character is displayed small and gradually enlarged as shown in FIGS. 167 and 168. ..

Therefore, in the comparative example, the animation display as shown in FIGS. 167 (d101) to 168 (d105) is displayed until the character can be displayed in the size shown in FIG. 160 (d3) as shown in FIG. 168 (d106). You have to go through it, which takes extra time to produce, and you have to create an image for animation. On the other hand, in the case of the picture form of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 160 (d2) and 160 (d3), the pre-stage image by the light effect is displayed as the pre-stage effect before the character appears. By displaying the first character from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the previous image by the effect, the character can be displayed from the beginning with a certain size (the size shown in FIG. 160 (d3) and FIG. 168 (d106)). It can be displayed.

(Modified example of Boingo group notice)
FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when the Boingo group notice according to the modified example is executed. The example shown in FIG. 169 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 165. For example, as shown in FIGS. 169 (d101) to (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 160 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview in the layer on the front side of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, it is shown in FIG. 169 (d103). As such, the normal background image may be switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. In this way, the group notice effect may be executed during the execution of the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect.

Further, the title image of the first half of the SP in the Boingo group notice may give a notice of a big hit by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 159. Further, instead of covering the entire screen by enlarging the last character, the background image used for the group notice effect may be switched to the next effect by an animation wound like a scroll.

(Dog herd notice)
A mode of producing the dog herd notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172.

In the present embodiment, the 6-person group notice, the bomb chew notice, and the boingo group notice are exemplified as the group notice effect, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is referred to as a dog group notice as shown in FIGS. 170 to 172. It may be the one that executes the group notice effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 170 (e1), the first character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 170 (e2), a plurality of dog characters appear one after another, and FIG. 170 (e3). The screen area may be covered with a group of characters as shown in.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 171 (e4) to 171 (e6), the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 170 (e3), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group notice effect in the layer on the front side of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, it is shown in FIG. 171 (e6). As such, the normal background image is switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. Then, on the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, the title image of the first half of the SP corresponding to the subsequent production of the first half of the SP reach is displayed.

Further, the title image of the first half of the SP in the dog group notice may give a notice of a big hit by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 159.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the 6-person notice and the dog group notice are compared, the distance between the character displayed first and the character displayed last in the dog group notice (the length between them on the X-axis). S) X2 is shorter than the distance (length between the two on the X-axis) X1 between the character displayed first and the character displayed last in the 6-person group notice. Further, since the execution time is the same or substantially the same for both, the speed V2 at which the character advances in the dog group notice is slower than the speed V1 at which the character advances in the six-person group notice. Further, the density D2 of the plurality of characters in the dog group notice is larger than the density D1 of the plurality of characters in the six-person group notice. In addition, the dog group notice production has a higher expectation (reliability) of a big hit than the 6-person group notice production, and the dog group notice production has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the 6-person group notice production.

(Execution of group notice production during reach line production)
With reference to FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect mode when the group notice effect is executed during the reach line will be described.

As shown in FIG. 173 (f1), in the state where the reach line effect is executed, the group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 173 (f2) to (f4), and then FIGS. 174 (f5) and (f6). ) May be executed.

[Main configurations and effects]
The technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are individually listed below.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 96 to 102. People group notice production) and
A process of executing a blessing effect executing means (for example, a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) for executing a blessing effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for displaying an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. ) And,
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 96 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 99 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 101 (a37) to 102 (a42). Period shown),
The blessing effect can be executed after the group effect (for example, the fanfare effect shown in FIGS. 117 to 119 is executed after the 6-person group notice effect shown in FIGS. 96 to 102 is executed).
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a lost display result different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9), the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the first predetermined period (for example, the period of T1 + T2 shown in FIG. 62) until it is suggested that the display is the result of the loss display, the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 62 and 63).
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variable pattern of the variable numbers 20, 23, 26), the variable display is displayed after the variable display is started. In the second predetermined period (for example, the period of T3 + T4, the period of T5 + T6, the period of T7 + T8) until it is suggested that the specific display result is obtained, the first half of the second predetermined period is the first display period. Starts (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 62 and 63).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, the feeling of exhilaration may diminish with the passage of time until the result of the variable display is finalized, but in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a lost display result, it is in the latter half of the time of the variable display. By executing the group notice effect, it is possible to maintain the feeling of exhilaration and evoke it again. On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, the fanfare effect, which is a blessing effect, is executed. After that, even if the feeling of exhilaration diminishes with the passage of time, the feeling of exhilaration can be maintained or evoked again by the blessing effect.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. That is, the specific display result is a display result for controlling the gaming state to an advantageous state even if it is derived. In the present embodiment, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, the big hit occurs, and the lighting corresponding to the big hit occurs. The combination of embodiments is the specific display result. Further, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, the big hit occurs, and the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit is specified. It will be the display result. Further, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 is a specific special symbol (for example, a big hit such as "3,3,3" or "7,7,7". A big hit occurs when the game is stopped as a combination of symbols), and the display of the specific special symbol is the specific display result.

The "loss display result" is a display result different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result. That is, the loss display result is a display result in which the gaming state is not controlled to the advantageous state even if it is derived. In the present embodiment, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the loss occurs. The combination of the corresponding lighting modes results in a loss display result. Further, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. The combination will be the result of the loss display. Further, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 becomes a specific predetermined symbol (for example, a combination of lost symbols such as "3, 2, 3") and stops. Occasionally, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the display of the predetermined symbol becomes a loss display result.

The "advantageous state" is a state advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state in which the value-adding rate for games (for example, the payout rate of a game ball) is 1 or more or more than 1 by being controlled. In the present embodiment, as an advantageous state, a big hit gaming state controlled when each of the normal big hits 1 and 2 and the probabilistic big hits 1 to 9 occurs is exemplified. The advantageous state may be a small hit gaming state controlled when a small hit occurs, or may be a probabilistic change state or a time saving state.

The "new display of the character" may be a character of the same type as the character initially displayed in the group notice effect, or may be a character of a different type from the character initially displayed in the group notice effect. good.

The "blessing effect" is an effect of displaying an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, and is controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display having become a specific display result. It is also a production that displays an image that congratulates you. "Blessing" includes suggesting or notifying the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or is controlled to an advantageous state. In addition, "blessing" improves the player's expectation for the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or is controlled to the advantageous state. Including letting you do it. For example, in the blessing effect, the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, and the special figure 2 variable display unit of the special figure LED board 9020. The combination of lighting modes in 9022 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, or the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 is a specific special symbol ( It includes displaying an image that suggests or informs the player that the game has become a big hit symbol) or that the player is controlled to the big hit game state.

"The blessing effect can be executed after the group effect" means that the group notice effect is executed in the variable display based on the hold memory of 1, and then the blessing is performed in the variable display based on the hold memory of 1. Including that the production is performed. In addition, "the blessing effect can be executed after the group effect" indicates that the display result of the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is the specific display result of the variable display based on the hold memory of 1. When the group notice effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that suggests or gives a notice before the display result is started, the group notice effect is executed, and then the variable display based on the hold memory of the 1 is started and the 1 Includes the execution of a blessing effect within a variable display based on the hold memory of.

The "first predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a lost display result, and in the present embodiment, FIGS. 62 and 63. It is exemplified by the period of T1 + T2 shown in. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a loss display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the loss. , The combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit in the special drawing 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special drawing LED board 9020 is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, and the decorative symbol display area of the image display device 5. This includes stopping the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in 5L, 5C, and 5R as a specific predetermined symbol (missing symbol combination). Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a lost display result, while the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a hit display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result" suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display becomes the loss display result because the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing. Including notifying. It should be noted that the specific timing is the timing at which the movable body 32 operates at the time of a big hit by performing an effect of urging the player to operate the operation means such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and by operating the operation means by the player. You may.

The "second predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and in the present embodiment, FIGS. 62 and 63. It is exemplified by the period of T3 + T4, the period of T5 + T6, and the period of T7 + T8 shown in. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit. , The combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, and variable display is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. Includes that the decorative symbol that is being displayed becomes a specific special symbol (big hit symbol combination) and stops. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a lost display result, while the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a hit display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result" suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result by the operation of the movable body 32 at the specific timing. Including notifying. It should be noted that the specific timing is the timing at which the movable body 32 operates at the time of a big hit by performing an effect of urging the player to operate the operation means such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and by operating the operation means by the player. You may.

(1-2) The second display period is a period longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is a longer period than the first display period. (For example, each display period shown in FIG. 61).

From this, the group notice effect can be made powerful by setting the second display period in which the characters appear one after another in the group notice effect to be the longest period. Furthermore, by setting the first display period from the first appearance of the character to the first departure of the character as the shortest period, it is possible to prevent the suddenly executed group notice effect from becoming full. Can be done.

(1-3) The character displayed first in the first display period is a character having a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yume-chan, who is the main character).

As a result, the character that first appears in the group notice production is a character with a high priority like the main character, which is familiar to the player, but after that, a character that appears less frequently than the main character in other productions. By appearing in the group notice production, it is possible to surprise the player about the group notice production and make the player feel that it is a rare production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "high-priority character" includes the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the character having the highest priority among the characters other than the main character, and is executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 more than other characters. Includes characters that appear frequently (number of times) in the production to be performed.

(1-4) When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), the character is displayed in the group effect. Is first started at a timing close to half of the second predetermined period in the first half of the second predetermined period (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 62 and 63).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, even if the group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group notice effect is executed in the vicinity of the latter half of the first half. So, the afterglow of the group notice production can be extended to the later side as much as possible.

(1-5) As for the pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), the display result of the variable display is the loss display result. After pretending to be, the variable display result includes a relief pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 23 and 26) that becomes the specific display result.
Also in the relief pattern, in the second predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is the specific display result, the first half of the second predetermined period is the first. 1 The display period starts (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 62 and 63).

As a result, even in the case of a relief pattern in which the display result of the variable display is a hit display result after the display result of the variable display is pretended to be a lost display result, the fanfare effect which is a blessing effect is executed. , The group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time to give an uplifting feeling, and even if the uplifting feeling diminishes with the passage of time, the blessing effect keeps the uplifting feeling or evokes it again. Can be done.

(1-6) A pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15) and the display result of the variable display are the specific display results. With the pattern suggested to be (for example, the variation pattern of the main variation numbers 20, 23, 26), until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result or the specific display result. A common display is made (eg, the example shown in FIGS. 89-138).

As a result, for example, the variation pattern of variation number 9 and the variation pattern of variation number 20 are executed in common until the display result is finalized, and the variation pattern of variation number 12 and the variation pattern of variation number 23 are displayed. The common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed, and the common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed between the variation pattern of the variation number 15 and the variation pattern of the variation number 26. Therefore, the common effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group notice effect is executed while the player is in the middle of the game.

It should be noted that the pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15) and the display result of the variable display are the specific display results. (For example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26) is different from each other until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result or the specific display result. May be done.

As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect is executed while the effects different from each other are being executed.

(1-7) A notice effect for notifying that the execution period of the group effect and the display result of the variable display, which is different from the group notice, will be the specific display result (for example, the SP first half title notice effect). May overlap with the execution period of
The notice effect ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group effect has a larger display area than the display in the advance notice effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 153 to 159).

As a result, even if the group notice effect is executed while the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect is being executed, the SP first half title advance notice effect can be shown to the player.

(1-8) While the advance notice effect is being executed, the group effect is executed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 153 to 159).

As a result, when the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect is being executed, the player can pay attention to the execution of the group advance notice effect. It should be noted that the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect and the group advance notice effect do not start at the same time.

(1-9) When the group effect is executed, there is a higher probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result than when the notice effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 32). , The group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice).

As a result, other notice effects with a lower expectation of a big hit than the group notice effect are not displayed on the front layer having a higher priority than the group notice effect, so that the big hit is suitable for the player. Can be suggested. As described above, in the present embodiment, the production having a high expectation of a big hit is not covered with the production having a low expectation on the front side.

(1-12) During the execution of the group effect, the brightness is reduced in both the background display and the display in the advance notice effect, while the display of information related to the game (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory). The brightness does not decrease in the fourth symbol 5J and the small symbol 5M indicating the number, the first reserved storage display area 5D, the second reserved storage display area 5U, and the active display area 5A).

As a result, when the group notice effect is executed, the brightness of the image related to the background display and other notice effects (for example, the image related to the SP first half title notice effect having a lower expectation than the group notice effect) is lowered, while the game is played. It is important for the player as much as possible because the display of information about the game, which is highly important for the player regarding the victory or defeat of the game and the advantage, is given a high priority, and the brightness is not lowered even if the group notice effect is executed. Information can be shown.

(2-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 96 to 102. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 96 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 99 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 101 (a37) to 102 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 59 and 96).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, it is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is a group notice production and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can.

In the "first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed", as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the entire character initially displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is still present. While it is not displayed, a situation in which a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or as shown in FIG. 96A, the game machine frame 3 displays an image. In the display area visible to the player in the state of covering the screen of the device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed, while the character is at the edge of the display area visible to the player. Includes situations where part of is displayed. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which the first appearing character is completely invisible, but a part of the first appearing character is visible.

"The second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed" is shown in FIG. 59 (b). As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed, while a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 as compared with the first situation. And while the entire second displayed character has not yet been displayed, a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or FIG. 96 (b). As shown in the above, in the display area visible to the player when the game machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed. At the edge of the display area visible to the player, a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation, and the entire character displayed second is not yet displayed, while the character is visible to the player. Includes a situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which a second character appears after the first appearing character before the first appearing character is completely visible.

(2-2) In the group effect, the first displayed character and the second displayed character have different Y-axis position coordinates along the vertical direction on the screen.

As a result, since the first character and the second character do not overlap on the Y axis, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is performed on the display of characters in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 57).

This has the effect of making each character appear to be a plurality of characters, so that it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character will appear.

(2-4) The sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output during the display of the character displayed first in the group effect, but by the time the display of the character displayed second is started. Exit (for example, the example shown in FIG. 96).

As a result, a sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output and the first character appears, so that the player can be notified that the group notice effect has been executed, while the second character By the time the start sound ends by the time it appears, it is possible to suitably provide a group notice effect.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but it ends by the time the second character appears. ..

(2-5) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a character in which the whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen and a character in which a part of the whole body does not fit in the display area of the screen. Part includes a character that fits and is displayed in the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 55).

As a result, more characters can appear in the group notice effect in the display area where the area is limited.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a first character (for example, maid A) and a second character (for example, maid B) whose type is different from that of the first character. ,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the first character displayed in which the whole body fits in the display area of the screen and a part of the whole body are displayed in the display area of the screen. The other part of the whole body is displayed in a mixed manner with the first character displayed in the display area of the screen without being fitted (for example, the example shown in FIG. 55).

This makes it possible to give the illusion that more types of characters are appearing in the group notice effect in the display area where the area is limited.

(2-7) A shield (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) covers a part of the screen, and the character displayed first in the group effect is displayed at the position where the shield covers. Is started, and then the display of the second displayed character is started.
Even when the screen is visually recognized with the shield covered, the first situation changes to the second situation during the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 59).

As a result, even in the display area of the screen actually viewed by the player, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, so there is a question as to whether or not it is a group notice production, and only one person appears. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that it may be.

(2-8) When the gaming machine is visually recognized from the side toward the screen and the shield, it is possible to visually recognize the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 59).

As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the side and visually recognizes the edge of the screen, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice effect, so that the group notice effect is produced. It is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is the case and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear.

(2-9) In the design stage, a display relating to the group effect is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the shield on a screen of a predetermined size, and further, the predetermined size of the screen (for example, for example). A display relating to the group effect is created up to the area corresponding to the large size so that it can be applied to a size larger than 19 inches (for example, 20 inches).

As a result, even when the design of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suddenly changed so as to use a size larger than a predetermined size, the created group notice effect data can be applied.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect are a low importance character (for example, maids C to F) having a low importance in the content of the gaming machine, and the low importance character. Includes high importance characters (eg, maids A and B) that are of high importance in the content of the gaming machine.
The high-severity character has a lower proportion than the low-severity character in that the face does not fit in the display area of the screen and the part other than the face of the whole body fits in the display area of the screen and is displayed (for example, the figure). Example shown in 55).

As a result, a character with high importance such as the main character can easily recognize the face in the group notice production as compared with a character with low importance such as a supporting character, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the group notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing the effect is provided.
The effect executed by the effect executing means includes a group effect (for example, a group notice effect shown in FIGS. 96 to 102) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 96 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 99 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 101 (a37) to 102 (a42). Period shown),
The group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, in the group notice production, since the largest number of characters appear in all the productions, it is possible to make the player aware that the variable display that can be expected to be a big hit is performed.

"The group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is 1 among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen includes the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is a decoration among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Among the effects executed during the period when the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the symbol, the effect at the time of reach, the effect of pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect at the time of big hit occurrence, 1 The effect with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen includes the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is executed during the big hit game state and the subsequent probable change state and time saving state. Among the effects, the effect having the largest number of characters displayed on one screen includes the group notice effect. In the above-mentioned example, the group notice effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of displayed character types.

Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is described in all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens during the effect is the largest is included in the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is a decoration among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Among the effects performed during the period when the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the symbol, the effect at the time of reach, the effect at the time of pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect at the time of big hit occurrence, the effect is concerned. The effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens is the largest is included in the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is executed during the big hit game state and the subsequent probable change state and time saving state. Among the effects, the effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens during the effect is the largest is the group notice effect. In the above-mentioned example, the group notice effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of displayed character types.

(3-2) An effect in which the number of characters displayed is smaller than that of the group effect, and a specific effect in which a plurality of characters are displayed (for example, an effect of the latter half of the SP reach or an effect of the final reach) is executed.

As a result, various effects can be executed, and among them, the largest number of characters can appear in the group notice effect.

It should be noted that the specific effect may be an effect in which the number of displayed character types is larger than that of the group notice effect.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed in the second display period of the group effect is larger than the number of characters displayed in the specific effect.

As a result, it is possible to show the player a powerful effect in the second display period, which is the longest period among the group notice effects.

The number of character types displayed in the second display period of the group notice effect may be larger than the number of character types displayed in the specific effect.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 96 to 102. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 96 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 99 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 101 (a37) to 102 (a42). Period shown),
In the group production,
An auxiliary display is made to show that the character is in progress,
When the display of the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the first character has priority over the display of the second character, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character is used. When the display of the second character overlaps with the display of the second character, the display of the second character has priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 56).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, while it is possible to show the player a more dynamic group notice effect by displaying the auxiliary display on the character, the auxiliary display does not hinder the visibility of other characters, so that more characters can be displayed. It can be clearly shown to the player.

The "auxiliary display" may be any display indicating that the character is progressing, and for example, an image display emphasizing that the character is progressing as shown in FIG. 56 (as shown in FIG. 56). For example, it may be an image display of sand smoke (an image display of sand smoke), an image display showing traces of passage of a character (for example, an image display of a character's footprint), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example). , An image display representing the aura of the character). The "auxiliary display" may be an image display performed in the vicinity of the character in relation to the progress of the character.

(4-2) The layer displayed on the screen is different between the display of the character in the group effect and the auxiliary display in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the image of sand smoke is layer 1 and the character. The image of is placed in the layers after layer 2).

As a result, the character image and the auxiliary display can be preferably shown to the player in the group notice effect.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10).
The moving image data corresponding to the group effect includes the first character data (for example, the moving image data of the character C of the layer 9) and the second character data (for example, the character C of the layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type. Video data) including
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values related to the movement speed of the character, while the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character are the same.

As a result, even when the movement speed of the character is changed, the work process related to the design of the group notice effect can be reduced by sharing the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character.

(4-4) In the group effect, a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 54).

As a result, since a plurality of characters do not operate in the same position at the same position, the group notice effect can be preferably shown to the player.

(5-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 96 to 102. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 96 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 99 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 101 (a37) to 102 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, the display of the newly displayed character (for example, the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (for example, FIG. 97, FIG. Example shown in 98).

The "newly displayed character" may be the character that appeared second in the group notice effect as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, or the character that appeared third or later in the group notice effect. You may. Considering that the group notice effect is an effect in which a plurality of characters proceed as a group, the character that appears second in the group notice effect is displayed first as the "newly displayed character". It is preferable that the character that appears immediately after the second appearance overtakes the character that is displayed first because of a sense of dynamism and presence.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since the character that appears second is overtaken by the character that appears first and disappears at the top as it is, it is possible to show the player a lively group notice effect.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a character that overtakes another character.
The number of overtaken characters is either greater or less than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaken character.

As a result, the group notice effect can be prevented from becoming too complicated, and the group notice effect with a lively feeling can be shown to the player. Can be shown to.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character and the display of the overtaking character overlaps with the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is more than the outline of the other character. Is also displayed thick (for example, the example shown in FIG. 58).

As a result, it is possible to show the player how the character overtakes another character in an easy-to-understand manner.

(6-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 96 to 102. People group notice production) and
Execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the push effect) for displaying the suggestion image (for example, the image showing the push button 31B, the meter image, and the character image of "PUSH !!") suggesting the execution of the group effect. Means (for example, a process of executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120) are provided.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 96 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 99 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 101 (a37) to 102 (a42). Period shown),
The display of the suggestion image ends by the start of the first display period in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 95).

The "suggestion image" may be any image as long as it suggests the execution of the group notice effect, or may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operation means as shown in FIG. 95. , It may be an effect image such as a light or a pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of the group notice effect, or it may be a clock image in a timer effect that measures the time until the group notice effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be a character image (for example, a character image of "group") suggesting the execution of the group notice effect. In the timer effect, the time until the group notice effect is executed by the clock image is timed, and when the timed time reaches a predetermined time, a character image suggesting the execution of the group notice effect (character of "group"). The image) may be displayed.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggestion image (for example, the effect indicating that the push button 31B has been pressed) is finished, the display of the character is first started in the first display period (for example,). Example shown in FIG. 95).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-3) The suggestion image includes an image prompting the player to operate the operating means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a character image of "PUSH !!").
The output of the sound (for example, PUSH sound) when the operating means is operated during the display of the suggestion image ends by the time when the display of the character first starts in the first display period (for example, FIG. 95). Example shown in).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-4) When the operating means is operated while the suggestion image is being displayed, any one of a plurality of effects including the group effect (for example, 6-person group notice, background notice, lamp notice) is executed. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 95, 104, and 105).

As a result, a plurality of effects are executed with the operation by the player as a turning point, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(7-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 96 to 102. It is equipped with a crowd notice production and a dog group notice production shown in FIGS. 170 to 172).
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 96 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 99 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 101 (a37) to 102 (a42). Period shown),
The group production includes a first group production (for example, a 6-person group notice production) and a second group production (for example, a dog group notice production).
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect proceed at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1), respectively.
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect each proceed at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2).
The first speed is faster than the second speed,
The first group effect is configured so that the linear distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character is longer than that of the second group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 172). ..

As shown in FIG. 172, the "straight line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is displayed first in the group notice effect such as the 6-person group notice effect and the dog group notice effect. It is a linear distance (X-axis distance) from the end of the character to the end of the character displayed last. This linear distance is set to time T, where T is the time from the display of the first character to the display of the last character from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and V is the speed of each character. It can be calculated by multiplying the velocity V (T × V).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, it is possible to preferably show the player two types of group notice effects.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group effect (for example, X1 / V1) is the same as or substantially the same as the execution time of the second group effect (for example, X2 / V2) (for example, in FIG. 172). Example shown).

This makes it possible to execute two types of group notice effects using the same or substantially the same time.

(7-3) When the second group effect is executed, there is a higher probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result than when the first group effect is executed.
The execution probability of the second group effect is lower than the execution probability of the first group effect.

As a result, for the dog group notice effect, which has a lower execution probability than the 6-person group notice and has a high expectation, the speed of the character is made slower than the 6-person group notice, so that, for example, the player shoots the character of the dog group notice effect. You can increase your chances of doing it.

(7-4) The degree to which a plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect are dense (for example, the degree of density D2) is the degree to which the plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect are dense (for example, dense). Greater than degree D1).

As a result, the characters are arranged at an appropriate density in consideration of the speed and the moving distance of the characters in the group notice effect, so that it is possible to provide a group notice effect suitable for the player.

(7-5) In the second group effect, a plurality of characters located at the rearmost position are arranged from the lower part to the upper part of the screen.
On the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, the display corresponding to the subsequent effect is performed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 171).

As a result, it is possible to switch to an image for the next production and show it to the player at the opportunity of the group notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(8-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, and a boingo shown in FIGS. 160 to 169. With group notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, the display of the character is started from a specific position so that the character advances from the back side to the front side on the screen.
At the timing related to the first start of the display of the character at the specific position, the front-stage display (for example, the display of the front-stage image by a light effect) that makes the display of the character at the specific position difficult to see is performed (for example, the display of the front-stage image by a light effect). , Example shown in FIG. 160).

The "previous stage display" may be any display as long as it makes the display of the character difficult to see, and is a display that hides a specific position where the character appears (for example, display of an effect image such as light or a pattern). Etc.). "Difficult to see" means that the player cannot completely see the specific position, the player can see the specific position but the specific position is difficult to see, and the player can see the specific position but the character can see the character from the specific position. This includes a state in which the appearance cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the player can visually recognize the specific position and the appearance of the character from the specific position can be visually recognized, but the visual recognition is difficult.

The "timing related to the first start of the character display at a specific position" is the same timing as the first start of the character display at the specific position, or the timing when the character display first starts at the specific position. A timing within a predetermined period before and after (this predetermined period is a period during which the player thinks that the display of the character first starts at a specific position) is included.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since the first character is displayed from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the previous image, it is possible to display the character from the beginning with a certain size, and suddenly a large character is displayed. Does not cause the player to.

(8-2) In the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to proceed from the depth direction to the front direction on the screen.
The enlarged display makes it difficult to visually recognize the character at the specific position (example shown in FIG. 166).

This makes it possible to give a visual effect as if a plurality of characters appear one after another from a position with a certain depth.

(8-3) The character displayed last in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end facing the one end (example shown in FIG. 164). ..

As a result, it is possible to suitably switch to the effect after the group notice effect by utilizing the image display of the last character.

(8-4) The background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display corresponding to the subsequent effect in conjunction with the movement of the character displayed last in the group effect (for example, FIG. 164). , Example shown in FIG. 165).

As a result, it is possible to suitably switch to the effect after the group notice effect by utilizing the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character displayed last in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end facing the one end.
On the back side of the character displayed last, other characters in the group effect are not displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 166).

As a result, even if the succeeding character image is placed in the position hidden by the first character, it cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is not necessary to place the succeeding character image, and a plurality of characters appear one after another from a position having a depth. It is possible to give a visual effect as if it appeared.

(9-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 96 to 102. People group notice production) and
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 96 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 99 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 101 (a37) to 102 (a42). Period shown),
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to the volume in the subsequent first display period. A specific volume higher than the predetermined volume is set, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume even in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume lower than the specific volume in the third display period. The production sound is output.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at a specific volume even during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group notice production at a specific volume even before the second display period. It can improve the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled so that the sound output means raises or lowers the volume, or the volume control of the sound output means is constant, but raising or lowering the volume is specified in the sound data referred to by the sound output means. It may be something that raises or lowers the volume.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the effect sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the effect sound rises to a specific volume starts to decrease in the volume of the effect sound in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the effect sound disappears (for example, the example shown in FIG. 61).

As a result, the sound output in the group notice effect is performed in a shorter time for the fade-in, and the fade-out is performed in a longer time than the fade-in, so that the sound of the group notice effect can be suitably output.

(10-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 49) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 96 to 102. People group notice production) and
It is equipped with a plurality of lighting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 such as a frame lamp).
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any character (for example, the figure). 96 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 99 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 101 (a37) to 102 (a42). Period shown),
The luminance data table composed of the plurality of luminance data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means is the first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period (for example, the frame lamp shown in FIG. 66A). The grandchild table W1), the second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period (for example, the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 66B), and the third luminance corresponding to the third display period. A data table (for example, a grandchild table W3 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 66 (c)) is included.
Each of the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table is a first luminance data in which data for lighting the lighting means with low luminance and data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance are combined. The combination of the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness and the data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness is composed of the second brightness data different from the first brightness data (for example, FIG. Example of grandchild table for frame lamp shown in 66),
The second luminance data table is set to light more of the lighting means with higher luminance than the first luminance data table (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is a frame lamp grandchild table W1). High brightness (“0” to “F”) data is stored in more lamps).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. Further, a brightness data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp with higher brightness than the first brightness data table, so that the first display period In, it is possible to express a weak footstep when multiple characters appear, and in the second display period, it is possible to express a strong footstep when multiple characters appear one after another, and a more suitable group notice effect is given to the player. Can be provided.

"Data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness" are a plurality of lighting units included in each lighting means (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1). It is lighting data (lighting element) for each time in WWW in the upper lamp 9C. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 66A, the data (100) of the frame left lamp 9L1 (RGB) in T1-1. be. As the RGB data, the data corresponding to the extinguishing is "000", the data corresponding to the low-luminance lighting is "100", and the data corresponding to the high-luminance lighting is "F00".

The "brightness data" is lighting data for each time in each lighting means (for example, a frame lamp, a board lamp 9C), and is "data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness" or "high brightness of the lighting means". It is a collection of "data for lighting in" for each time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 66A, it is the data of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R in T1-1.

The luminance data table is a collection of "luminance data" in a predetermined period (for example, the lighting time specified by the parent table or the child table). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 66 (a), T1-1 to T1- It is the data of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R in 11.

(10-2) The first luminance data table has a longer luminance data switching interval than the second luminance data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals. , The grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

Thereby, in the second display period, it can be expressed that the character is running faster than in the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(10-3) In the first luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are evenly spaced, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are not evenly spaced (for example, shown in FIG. 65). As described above, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals, and the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is switched at 50-80 msec intervals).

Thereby, in the second display period, it can be expressed that a plurality of characters are running out of step with each other as compared with the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-1) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for moving a lighting portion in a direction in which a character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp is a group. Lights up with high brightness according to the direction of travel of the notice),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data that does not move the lighting portion in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp is high over a plurality of locations. Lights up with brightness).

As a result, it is possible to express how characters appear in the first display period and a plurality of characters appear one after another in the second display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-2) In the first luminance data table, the lighting means located in the vicinity of the character is lit with high brightness according to the progress position of the character first displayed in the group effect, and the character is lit. It includes luminance data for turning off or lighting the lighting means located in the vicinity of a non-reachable portion with low luminance (for example, an example of a grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 66A).

As a result, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off or lights up with low brightness at the place where it has not reached yet, so the lamp is turned on. It can be used to express how the leading character progresses. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-3) In the first brightness data table, the lighting means is turned on with high brightness, and then, as the character first displayed in the group effect progresses, the lighting means is turned off or turned on with low brightness. It includes luminance data (for example, an example of a grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 66A).

As a result, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off or lights up with low brightness at places that have not yet reached or have already passed. , It is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-4) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance and then lighting the lighting means located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect with high luminance. (For example, an example of the grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 66A),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data in which the lighting means is lit with high luminance and then the lighting means located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect is not lit with high luminance (for example, FIG. 66). Example of grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in (b)).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off at the place where it has not reached yet or the place where it has already passed. Or, since it lights up at low brightness, it is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Further, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-5) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness and turning off the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame shown in FIG. 66A). Example of grandchild table W1 for lamp),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness and lighting the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 66B). Example).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off at the place where it has not reached yet or the place where it has already passed. Or, since it lights up at low brightness, it is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Further, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(12-1) The third luminance data table includes luminance data for increasing the number of the lighting means to be turned off according to the progress of the character in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, a grandchild for a frame lamp). The table W3 is turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the traveling direction of the group notice).

As a result, in the third display period, the lamp is turned off or turned on with low brightness as the character progresses, so that it is possible to express how the character progresses by using the turning off or on of the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(12-3) In the third luminance data table, the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect is the character in the group effect. It is shorter than the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction opposite to the traveling direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec. The switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

Thereby, in the third display period, it is possible to express how the character progresses from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappears. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, the control of the lighting means starts at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the control of the lighting means ends during the first display period.
In the second luminance data table, the control of the lighting means is started during the first display period, the control of the lighting means is continued even during the second display period, and the lighting is performed during the third display period. The control of the means is finished,
In the third luminance data table, control of the lighting means starts during the third display period (for example, an example of the group notice luminance data table shown in FIG. 87).

As a result, the lamp lights up from the middle of the first display period with high brightness as in the second display period, so the state in which the character progresses from before the second display period can be expressed with excitement by lighting the lamp. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(13-2) In the second luminance data table, the control period of the lighting means is set longer than that of the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table.
The first luminance data table is set to have a longer control period of the lighting means than the third luminance data table (for example, an example of the group advance luminance data table shown in FIG. 87).

As a result, it is possible to express the appearance of a plurality of characters one after another in the first display period with an appropriate length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(14-1) The luminance data first defined in the first luminance data table is the luminance data for turning off or lighting the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect with low luminance (for example, FIG. 65). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, the first luminance data is turned off or turned on at low luminance for all the lamps).

This is more preferable because the lamp lights up when the group notice effect is executed after the group notice effect is executed, without being mixed with the lamp lighting that was performed before the group notice effect was executed. A group notice production can be provided.

(14-2) The luminance data first defined in each of the second luminance data table and the third luminance data table is the luminance that does not turn off or turn off the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect. It is data (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, in the frame lamp grandchild tables W2 and W3, the lamp lights up with high luminance for the first luminance data).

As a result, when the characters are progressing one after another after the group notice effect is executed, the player emphasizes the flow of the effect and performs the group notice effect without separating by turning off all the lamps and turning on the low brightness. Can be shown to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(14-3) The luminance data finally defined in the third luminance data table is the luminance data for turning off or lighting the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect with low luminance (for example, FIG. 65). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W3, the last luminance data is turned off or turned on at low luminance for all the lamps).

As a result, when the group notice effect ends, all the lamps are turned off or turned on with low brightness, so that the player can recognize that the group notice effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(15-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat the luminance data of the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 65, the luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. Luminance data is specified as such).

As a result, the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set over a long period of time can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(15-2) The third luminance data table is designed so as not to repeat the luminance data having the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the same luminance data is used in the frame lamp grandchild table W3. Luminance data is not specified for repeated use).

As a result, for the luminance data in the third display period, which is set for a longer period than the second display period, the degree of freedom in design is increased by defining the luminance data as it is. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(16-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat the luminance data of the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 65, the luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. Luminance data is specified),
In the first luminance data table, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is specified last, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is not specified last (for example,). As shown in FIG. 65, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 defines the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures, and the frame lamp grandchild table W2 does not specify the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures).

As a result, the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set over a long period of time can be reduced. On the other hand, for the luminance data in the first display period, the luminance data is specified as it is, but instead, the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures is specified, so that the defect countermeasures are taken during the 10 minutes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(16-2) The luminance data for troubleshooting is the luminance data in which the longest time is defined among the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table, and is from the beginning of the first luminance data table. It is luminance data for preventing the lighting means from being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, 10-minute data for defect countermeasures is specified in the frame lamp grandchild table W1).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting control of the lamp from the beginning of the first luminance data table by the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures, so that a suitable group notice effect can be provided.

(16-3) The luminance data for defect countermeasures is luminance data for regularly lighting adjacent lighting means in order (for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, for defect countermeasures for 10 minutes. The luminance data of is the luminance data in which adjacent frame lamps are regularly lit in order so that the lighting location is deviated from the previous state).

As a result, even if a problem occurs, the adjacent frame lamps are regularly lit in order so that the lighting location deviates from the previous state, so that it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated, which is preferable. A group notice production can be provided.

(17-1) The lighting means are a single-color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) and a multi-color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9) that are lit in a plurality of colors. Including ~ 9C13)
The luminance data for lighting the monochromatic lighting means with a specific high luminance includes a specific value (for example, “6”) as a value corresponding to the specific high luminance lighting, and includes the specific value (for example, “6”).
The luminance data for lighting the plurality of color lighting means with the specific high luminance includes a value larger than the specific value (for example, “8” to “F”) as a value corresponding to the specific high luminance lighting.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in light between the lamps that are lit with high brightness by making the values corresponding to the lighting of high brightness appropriate according to the type of light emitting means, and it is possible to produce a suitable group notice. Can be provided.

(17-2) The single-color lighting means includes a first-color lighting means that lights in the first color (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) and a second-color lighting means that lights in the second color (for example, the left side of the board). Including lamps 9B1 to 9B5)
Regardless of the luminance data for lighting any of the first color lighting means and the second color lighting means with the specific high luminance, the specific value (for example, "for example," 6 ”) is included.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in light even among the lamps that are lit in the same single color, and it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(18-1) Both the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data different from each other for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, FIG. 66). Grandchild table for frame lamp shown in),
The luminance data table used in the advance notice effect, which is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, is the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the game machine. It contains common luminance data for each (eg, grandchild table for frame lamps shown in FIG. 73).

As a result, in the group notice effect, by individually controlling the lighting of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, a more detailed lighting mode can be realized, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. can.

(19-1) The group effect interrupts during the execution of a notice effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result. May be executed in
Even when the group effect is interrupted and executed, the lighting means continues to light according to the luminance data table corresponding to the advance notice effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174).
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the notice effect, or includes the lighting means used in the notice effect and the lighting means not used in the notice effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 72, in the reach line effect, there is a period in which the on-board lamp and the attacker lamp, which are always used in the group notice effect, are not used).

As a result, even when the group notice effect is executed by interrupting another notice effect, since the common lamp is lit, it is possible to realize the effect by lighting without discomfort, and provide a suitable group notice effect. be able to. For example, if the group notice effect is executed by interrupting another notice effect, the lighting of the lamp in the group notice effect and the lighting of the lamp in the other notice effect are mixed, but the lamp that lights in both of them is assumed to be. If they are different from each other, many lamps are complicatedly turned on, which makes the appearance unattractive and may give the player a sense of discomfort. In this respect, if the lighting of the lamp in the group notice effect and the lighting of the lamp in other notice effects are made common, it is possible to prevent a large number of lamps from being complicatedly turned on.

(19-2) The advance notice effect ends during the execution of the group effect, and a predetermined effect (for example, a symbol feed effect) different from the advance notice effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 173 and 174). Example),
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the predetermined effect, or includes the lighting means used in the predetermined effect and the lighting means not used in the predetermined effect. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174).

As a result, even if the group is switched to another effect during the group notice effect, the common lamp is lit, so that the effect of lighting can be realized without discomfort, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. ..

(19-3) The group effect is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group notice lottery shown in FIG. 32).

As a result, it is determined whether or not the group notice effect is executed by lottery regardless of other effects, so that the processing burden related to the execution of the group notice effect can be reduced, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. ..

(20-1) The lighting means includes a specific lighting means (for example, V lamp 9G) located at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
The specific lighting means can be lit when it is controlled to the advantageous state, and does not light when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is a round of a big hit gaming state in which a V prize can be generated. Lights up to notify you that you are inside or that a V prize has occurred),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 65).

As a result, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, which causes the player to misunderstand whether the lamp is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(20-2) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, stick controller lamp 9J, trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
The specific lighting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is effective by lighting (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J is turned on to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A and is triggered. The button lamp 9K lights up to prompt the operation of pressing the push button 31B),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 65).

As a result, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, which makes the player misunderstand whether the operation of the operating means is being promoted. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described.

(About the display period of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

As a result, by making the character that first appeared in the first display period look longer, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect suggesting a big hit has been executed.

(About the execution timing of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a lost display result, the group notice effect is executed in the latter half of the variable display time with a probability of 100%, but this is not limited to this. No. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of variable display is a lost display result, even if the group notice effect is executed with a higher probability in the latter half of the variable display time than in the first half of the variable display time. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, the group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a probability of 100%. Not limited to. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of variable display is a hit display result, even if the group notice effect is executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the latter half of the variable display time. good.

(About the characters that appear in the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the main character Maid A (Yumemu-chan) appears as the first (first) character in the first display period, but the main character Maid A appears most often in the second display period. (Yumemu-chan) may be.

As a result, the character of the main character can be frequently shown to the player in the longest second display period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the character displayed first in the first display period may be a premier character.

As a result, the premier character can be shown to the player first in the first first display period, and the group notice effect can be made to have an impact. If the character displayed first in the first display period is a premier character, the jackpot may be fixed. Further, in this case, the lighting pattern of each lamp such as the frame lamp may be a pattern including a rainbow (seven colors).

The premier character may be the character with the lowest appearance rate among all the states and effects, or may be a character that does not appear except for the group notice effect. Further, the premier character may be a character that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher by appearing than other characters.

(About lighting control in group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the luminance data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 66, but the luminance data may be defined as follows. That is, it includes the first specific brightness data that combines the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness and the data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness, and the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness. There is a second specific brightness data that does not include data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness, the first specific lighting data is not used in the first brightness data table, and the second brightness data table is the second. Specific lighting data may be used.

By doing so, since the data to be lit with high brightness is not specified in the first display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters are approaching by illuminating the lamp with low brightness. Since the data that lights up with high brightness is defined in the display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters are progressing one after another.

Further, the third luminance data table may include luminance data for turning off all the lighting means that were lit in the second luminance data table.

By doing so, it is possible to express how the character progresses and disappears in the third display period by turning off the lamp.

Further, the lighting means includes a specific lighting means at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
A specific member capable of transmitting light is arranged on the front side of the specific lighting means.
When the specific lighting means is lit, the color visually recognized through the specific member becomes a specific color.
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data for lighting the lighting means in a color different from the specific color.
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table may not include the luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means.

By doing so, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, and the lamp is lit through the transparent specific member located on the front side of the lamp. It is possible to prevent the color to be visually recognized from interfering with the color of the group notice effect by becoming a specific color that is not used in the group notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(About the video data of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, moving image data in which the character to be operated and the operation content (operation pattern) of the character are associated with each other in advance is created at the design stage, and the moving image data is obtained. Was stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces the moving image data stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 at the execution timing of the group notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It was. However, the moving image of the group notice effect may be reproduced by a method different from the above.

For example, the data of the character to be operated and the data indicating the operation content (operation pattern) may be stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 as separate data. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control CPU 120 obtains character data and operation patterns stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It may be the one that selects each of the indicated data, creates moving image data by combining both, and reproduces the created moving image data.

More specifically, in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121, a plurality of data in which each of the character A, the character B, and the character C runs or walks is stored in the storage area 1, and an arbitrary plurality of data for which the character is not determined is determined. It suffices to store the moving image data showing a plurality of operation patterns related to the group advance notice effect in the storage area 2, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the character from the storage area 1 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached. The moving image data related to the group notice effect may be extracted from the storage area 2 and combined to create one group notice effect moving image data, and the created moving image data may be reproduced.

(When the group notice production and other notice production overlap)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 158 and 171 when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of the other notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is in the other notice effect. An image that is larger than the display area of the image and that the display of the image in the group notice effect has priority over the display of the image in the other notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the group notice effect is the image in the other advance notice effect). It was on the front side of the display layer). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect. May be prioritized over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the other notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the group notice effect). Alternatively, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the other notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect May be prioritized over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the other notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the group notice effect). Further, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image in the group notice effect is displayed. The display may be prioritized over the display of the image in the other notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the group notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the other notice effect). When the display area of the image in the other advance notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group advance notice effect, for example, the advance notice image that the player pays attention to, such as an image suggesting a big hit, depends on the image in the group advance notice effect. Although hidden, images located around the preview image (for example, an image showing a flame, an aura, etc. surrounding the preview image) include those that can be visually recognized without being hidden by the image in the group preview effect.

(Example of time saving control that does not go through hit)
Next, an example of executing a time saving control that does not go through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) as a time saving state will be described.
(Example of time saving control using time saving symbol)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always shifts via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7A. It may be made to shift to the state). That is, as the time saving state, the time saving control may be executed without going through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.).

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of a lost symbol or a part of a small hit symbol.

(A3) Further, when the lottery process relating to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol is performed, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the lost symbol. Or a random number for performing other lottery such as a lottery random number of a big hit symbol, a lottery random number of a small hit symbol, a random number for determining a big hit lottery, and a lottery random number of a fall lottery, the lottery may be performed.

(A4) Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of the transition to the time saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time saving will not be drawn.

(A5) Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the time-saving symbol is used for all the set values. Although the lottery probabilities are the same, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

(A6) Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start port (first start). It may be at the time of winning a prize at the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the time-saving symbol is drawn. When a small hit symbol random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a fall lottery judgment value random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the fall lottery judgment value random number can be used as the winning value. , A lottery using a structure, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

(A8) When the time-saving symbol is drawn using a structure and the small hit symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display number (time-saving number) in the time-saving state depends on whether or not the time-saving region has passed. Make sure it doesn't change.

(A9) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and the big hit symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. In that case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

(A10) Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state has already been set, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

(A13) Further, even when the same time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time reductions given may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Further, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

(A15) Further, the number of times the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed (time reduction end lottery) is executed, and the number of time reductions is set to the number of times until the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

(A16) Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

(A17) Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

(A18) Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

(A19) Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, a high probability at the time of opening the game hall. It is a low-base state, and the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

(A20) Further, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving limiters is updated.

(A21) Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time saving control examples using time saving symbols)
As another time saving control using the time saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) is performed, and the special symbol is performed in the time-saving state. Based on the fact that the variable display result of the time saving symbol is displayed, the game control for further shifting from the time saving state to the same time saving state is not performed (even if the time saving symbol is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (time saving state). May not be controlled to switch the game state). Then, different effects may be produced when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol). In the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general lost symbol is displayed.) This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B2) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of the special symbol is the time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays the common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. A different symbol may be displayed as a display result in the reduced working hours state (for example, the decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the reduced working hours symbol in the normal state, but simply displays a lost symbol in the reduced working hours state, etc.). Do not display the symbol corresponding to the symbol). As a result, the display result of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state does not give the player a feeling of loss, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect suggesting whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol is a special symbol (time saving symbol) is executed, but in the time saving state, the decorative symbol is executed. It is also possible not to execute the effect suggesting whether or not the display result of is a special symbol (time saving symbol). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the player has lost the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect in the time-saving state, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbol (the time for displaying the fixed surface result and then maintaining the display state) differs between the normal state and the time saving state. You may control it. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel that the decorative pattern is produced in a time-saving state.

(B5) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time-saving symbol is variable in the special symbol in the time-saving state. Do not perform game control to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state based on the display result (the time saving state is overwritten even if the time saving symbol is displayed (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). The second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is completed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. (Display effect, etc.), right-handed game is played in response to right-handed notification (notification to instruct right-handed) during the time-saving state, and variable display based on the hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends. Until all is done. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be performed. This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B6) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time-saving symbol is variable in the special symbol in the time-saving state. Do not perform game control to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state based on the display result (the time saving state is overwritten even if the time saving symbol is displayed (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). The second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is completed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, and until all the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be performed. This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B7) Left-handed notification is executed in the variable display (first variable display) executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is completed. You may. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can be smoothly advanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B8) When the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information. The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed according to the hit (small hit, big hit) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed is It may be different. As a result, the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification does not give the player a feeling of loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(B9) In the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends, a common effect is obtained when there is holding storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no holding storage information. It is possible to execute different effects after executing (For example, when there is hold storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the fourth hold storage information out of the four remaining hold storage, the third hold memory A common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time saving state is executed until the variable display based on the information, and a time saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed in the variable display based on the fourth reserved storage information. It may be possible). As a result, the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification does not give the player a feeling of loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(B10) The effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) stored based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information. The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed differs depending on the effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You may do so. As a result, the production changes according to the game state, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(B11) Confirmation display time of display result in variable display (second variable display) based on remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after the confirmed surface result is displayed. The fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information is executed may be common. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period when the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is executed, the right-handed notification is not executed and the variable display is based on the remaining hold storage information. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period when the next variable display is started. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can be smoothly advanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B13) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) is performed, and the variable display result is small. It is possible to execute a common specific effect (reach effect, notice effect) depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result) such as a hit symbol or a big hit symbol or a time-saving symbol (special display result). The ratio of the time-saving symbols (special display result) may be different depending on which of the common specific effects provided is executed. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period at which the next variable display is started. As a result, it is possible to suitably control the effect according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a hit symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). As a result, the variation of the effect result of the variable display is abundant, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control has a common variation pattern depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result), a time-saving symbol (special display result), or a lost symbol (predetermined display result). Is selectable, and even when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command for specifying the same fluctuation pattern from the game control CPU 103, different effects are displayed in the variable display according to the type of the symbol specification command that specifies the display result. May be made feasible. As a result, the variation of the variable display effect is enriched, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained may or may not be executed (for example, a plurality of types). Of the super reach productions in the above, when performing the production with the highest expectation, the special production is not executed, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B19) A predetermined effect different from the common specific effect (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a hit (a display moved from the display position of the hold display to another display position, and is currently being executed). The expectation (ratio) that becomes the time saving symbol (special display result) is made different according to the production mode of the production) that displays the effect that can suggest the expectation of the hit corresponding to the variable display of. May be good. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B20) In the special effect that can be executed when the time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, after performing the effect (such as the time-saving suggestion effect) that suggests that the time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, the winning symbol (specification) is executed. It may be possible to execute an effect (such as a special jackpot whose game value is higher than that of a time-saving state) to notify the display result). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can be controlled to a time reduction state (special state) in which the number of time reductions (time reduction continuation period) differs according to the types of time reduction symbols (special display results) provided in a plurality of types (for example, the first). The 1st time reduction symbol: 50 times of time reduction, the 2nd time reduction symbol: 100 times of time reduction, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 is given when the time reduction symbol is stopped depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect, etc.). You may execute effects with different number of time reductions (duration). As a result, depending on the type of production, the player's attention can be focused on the subsequent time reduction, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(B22) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game is controlled to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the progress of the game is controlled. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. The transmitted command includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the effect control CPU 120 executes a plurality of types of commands including the special command. A look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information that is specified to execute the variable display that can shift to the time saving state (special state) based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information when received. You may want to limit the execution (do not execute at all, make it executable in rare cases, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the effect control according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information, the look-ahead for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information specified to execute the variable display capable of shifting (controlling) to the jackpot gaming state (specific game state) is executed. The execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. Then, as the look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of such a look-ahead notice effect, it may be possible to execute the effect of a common mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B24) The variable display based on the hold storage information for the look-ahead target is a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the display and the case, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B25) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute an effect having a higher expectation than a specific expectation (for example, hold when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red). Do not change the display color to red, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B26) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red, the color of the hold display is changed to red. Do not change, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(Example of time reduction control using the variable display count that resulted in a predetermined display result such as the loss variable display count)
Next, an example of time saving control using a variable display count (number of continuations of variable display that has been lost) that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in a normal state will be described. As shown below, in the time saving state (special state), the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (missing display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has reached the special number (for example, 1000 times). May be feasible on condition of. As the predetermined result, the time saving state (special state) may be executed on condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in the loss display result reaches the special number of times.

(C1) A game based on the fact that the variable display result becomes a specific display result after the first variable display by the first special symbol and the second variable display by the second special symbol are performed. It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the person, and the numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is concerned. Based on the above, when the special condition that the number of executions (continuation) of the variable display resulting in the predetermined display result reaches the special number (for example, 1000 times) is satisfied, the normal state is changed to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to be transferred. Then, the numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is obtained in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is obtained in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times that the predetermined display result is obtained is continuously updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display can be executed, so that the player can be easily rescued due to the time saving state. , It is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player due to the time saving state.

(C2) The special condition is satisfied when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result is continuously displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times). You may do it. As a result, when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (probability change state, time saving state). As a result, the player can be suitably relieved when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be satisfied by being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when it is no longer necessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition May be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when the player no longer needs to be rescued, such as when the player is in a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. As a result, it becomes possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs substantially, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(C7) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the backup is stored when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The data can be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power failure is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, so that it is suppressed from being disadvantageous to the amusement park side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times or more), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) for a period of the special number of times or more (for example, 1000 times or more). In the time saving state (special state), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state) and A different effect may be executed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time is shortened in the second time saving state than in the first time saving state. It is possible to change the appearance of the production, such as, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment. It should be noted that the same effect may be executed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state) without executing such an effect. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player is in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), and suppresses a decline in the interest in the game. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is different from the first numerical value (4 or later). ), The second process relating to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The third process for controlling the time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. also. It is possible to hit the game ball into the first path (left side game area) and the second path (right side game area). In the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time saving state (special state), the second path. A game is played by hitting a game ball into the path. Then, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time saving state (special state), it is notified that the second path should be fired (for example, right-handed notification by a right-handed lamp or the like). You may do it. Further, during the execution of the third process, a notification effect of shifting to a time saving state (special state) may be performed. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. For example, by turning on the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform the production of notification of the firing direction earlier (before the actual start of the time saving fluctuation) when actually shifting to the time saving state (special state). Will be.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. .. As a result, since the control to the advantageous state is prioritized over the control to the time saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition, the result is not more advantageous for the player, and the player's hobby of the game is enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display is started, and the numerical information becomes a specific value based on the fact that the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. After the variable display ends (start of next fluctuation, waiting for customers), it is controlled to a time saving state (special state), and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, special information (special number of times reached). When changing the flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set) and controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). You may. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the control of shifting to the time saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The CPU 103 for game control selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and determines a variation pattern of a symbol determination time that differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information. You may do so. As a result, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is different from the first numerical value (4 or later). ), The second process related to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied. The third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, fluctuation pattern) according to the case where the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value and the third numerical value in the special state. .. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. For example, different gaming states can be suitably identified, which facilitates gaming control. Then, if the command is different according to the game state identified at that time, the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) can execute suitable effect control according to the game state.

(C14) In the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special figure process flag is set to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control.

(C15) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the specific display result (hit symbol) and the special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the end of the big hit game state (for example, the time is shortened). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C16) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the specific display result (hit symbol) and the special condition (variable display number of times). The same effect may be executed when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). The fluctuation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since no new production data is required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) In the time saving state (special state), when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the special display result (time saving symbol), and the special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C18) In the time saving state (special state), when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the special display result (time saving symbol), and the special condition (variable display number of times). The same effect may be executed when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In such a case, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since no new production data is required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 has predetermined information (predetermined information) based on the backed up and stored data when the power is turned on. It is possible to transmit a ram clear command at the time of cold start and a command for notifying the number of fluctuations displayed until the end of the time saving state at the time of hot start) to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the predetermined information. A suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display was executed in a predetermined period after the power was turned on (so-called morning appearance is different, the background image is different, and an effect that suggests whether it is far or near within 100 rotation fluctuation is executed. (Easy, etc.) may be made feasible. It is possible to give the player a motivation to play the game in the morning, so that the operating rate of the game machine increases and the processing load does not increase.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command capable of specifying information related to the time saving state) to the effect control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 is capable of transmitting the effect control CPU 120. It may be possible to execute a special effect (such as an effect of suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. Then, as the specific information, the first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect) capable of specifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is a predetermined value (for example, 127) or less is specified. Information) and second specific information (such as a command that counts down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 127). May be good. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting the function to the player, and it is possible to suitably realize the command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 is put into a time saving state (special state) when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display of the first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times) less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for time-saving state suggestion effect control) suggesting that it is controlled, and a second predetermined number of times (for example, for example) less than the first predetermined number of times before the variable display of the special number of times is executed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect every time the variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly losing the player by suggesting the function to the player on a regular basis.

(C22) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. A different effect (such as a different effect when shifting to the time-saving state) is executed when the state is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the condition and when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the elements for guessing the setting are increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(C23) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. When the condition is controlled based on the condition, different effects are executed after being controlled to the time saving state (special state) (the effect after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the elements for guessing the setting are increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(D1) The execution ratio of the group notice effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is the result of deriving the time-saving symbol, the case where the big hit occurs, or the case where the loss occurs.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration relating to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but is an enclosed type that encloses the gaming media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning. It may be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, depending on the player. If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus, The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 5 image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R decorative pattern display area, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp 10 General winning opening, 11 Main board, 12 Production control board, 13 Audio control board, 14 Lamp control board, 15 Relay board, 9020 Special figure LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A 1st start port switch, 22B 2nd start Mouth switch, 23 count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 pass gate, 9050 4th design unit, 81, 82,83 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 104,124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output times

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state when the specific display result is derived and displayed.
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
It is equipped with an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display.
The state control means can control the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times.
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed.
Moreover,
It is equipped with a group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. A gaming machine in which a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation.

Images